In Depth: How Infinite Banking HELPS You as an Investor

On today’s podcast, we are going to be replaying the almost two hour long webinar that we did on the introduction to infinite banking. Now, if you guys wanna check this out on the YouTube channel, go to simple passer cash flow.com/banking. And you can access the YouTube video there. So you can also go along with the slides. I wanted to leave it here because I think a lot of you guys are audio learners and also the team has gone on the road this past week.

Depending on when you’re listening to this audio we are either getting over our October 1st Napa valley hangover. Or we are already doing our property tours and our grand opening party of our new Chase Creek apartments in Huntsville, Alabama.

If you guys have been trying to get a hold of us to book your introductory calls with us, we can get to know you a little bit better. Please get on that right away because my schedule is booked up as I get back into the swing of things later on in October, but super happy to meet all of you guys in person.

If it’s not too late, please sign up for that October 6th, seventh in Huntsville, Alabama, If you really like this infinite banking concept again, you can go to simple passive cash flow.com/banking, and you can get access to this video, of course, but you can also get access to the two to three hour long eCourse where you can go through each of these sections. We dive into a lot more detail in more, a readable and short video.

Format. So if you guys put in your email address in there, it will get you access to the closed end member site where you get access to infinite banking eCourse enjoyed this webinar that we.

Welcome everybody. This is the intro to infinite banking. Here’s what’s gonna go on in the next couple hours. We prepared this deck and we added a bunch of slides, including some use cases. I also look at my working sheet here that I use to keep track of my infinite banking.

And, when money goes out alone, it comes back. But this is meant to be a CRA school for a lot of you folks. We see a lot of familiar faces. A lot of folks who’ve joined us recently and the infinite banking is new to them. Even some people who have policies on the line today it’s always good to review a little bit. But I would say we’ll knock this out in under an hour’s presentation, but we’ll have time for plenty of questions.

But just a little bit of background on myself. I grew up in Hawaii. Seattle’s 2003 to 2017. I Have a wife, a child, a dog and a Ford Raptor are the things that I have these days, no longer an engineer and then real estate. I started with that first rental in 2009, and then I got up to 11 rentals in 2015.

But since then, as the investor group has grown 1.2 billion to assets on their ownership, 8,500 units, 55 projects, and about 95, 90, 95 people in our family office group. That’s our inner circle mastermind group. And also joining me Tyler Fuka. Why don’t you introduce yourself a bit, Tyler?

Yeah. Hi, I’m Tyler Fuka. I am also married, have two boys. I do have a dog. I forgot to update that. I grew up in Hilo, Hawaii. Then I went off to the University of Washington to study engineering. I was there on a ROTC scholarship. So when I graduated, I got commissioned as a Naval officer stationed out at Mayport, Florida in Jacksonville, went to grad school in Monterey, California, and then moved here to wahoo where I’ve been since 2006 came here as active duty.

As an engineering duty officer transitioned out in 2009. To basically become a civil servant or DLD engineer did a lot of project management, construction management, a supervisor, and then eventually moved over to the department of veterans affairs. And he was a chief engineer there for a while.

Up until 2001, when I left, I decided to leave the W2 world. As far as real estate investing, I’ve been investing since 2002. My path then was single family rentals and doing what we call house hacking back then. I got up to, four single family rentals and basically got overloaded with work life and investing took a pause, started really looking at alternative investing in 2017 ish met lane in 2018 and just been totally doing syndications mainly from there on and where or lane really opened up our eyes as far as insurance wise always been interested in that.

I got introduced to the infinite banking concept. Probably about 10, 10 years ago. Didn’t really do anything with it. Although when I was in Lane’s group and other groups, I was with, I, we kept on hearing about infinite banking. So I eventually got my license in 2019 mainly to study and learn about the details of the industry, the different products available and then been helping lanes groups since then or licensed across the state.

So we basically can serve anywhere. Yeah. And a little bit more context of that, cuz it’s always fun for people to learn the story. I heard about this a while back ago. This infinite banking strategy, I would say since 2017 and I tasked Tyler with learning about this stuff, cuz I knew there were a lot of commissions in fees and it’s a strange product that, it’s not as straightforward as deals to me.

So I asked them to learn it more so to eventually do a policy for myself. So I wouldn’t get gouged with pricing and Tyler would be up front with how it all worked. I also, we also told you to go learn notes and what assisted living facilities are. Which those didn’t work out as, as well as this as most things don’t it’s funny, like those assisted living facilities, I haven’t really found anybody who does that halfway decent.

There was just like a house, like a few blocks away, like an illegal assisted living facility that got taken down by police recently. But it’s like this thing stuck. And we do this for a lot of the clients and the whole point is we crunch the commission and fees as low as they can go.

So in other words, if you guys have a policy, you’re looking at some other policies, probably beat him. But as I learned and what I’m happy about, Tyler kind of focusing it on full-time is that there’s this whole complex structure and we’ll maybe get into it a little bit, past the lowering the commissions as low as possible and past like the 90, 10 70 30 split, which we’ll talk about today, but there’s bunch of other ways that I don’t personally understand to customize it to what you guys want.

But yeah, this is, brief illustration. I think what a problem that most investors face, which is what the heck do I do with my short term liquidity, midterm liquidity, or my college savings before I put it into longer deals, right? Three years, seven year deals, that’s ideally where you wanna put your money, cuz that’s where you’re gonna make a higher rate of return.

Sure. Might be a little bit more risky, but it comes with a higher reward. You don’t really have 50 grand, a hundred grand ready to go all the time. The infinite banking, this is just one example of the many use cases. And I’ve created maybe about four or five use cases to use this very, a flexible kind of strategy, but it fits in my whole, 1, 2, 3 trifectas of simple passive cash list.

But if you’re new to simple passive cash flow, it’s first investing in good deals with honest people where you don’t get your money stolen, where you get higher returns than the retail stock market mutual funds, et cetera. And then number two, you, by getting all these passive losses through deals and other tax benefits, such as going from ordinary income to passive income you could unlock a lot of tax maneuvers and then obviously that creates more money for you to invest and then put more money into us. The third strategy, which is infinite banking here which is what we’re talking about.

This is something that we’ll get into, but this is basically a strategy. A lot of the wealthy will do. I dug up this video cuz I wanted to date how long we’ve been talking about this thing. Dug up this video from 2017 when I was a really shitty speaker back at Toastmasters, I was talking about this thing.

I was awkwardly taught to use my hands when I talk. We’ve been talking about this thing for quite some time and I didn’t really get a policy till much later than this and or it took me a long time to wrap my hands around. So if it’s confusing to you guys, sit back and, we can, we’ll open it up for questions at the end, but you it’s something that I think that it takes a while to understand like a lot of investors understanding the difference between ordinary income and passive income and how passive income can be offset by passive losses.

It’s a simple concept. And I think, we have a lot of engineers in our investor group and sometimes the engineers can over analyze this whole thing, in the banking I’m talking specifically about if that’s maybe taking a step back. It’s really not that difficult, but. It took me a little while to understand this whole thing.

Basically, getting rid of the middle man here we’ll talk a little bit about how big companies use these bank on life insurance, but to me of the main points about using these infinite banking policies is you’re making an interest rate and, , there’s a middle man here by with the bank is how normally it works.

But by using this life insurance policy, you cut out the bank in a way, and you make a little bit of that spread back. . Yeah. One, one of the main benefits is you’re recapturing your earning power or the opportunity costs. Cuz once your funds leave the bank that earning power for that dollar is lost.

Banks, they make their money basically off of how they have deposits come into them, they’re landing the money out. So whenever the money exits the bank it continues to earn funds. Similarly with the life insurance policy, we’re putting funds into the policy, we’re able to access those funds and not still have those dollars in the policy earning and not lose that opportunity to, for that dollar to continue to earn while you’re using that dollar somewhere else.

I’ll do it quickly, so yeah. So what is infinite banking? It truly is a concept of what I was mentioning before about recapturing those losses. You basically are utilizing an asset where you’re able to basically use that dollars, keep it in that asset, but obtain that dollars through alone.

And that there’s multiple ways of doing that. And now you’re able to have your funds work in two different places. So the original asset will be growing. And then the dollars that you access, you can do what you want and you could use it for expenses. You could use it for investing. You could use it for college planning or retirement planning, but that’s the overall concept.

The vehicle of choice that we choose to use for various reasons is dividend paying whole life insurance. And there’s multiple benefits with whole life insurance. And there are other products out there, but whole life specifically, there’s a level premium. So that’s one of the main benefits. The insurance costs and fees are pretty set as at, in regards to the insurance premiums themselves.

There’s guaranteed growth. And it’s right now, tho those ranges around two or 3% guaranteed seems small, but when we’re talking long term wise, this is uninterrupted compounded growth, and that steady growth can then help you plan, for long term. You can be used for multiple things, investing education.

So five, it could, this could replace your five to nine. Your 401k IRA you could use as your own bank to use it for lending instead of car loans, mortgages, and then it also is a safe place to store your capital. That’s where I personally keep my reserves also. There’s of course we’re not designing it for the death benefit, but there is, there is a death benefit component to it that helps with legacy planning or will transfer to different generations.

You are accessing the growth of the policies tax free. There’s no capital gains. There’s no income tax because the way you’re utilizing it is via loans. It follows what you may hear as the buy borrow die strategy, where you’re really purchasing this asset. It grows and you’re borrowing as the asset grows, you’re borrowing from it.

And that way you’re eliminating capital gains along with income taxes. And the policy isn’t designed in a way where you don’t have to pay for your entire life. So traditional whole life you, that you may have, there’s a premium due usually to age 95, 99, or a hundred. We design it where there is a cutoff at some point.

And even though you’re no longer contributing, the policy continues to earn dividends and that dividends then helps to boost up the value of your policy in the form of death benefit along with cash value. So this is a, there’s a handful on this slide. And again I’m gonna go over this in my, in a different way, cuz I think people learn in very different ways.

And although I do think that the most effective way of learning this is talking to somebody who just went through the process with Tyler and it’s fresh in their head and they’re, they’re using the loans or taking loans from themselves, funding the policy and then using it in their whole investment strategy.

Although, we obviously can’t recreate that on a virtual seminar, but that’s why we do the retreats. That’s why I tell people to come out to Napa, come out to Huntsville, meet other investors. So you can talk about, how you’re using this type of stuff. Just speaking from my own personal experience what I do is I, I max fund my policies and I store a cash value in there.

And Tyler mentioned the word asset, right? What’s the asset, right? In this case, I think a lot of people. The way to think about it is, think about it exactly like a HELOC right. You have a house and that was your asset, right? You might be paying it off or you have equity in there, but you use a HELOC to tap that equity, taking loans against that and paying the interest to that loan.

But you can use that loan to a lot of you guys will, who are new or using that HELOC to invest in your first few, several deals, same thing here, except instead of house being the asset is this paper, whole life policy, which is probably one of the most secures pieces of assets out there because the underlying that the asset is backed by these insurance companies that have been paying out dividends since the civil war much more secure than your average bank out there.

But, as Tyler mentioned, there’s a lot of benefits to doing it. I’ll highlight the guaranteed cash value growth. So when, just like how you HELOC your money’s in your asset, which is the house in this case your money is in the asset, which is the whole life policy.

It continues to grow just like the house does. So that’s where that guaranteed cash value comes from. The, and then the tax leave loans and withdrawals, that’s part of how I use it, right? So when my money’s in here, it grows with that. And. At that point, it’s considered tax free per the IRS.

And this is an important thing. We’ll get to later designing the policy. So you don’t go over that minimum threshold. Certainly you don’t wanna overfund it too much, cuz we’ll talk about fees, commissions and try to lower that as much as possible. By having it in this life insurance policy it’s the tax loophole to have this thing grow tax free.

And then when you take withdrawals or you take loans from your policy to go in and invest it or do whatever you need to do with the money. Lot times if you’re smart, you can have that be a business expense and has it have it be tax deductible. But we’ll hammer a lot of this stuff multiple times here.

Other ideas, doctors and high net worth investors like to use this as the asset protection component. And then, I’ve personally cond this with Ivo trust for simplicity of the use. I can talk about that at the end with another use case. But again, lot of stuff here, but basically it’s like a HELOC where you can take loans from it and then pay it back and have this be a constant source of capital.

That’s also grow. But it’s much better than a HELOC for three reasons. First, the banks can pull your HELOC at any point, right? They can freeze credit lines. They can’t do this with your infinite banking. And this is the whole where the whole term comes from family vault and people call this a family vault, but, or being your own bank, you own this policy, this asset is yours. The second big thing on, why this is better than the using your own HELOC you have the asset protection when your money is in under this policy, it’s protected, just like how, a lot of people will think they’re retirement accounts, the 401k are protected from creditors and litigators.

And then, the, my biggest thing, why I don’t like the helos is, they’re great to get started, but you can’t use the HELOC to tap all the equity. A lot of times your banks are gonna play games with you on your appraisals and then lower your loan to value on that loan with the bank.

None of that nonsense games, when you’re doing your own infinite banking policy, you can pretty much always, it’s not like you have, you can’t touch a certain amount of equity in the policy. If you’re using your HELOC now to go into deals. Cool. But eventually what most people will do is they’ll transition the equity into an infinite banking policy for the mentioned reasons.

Real quick. Okay. There, there are some questions being type. So if people have questions yeah. I think we want them, they can type it in during the presentation, we’ll probably cover some of those. And then at the end we’ll make sure to go over all of those. Is that yeah. Yeah. And put it into the question and answer box, cuz it allows us to check it off once we’ve answered it.

But if something is pertaining to the slide we’ll try and get to it for sure. Just all the random questions. Maybe hold to the end, cause we’ll probably answer it like Tyler said. But if you guys have been paying attention, we met, we uttered the words, whole life insurance and typically the whole life insurance is quite the scam.

I’ll be the first one to tell you, right? This is the one where your long loss acquaintance from college or high school, or maybe grade school hits you up on LinkedIn or Facebook or Instagram or for some of the younger people TikTok or whatnot. And they say, you wanna go to lunch and they sell you this like garbage whole life policy that was configured with high amounts of insurance, where is basically where all the commissions and fees come from, which again, what we cranked down to the minimums for you guys in our.

And, it’s just not a very good policy. And this is where Dave Ramsey and those guys say, yeah, just do term life. Whole life is a scam. So I just wanted to just, mention, yes, we are using whole life, but it’s configured in a very different way, but this is actually something that like my spouse got suckered on.

And then, what Tyler can also do is if you have a whole life policy, there are things that you can transfer and he can talk to you about that. But you can dissect current whole life and you can break down what percentage of it was insurance and paid up additions.

And then, most times my spouse’s case, she was, she got taken for one of these, but, she didn’t really the way the financial planning world works. They get a bunch of young salesmen to suck at their friends and family into these types of arrangements. What we did is we just cashed in her policy is what we did, but sometimes it might make sense.

Tyler can work with you guys to exchange it or whatnot. And I’ll say it a little bit differently. I think. Insurance has its purpose. And the purpose of life insurance is to protect your human life value. So I think that there is a purpose there, but as an investment or what we’re doing is totally opposite of that.

We’re utilizing it for the cash value component not the protection part of it. If it is purely the protection part, it is considered could be expensive. I’ll use a gentler word then a scam or something then lane. But yeah, I think it is traditional whole life is expensive.

There is a cheap coverage, which is term, but again, those, rarely ever pay out, but again, it’s there to protect your life or the what ifs. And this is a total different strategy. So that’s where people may get confused if they hear it. And I think we have someone on here or a later slide going over, maybe some of the chatter people may hear about whole life in general.

Yeah. And when I talk to some of you guys have made me talked to your whole life, financial planner, people, and most financial planners or people who make these things, they don’t get it. They don’t get us as investors. What do we want? We want liquidity so we can take the money out and invest it in much better deals.

But these other guys, they say we wanna give you. Higher returns. And we want the bigger death payout, that’s in their head, what they think life insurance should do, but we’re using this, we’re using life insurance. Yes. But really what I’m using it for is to get that tax loop pulse.

So I have to pay my taxes on it and I wanna get the liquidity. I wanna maximize liquidity and I’m willing to give up the death payout and the returns on the policy because it’s small. Anyway, it’s different than 5% to 5.5% returns on this stuff where, what I really want is the liquidity.

So I can go put it in something making 10, 15, 20%. And that’s the idea of a sophisticated investor. And that’s where these other guys, they just don’t get us. How we do things with our money and how we invest it in alternative assets.

Yeah. And this slide just kind of highlights. Lane touched on bank on life insurance. So life insurance, is a asset that a lot of corporations use including banks. So specifically it’s called a bully or bank home life insurance. But if you were to look on the bank’s assets, the list of assets you’ll see life insurance.

I think chat is able to pull this up and you’ll see highlighted down there, life insurance, but. Bank banks clearly understand life insurance, the risks associated with that. And they hold a lot of their assets in that also. That kind of was the proof in the pudding as far as how safe it is.

They’re also willing to lend against that. We’ll touch about a cash value line of credit. So you could take your policy to a bank, not all banks, there’s banks out there that will specifically give you a line of credit based on your cash value. And that to me is similar to a real estate.

They understand the asset and, but unlike real estate or HELOC where, your loan to value is more in the seven or 80% loan to value the banks will lend you 95 to a hundred percent loan to value on your cash value. That kind of says how secure and safe banks consider whole life insurance.

Yeah. It, and again, this goes back to, lot of my discoveries and like what the wealthy do, investing in alternative assets, getting off of wall street and putting their money into these life insurance products. You follow what the wealthy do, and they’re quietly doing something a little bit different as the same goals money talks, but 📍 wealth whispers, you.

Another example is like Walmart, Walmart will buy insurance policies and their top dogs and store it on their balance sheet, as they’re safe semi-liquid stores. What I tell a lot of people is I follow what the wealthy do, but also what the banks and what the big companies do.

And you take a hint from what they’re doing. This is a strategy that they’re employing and if you own a business it’s not a bad way of doing things. So different use cases again.

Yeah. It’s more than just the type of asset. So I think that one of the biggest key factors on the performance or the utilization of the strategy is the policy design. We’re using, we’re independent where we can write with multiple companies. We choose, certain companies, some for their flexibility and then also just how we can design it.

The product is the product. And, most people can utilize and design it the same way we just choose to design it. The most cash value efficient and flexible because that’s what appeals to us as investors. And our design is really caters towards investors because we are investors first and that’s how we want to utilize this strategy.

There’s other designs out there and it has its pros and cons or the different levers. So we, our main focus is cash value and flexibility. Yeah. And this is the portion of the show where Tyler’s gonna spearhead this next few slides, because this is somewhere, this is a time where I realized the strategy and started to employ it myself.

But then I realized how like more technical it gets and that’s where it required a engineer like Tyler to really learn this on behalf of you guys. If you guys look back in the coaching calls, which we keep in the members site, and we arrange everything, everyone from lower net worth to over, accredited beyond, we do, we talk about implementation speed and, maybe you wanna put 200 grand every year in this stuff or 50 grand a year.

You can see some of those examples. We can probably do that at the end. If there’s time here, but. This is some something where I had the self realization that I didn’t have the bandwidth to keep up on this stuff constantly. And, I need to focus on deals and finding, deal relationships out there.

I’ll vouch for Tyler. Tyler gets on flights, he goes to these infinite banking industry mastermind, again, events, and I forced them to do it because, I said, you gotta like really, you gotta get involved in this stuff, just like how I did with this other stuff.

And really transcend your average, keyboard, jockey insurance provider, who just happens to have a license or worse social media influencer. That’s, this stuff is a technical stuff and it needs to be tailor to each person. These are the ways we’ll get into designing the policy the right way.

Yeah. And touched about this In the previous slide, but the, as, in order to maintain the taxable treatment from the, in the IRS’s minds, there are some tax laws and unfortunately, the IRS got involved in the eighties, so they created something called a me limit.

Some people may hear that, or it’s a modified endowment contract, which really prevents pre 1980s people ready to dump in a whole bunch of money into a policy lump sum, very little insurance and really capitalize on the power of insurance. IRS has stepped in, in the eighties, they created a limit basically where it says, Hey, in order for this to the taxable the taxable treatment only will apply if it’s insurance and it, you really need to purchase a certain amount of insurance in relation to the amount that you’re stuffing in.

We maximize, we, we take that to the limit and so we’re able to stuff as much funds into the policy have as much cash value early on with also long-term growth, but with the flexibility while maintaining within those IRS rules and, these rules have changed and tightened over some time.

So that’s. , it, it is, we’ve had to stay on top of things. BA basically in the beginning of 2021 or the end of 2021 was when the new law took into effect also. So they’re changing and updating things, every couple years or so. But that’s where the design is really crucial in order to maximize those things.

Yeah. And this stuff isn’t getting any better. So like the best time to get a policy was yesterday, just like how it was to go into deals, the deals in 2018 kind of cashed out, that’s the best time to do it was yesterday. And it reminds me a lot of like real estate professional status, just like the way lavage changed.

There’s a great tax loophole. If you wanna use that word. guess for the real estate professional status, I think 10 years ago, a lot of what a lot of doctors were doing that were making, 500, $600,000, a million dollars a year was getting a little whimsical rental property.

And then now getting rep status and now using all the passive losses from their deals to drain their income down to, 300 or zero and not pay any taxes. And then the IRS is wait a minute, guys, this doesn’t seem right. So they implemented all these like rules for getting real estate professional status.

It’s the same thing. Tyler mentioned here for the life insurance before you could just write all this stuff off and all the returns would be tax free and, people would put like a dollar, the life insurance, and then the Iris was like, wait a minute, guys, there’s a limit to this. Like you can’t just put $1 and have the whole thing be tax free.

Cuz you can imagine if you guys are like, financial hackers like us, where that goes, put a gazillion dollar policy and put $1 in life insurance, whole thing tax free. So there’s a certain limit to that and where we get into this 90 10, this 10% insurance thing. That’s a little bit more historical context on we always try and stay one step ahead of, the latest, the, where the tax laws are and always be tax compliant.

Of course.

Yeah, so the, that meth limit that is a IRS limit there’s two main, large limits. It’s usually it’s the IRS limit or this meth limit. And the second one is just company limits. So that’s internal limits a company puts on and some constraints they put on. Again the choice of company is almost as important, but as far as the me limit that really, that, that limit is defined by your age, gender along with your health rating status.

So when when you go through the underwriting process, you get approved for a certain amount of death benefit based on your age, gender. And you’re given a health rating and of a better health rating will, will drive your death benefit up a little bit more. So then your me limit will also be slightly higher.

But yeah, the main factor is for a me limit is the amount you wanna stuff into a policy a year. And then the factors are your age, gender and health rating. And then the second limit is basically company limits. There’s various company limit. The big one that we focus on is the paid up additions or POA limitations.

Because the POAs are so beneficial for the cash value companies limit basically how much you can put in per year based in relation usually to your base premium. So that’s the cost and you can think of base premiums. The cost of insurance paid up additions as truly, the cash dump or the cash value addition and internal companies put internal limits as far as how we can design these.

And you might hear three times POAs, five times, POAs, 10 times POAs. The companies we use have 10 times POAs and that’s really beneficial as far as cash value growth. And, I think again, maybe in the back of your head you’re sharing, you know what Dave Ramsey said?

We all know Dave Ramsey, great guy. And I think he does a great job for teaching those, people, most people out there, 90, 95% of people who are in debt don’t make too much money. I think he means well, he’s said whole life insurance is a rip off and it’s cuz we mentioned at the top, it’s all how you configure.

I was watching some YouTube videos of the stuff last night and, trying to see the bad thing about a lot of this financial world is a lot of people, they just don’t really dig into it. And the secret isn’t how you create it and how you structure the whole encompassing strategy, where infinite banking is just one of ’em, this particular YouTube video the caller set mentioned a few things here, which I’ll highlight.

They said the break even point for his policy was year seven. Yeah, when you’re configuring this stuff with higher insurance, which you don’t, which where the commissions and fees come from, you’re gonna have a higher break even point. I don’t know, like some of the last policies you’ve been doing Tyler, but I’m pretty sure it’s a lot less than that.

And then he also mentioned the one thing I will agree with Dave on is he said, and I quote, when you work for the certified financial planners, the CFPs is he called them, they work for the Northwestern mutual guys, he just laughing and he says, those are the guys that just screw people every day.

So it wasn’t me who said it, anybody gets offended and mad at Northwestern mutual, any XYZ mutual company. He that’s what Dave Ramsey said. But again, we’re configuring this a little a lot differently with lot less insurance, which is where the fees and commissions come from. Again, I think this is where most people, and this is what kind of gets me with a lot of things.

Most people will just only read the headlines of videos or news clips. But when you actually read the damn article, the story is very different.

Yeah. And I think Dave Ramsey is also El alluding to that whole life is expensive. And I think traditional whole life, the way it’s designed it is very, it is expensive in relation to possibly O other things out there to protect your life such as term. But again, we’re doing it differently.

And the design, so this slide represents a little insight on as far as the design traditional whole life. So this is a 50 50 split. Traditional whole life would be more, hundred percent premium. So all of that would go to, the death benefit cost a 50, 50 design or 50% is the expense or death benefit or base premium 50% is paid up additions.

That paid up additions as mentioned earlier, really has reduced fees compared to the base premium. So in relation that $500 going to base premium. maybe a few dollars of that will show up as cash value. Whereas for POAs, 500 goes into POAs. There is a fee slight fee in there, but I would say 4 75 will actually show up in cash value.

So much, much drastic change. And that’s why we wanna really minimize our goal is to minimize the base premium and maximize the POAs. The next slide shows a 10 90 split. You may hear a 90, 10, 10 90. I think that’s all the same a lot of times. Some people put the PAA portion first in this slide, it has the base premium.

First I personally call it the 10 90 split where 10% goes to base premium. And a lot of times that is also a company limit. In relation to, the factor, you can put a hundred dollars in as base premium, again, maybe $1 or so of that will show up as cash value and then putting $900 into UAS and your cash value, would be 850 or so not quite 900, but drastically different.

So out pocket from, as the client, it’s the same thousand dollars coin out of your pocket, how it performs or where that money is going. Is very different based on the design. Again, same thousand dollars going out. If it was a traditional whole life, you probably have $0 cash value that 50, 50 you might have about $400 for four 50 cash value.

And then a 10 90 would you’d have, 800 or so cash value. It’s all just purely the design. And then that impacts your cash value portion. Yeah. So some people might say, oh, we’re already doing the infinite banking thing, but they could be in this format where they’re paying five times as much fees and commissions, and they’re getting five times less cash value than they should be getting with this 10 90 split.

Not all policies, still again, it’s do you read the headlines or you actually analyze what’s in the content here and how, or in this case, how it’s designed, right? You may be implementing I B C banking from yourself. But if again, like we, we kind of urge people if you’re already doing this strategy.

Just check out what the split was on the premiums versus the paid up editions. This is typically. What most people will do. Some people in our mastermind group they’ll do 70, 30 or 30, 70 splits. So like like a mix between the 50 50, which I don’t think you ever wanna do that. There’s some other advantages to doing it that way, I’d say, the first thing is like lowering the commissions and fees for you guys, which I’m sure the question comes up.

Like, why the heck would you and Tyler lower the fees and commissions, I guess I have my reasons which is then you put more money into deals and you actually have more money than paying out in fees and you invest more and you tell more of your friends about this type of stuff. But to me, it’s like most of our clients are doing really big policies.

So the commissions and fees are there for us that kind of keeps the lights on, but it’s, I’ve always thought of this as like an added service for our investors in our investor group. Certainly staying away from this 50 50 split. Yeah. And to not get into too much technical detail, but the design also enables a lot of flexibility.

So on a 10 90 split that a hundred dollars, even though your target amount in this case would be a thousand dollars. What you have to put in every year is really only the a hundred dollars that, that additional $900 in this case is flexible and optional. And that’s where, that’s how the design also plays into the flexibility.

So not only the company allows, the insurance company allows you that flexibility, but the design then again, allows you to put in capital as you have it, throughout the policy year versus having to save up and have that thousand dollars or in the 50, 50 design case $500, available on your premium anniversary.

That’s a, that also plays a big factor. For me personally, just having my, since I have most of my capital working, I don’t wanna sit around and, bank up the large payment and have that only be able to put in once a year. I like to spread it out over the year and dump it in.

We had a question here from Hillary. Does the me limit include the amount of premiums you pay a year or is the me limit the amount of additional PUA you can add to the policy? Yeah. Good question. Yeah, it’s it is a cumulative amount. So that me limit is the total amount of funds you can dump into your policy.

So that would include your, the premiums for that year.

So one unique way, a lot, some people, he struggle to hear how the PWAs really added add value to the policy. We came up with this scenario where it’s similar to a house cause most of us are investors. So think of the base premium as your debt servicing on your mortgage, right?

You’re, it’s something you have to pay in order to keep that asset yours very little value added if we’re talking the debt servicing portion of your mortgage, but that’s what you have to pay paid up. Additions would be more like if you were to do a renovation to your house, there’s some expenses to it.

But a lot of times it increases the value of her house, to the more than what are equal to, or more than what you put in as far as repairs. So paid up additions would be similar, like a renovation blue seeing the value of that house, which later then you have you, you boosted up your equity.

So you can have access to that. Or when you sell that you make more of a profit base premium equals the debt, servicing on a mortgage, very something you have to pay very little value add to, to, to the asset. And we had a question from Luke here. So if you take a loan against your infinite banking policy, as it grows, can the growth pay back to the loan?

Yeah. So paying back the loan, you can, you, you could either pay that out of pocket or as you mentioned the policy grows, it’ll just, it’ll take it from the cash value component or, it’ll take it from your policy to pay that debt servicing if you didn’t pay it that year. Yeah. So I guess the kind of the similar thing is again, think about it like a HELOC right.

You can take loans from your HELOC. But I think where a lot of people, they get it mixed up or they have this false sense of needing to pay off that debt. And we get this question a lot, right? I have a hundred

thousand dollars, I took a hundred thousand dollars outta my HELOC to go into this deal.

I’m paying 5%, I think what is that $5,000 a year on that? And they think most of us on the call today, we all pay off our credit card, we pay off our debts, but it’s not like you have to really pay it off. Just like your Helo, right? Yes you do. But then again, if you’re making 10, 15, 20% on this.

Then just let that 5% roll. And that’s what the big companies do. That’s what businesses do. If they’re making money somewhere else where it’s just an arbitrage game and in a HELOC, that’s where you would just let that line of credit revolve and in, in an infinite banking, same situation there.

And answer Luke’s question, just like in the HELOC you’re taking a policy, your HELOC loan from it. Your house is gonna continue go up in value the asset and in this infinite banking world, same thing same kind of phenomenon is happening. But again, like the HELOC is cool, cuz it gets people started and it’s easy to tap that equity.

But at some point you draw the limits of that policy because the banks always play these BS games, which you guys on sandbagging you on the appraisals and giving you worse loan, the values, especially if you’re here in Hawaii, you get these teaser rates and then goes up after that. And then the banks can always pull your helos on you where the infinite banking it’s yours, that’s why the term comes banking from yourself. But you also get the added asset protection, the being life insurance, which you don’t really get with the, he. If you’re one of those high income earners or like a high liability profession, like a doctor, that kind of means a lot to you guys.

All right. Yeah. And I do see a lot of questions about the policy loans. So I’ll try to cover that on this slide, but the, there, there is a way of, so how you access the cash value is through a loan and we’ll touch a policy loan. And then we’ll briefly touch what a cash value line of credit.

So those are the two main ways. So a policy loan, literally there’s no what you’re putting up as collateral is really your death benefit. So going through a policy loan the insurance company knows that you have the death benefit. They know at some point you will die. So what they’re doing is they’re, collateralizing your death benefit.

So your death benefit overall stays the same, but your net death benefit which would mean if you pass away, if you had any outstanding loans the outstanding loan will get subtracted from your death benefit, and then the net death, the net would get transferred to your beneficiary.

There’s really no approval process. As long as you have that cash value in your policy. It’s usually about a two business day process where you go online and you request it. California residents, they do need to print it out, what, sign it and email it in. So it’s a little bit more difficult, but again, very simple same time turnaround as, as far as two business days.

But in, in some companies and they show it slightly different cash value. Norm technically stays the same. Your net cash value may go down or in this case, your available cash value. But for one, for one company we use a lot is guardian. So on guardian, whenever you take a loan out on the portal, you’ll see your cash value actually just remain the same, your net your death benefit.

You’ll see, go down because that’s your net death benefit in regards to how much that can you access. So we like to tell people, if you see your cash value, you can access 95% of that via policy loan. The company, the, your basically paying up front, the ins interest owed till your next policy anniversary date.

So they’re precalculating that based on your loan size. And then they’re holding some reserves to cover that, that one year of debt servicing. You don’t have access to a hundred percent of your cash value especially if you’re doing it early on in your policy or as you get closer to your next anniversary because there’s less.

Reserve required you’ll have access to greater than 95%. But we just use that as a guideline 95% of your cash value. There is another question from Dave about, what happens in the end if you keep if you only ended up with a 10% year after year, because you keep kept on pulling out, but basically 90% of the loan.

When you do take a policy loan, similar to a HELOC versus on a house, the policy continues to grow the whole amount. Once you put your funds in there, it continues to grow that the growth rate might be slightly affected based on the company. And if it’s direct or non-direct recognition, but the policy continues to grow similar to your house.

The, your house continues to grow, whether you have a mortgage or HELOC out on in, and that helps to offset the debt servicing costs. But the main benefit for us as investors accessing the funds is, we’re gonna go put it into a asset or an investment. And a lot of times the, that asset cash flows is what helps to pit on that debt servicing while your policy as a whole continues to grow.

Yeah. And. And, it is sometimes conceptually hard to see that. Get with us, we can do what we call illustrations, where we simulate, Hey, what if I take a loan out every year and either not pay the interest or pay the interest out of pocket or have the policy pay the interest. But we can show the illustrations to project and see, Hey, how will this perform?

What if scenarios or, just for planning purposes. Yeah. And that’s all, I’ll tell you, go talk to Tyler about that stuff. Like the direct recognition. I still don’t understand that stuff. And I think that’s where you partner with Tyler and then, he’s the guy you call when you have those kinds of questions or, if you did pass away, that sad event where you’re worth more to your spouse, then you are, cuz that’s pay out somebody to call, who’s a real life person. Who’s your in between the big life insurance company. I think that’s the value that Tyler provides, but getting a little bit more and we’re illustrating what this whole policy, what this infinite banking thing.

This is a screenshot of a video I did for folks. And a lot of this is in the e-course did you guys go to. Members that simple passive cash flow.com. You guys should have all access to the eCourse, which goes into a lot more in depth that what we talked about, what we’re talking about today, but there’s this video in here where I’m balancing, you can get multiple policies, you can layer them on top of each other, which is a strategy that I recommend.

So you implement at different speeds, but this is a little tracker sheet that I personally made to keep track of. Here I have little policies, right? Where they’re from. The CV is cash value, right? This is how much I money to tap into. And then I might have some loans out at a certain percentage.

So this is my little dashboard just a simple spreadsheet of how one might keep track of this stuff. And then, your future payments that you’ve gotta make in the future. We’ll get into this a little bit later, but like when you configure this with a 90, 10 split only have to do 10% of the commitment money.

And this is the game changer folks, right? If it was 50% then, so you got to put in five times as much money. So if money gets short and you don’t have to really fund this, the policy can won’t collapse or cave in like a black hole. Especially when you could figure what that 90 10, like how we.

But, I use this to keep track of my, 20, 22, 20 23 premiums and PUA paid up additions. That’s what that means here. But the way I’m using this as an investor, this is more, the practical usage of this thing is all right. I’m going into deals, right? I’m gonna put a hundred grand in this deal, a hundred grand in that deal.

And I’m looking for more deals based on here. I’ve got several hundred thousand dollars to tap for some deals, or maybe I wanna put in some hard money and then maybe I get the hard money back and I gotta replenish my infinite banking so I can keep making my return there. This is how one might use this.

This the end game of probably using this product. And, for a lot of people getting a million or $2 million in here and just socking it away might be a good end game strategy. But it’s just really nice to know that you have a large sum cash that you can get at an emerging, especially for you business owners.

This is where I keep a lot of my cash stores. So when deals, if a deal were to struggle, I pull out a big sum of money and put it in there because I’m, I’m not gonna have a capital call. I’m gonna make every like personal thing I can do to make, prevent that from happening for you guys.

But this is where the money is coming from. it’s coming from my infinite banking. So I’ll just call up. Actually I’m old still. So I call up the insurance company and do my loans whenever I want to. But as Tyler said, you can just get on your computer dashboard and have it direct deposited.

One funny thing that I learned is if you, at some point you start to get policies and your spouse, cuz if you’re married to a female, they typically live longer. So the pricing is a little bit better for them, but it gave me a hard time. can I get a policy loan from my spouse’s policy?

Probably because 50% of people get divorced and they maybe they raid their spouse’s in front of banking policy. That’s just opening up the whole idea of not only getting the policies on you, but your spouse. And so people will also get on their kids too. But there’s a lot more of this content in the e-course and then when you become a client additional material gets unlocked, but we wanted to keep that separate from you guys coming in.

It’s not in your guys’ portals now, but we thought it might just confuse people, but there’s a lot of these other techniques that people, in the film are doing and investors that, really comes alive when you start to come to the retreat and you start to mix it up with other accredited investors.

These guys come with all kinds of stuff. Yeah. And one thing we didn’t highlight, so policy loans you are totally in control of that. There’s no monthly statement that comes in says, Hey, you owe this much interest that is truly up to you. As far as if for when you pay that back.

We always recommend paying the debt servicing what happens is, we, they, precalculate the debt of interest owed up to your policy anniversary date. If you don’t make that interest payment, the interest will then get tapped onto your loan principle at the, on your policy anniversary. So prior to that, it’s calculated simple interest.

We like to keep it simple interest. So we pay the debt servicing prior to your policy anniversary date while your policy continues to grow compounding. So that’s also some of the magic there. Yeah. I personally don’t really, I try and keep it stupid for myself or keep it simple, stupid for myself, the kiss format.

I just, once you get past the first year, you’ve paid your 10%, which is all you really need to fund this thing without it collapsing your caving in which is again, why the 10% insurance Is a game changer compared to how most people will configure this with 30% or 50% where you have to put a lot more of money into it.

So it doesn’t collapse. So I don’t really freak out whether it’s, I’m not paying I’m Def like, like Tyler said, like I don’t really pay the policies down unless I don’t have the money and I don’t really worry about, paying off the interest. I just let the cash value pay it automatically.

So I don’t really, I don’t really worry about it, but that’s just how I use my I C everybody’s a little bit different. This is an example of, you have a hundred thousand dollars cash value. What you have available for a loan would be about 95% of that. But in this sense we’re taking a lower loan to value.

So 60,000 simple interest loan, when you take that 60,000 loan, the a hundred thousand continues to earn, and, there’s various dividend rates. And whenever you hear any company announced their dividend rate, that’s a gross dividend rate. What historically what we’re seeing is about four or 5% IRR.

In this lower interest environment, we might see more three and a half to four and a half percent IRR. But in this case I think it’s illustrated showing a 4% IRR. So that hundred thousand dollars policy would grow by about 4,000 that’s $60,000 loan. You have four or five five 6% loan. And again, that’s te technically on the higher side would be $3,000 in debt servicing.

You can, you’re able to take that 60,000 then invested in a asset that asset, even if it’s 6% cash flowing asset cash flows 3,600 a year, that by itself would be enough to pay for the debt servicing. So you have some positive cash flow from the asset, along with the policy still growing. And that’s the beauty combined, it’s better off than just doing one of the assets by itself.

And I wanna emphasize, we were talking a lot about the design and the whole life product. That’s just one aspect, right? The whole banking system is the flow of money. So it really is accessing that cash value to have it work outside of the policy also. So that in, at the end, you have your policy grow.

But you also have assets outside of the policy growing. So your net worth is combined is better than just putting it in the policy and just leaving there that still grows and works, but the true magic is accessing it and growing outside of the policy. So just wanna really highlight that cause that’s where a lot of people, are either debt, aver.

They don’t want to take on any debt, if you take on good strategic debt, then you can really maximize your growth. And that’s what this strategy really helps you to do. Yeah. And this is where most of the life insurance guys don’t really get it, they’re like don’t, you wanna make a higher, I can give you a higher return in this policy than the four, 5%.

But we give up the liquidity and as investors, we want liquidity. So we can take that liquidity and go invest it in an apartment deal or a fixed and Flatt or some other maybe venture capital, right? Whatever you guys like to do. Personally, I like to go put my money in stabilize real estate that I could make maybe a 15% return.

And there’s that Delta, right? 15 minus the 5% that I pay, that’s that Delta and that’s an arbitrage game, but I’m still having my underlying asset, which is the life insurance policy. Grow. So it’s there’s that this is the, where the whole idea of where you’re making money in two places or money is growing in two places.

Yeah. And I, or, sorry the other thing too is, you may hear people call it the, an asset or the dual asset. Cause it truly is that it’s not a, or a lot of people when they’re, when they talk to us, they’re saying I’m trying to do this deal. So I don’t have the funds to do a policy.

It really is a, it’s a compliment to each other. So you could do both, right? Granted you’re gonna lose some liquidity or one, but in the long run that’ll pay off. But it shouldn’t be looked at, you have to do one or the other, it really should be looked at, you can do both. So you would put the funds into the policy first and then access those funds to do the deal.

And the first year is obviously where all the expenses or most of the expenses are taken out of. And that’s where you’re gonna feel the biggest hit, but we’re able to design and tweak some things. So even from year two, definitely at year three, most people will see it as truly a deposit. So when they put that a hundred thousand into their policy, that would have access to a hundred thousand.

Year three, year four and even more as the policy ages. So that’s where, I mean takes some time to really see that benefit, but like any, anything, you need to capitalize it for a little while and then it’ll pay off in, in the long run. And in, in this case, we’re talking you’ll two to three years and then you’ll see the great benefits, down further down the line.

Yeah. And maybe it clicked for you at that point, you’re making money in two places and, so what some people will do, over a million dollar net worth, maybe they have a lot of money in their home equity, even half a million, that’s where maybe they might wanna do 200, $250,000 a year.

And then you can do strategies, maybe get with Tyler, like depending on where your birthday is, this is what I did to kickstart my per mine is I doubled up, like I was able to, back fund for the previous year and then the next year, all right away. So I could fund it, put my liquidity in there and then the next day, get it into the next several deals that came up.

That’s really what we’re talking about. That’s the strategy where we’re coning it with investing in real estate or other business furniture.

Alright. Just some, there was a lot of questions on policy loan rates. Again, this is, as there’s a lot of fluctuation, but for policy loan rates and if it’s fixed and it varies from company to company. And I’ll say guardian is one of the main companies we use. Guardian is a fixed interest rate.

What you’ll feel is a 4.76. So that could be that will be the fixed interest rate for the life of the policy. If it’s variable, then that, that variable interest rate is usually tied to the moody, triple a bond index, the corporate bond index rate. There usually is a floor. So a lot of companies now have a floor of 3% around.

But then that’ll it can vary. And what the company will do is they’ll announce it every year, what their variable rate is. And it’ll, it can’t fluctuate more than half a percent per year. So even though like right now, the interest rate shot. A lot of the variable interest rate company or for the companies that have variable interest rates, they’re only increasing it half a percent a year.

It has no limit on how much it drops. For me personally, I like the fixed rate because we’re utilizing the strategy for long term planning for the stability. I just I like that. I wouldn’t wanna have a variable and the unknowns down the line, but there are those options.

Now we’re not gonna go too much into this strategy, but this is just a, like a preview of, the different advanced strategies that some of our members will do with our policies. As Tyler mentioned, you can get a loan from your life insurance company, and that’s the easy way.

That’s what I do. It’s the easiest thing to call them up or, get a policy loan from them at their, what about 5% rate. But, as most of our financial hackers in our group, they always like to optimize things and they found that they can go to these third party banks that will give them loans on the cash value in their life insurance policy.

Around like the three and a half, 4% range. So they’re making an additional 1% doesn’t sound like a lot, but, they could be saving maybe 20% in interest. Of course like the bigger the policy. And this is what I tell my guys. It’s man, you guys to spend a lot of time on these trade line things, these little things that kind of, moved, it’s moved the needle slightly, but then again, thinking back to when, I was just barely in a greater investor, like this wealth building, journey, it’s all about a game of inches, like kinda like football, those are the things that are gonna get you that momentum forward and eventually push you to that hockey stick of growth where maybe I’m in that stage personally.

And I don’t really, I value my time more than money, if you’re somebody who’s still growing your net worth, these are the kinds of strategies that you could employ by even by getting a lower rate on your loans to increase that Delta between what you invested in and get and what you’re paying your policy loans at.

But again, a lot of this stuff will be in the E course unlock for clients. All right. This is just an example of a typical policy we would do. This is for a 50 year old male with a preferred non tobacco health rating, which is, or, sorry, this actually is a 45 year old male at a preferred non tobacco health rating. The guardian is, we are independent.

We mainly write for mass mutual and guardian. Most of the policies write for investors and including myself is with guardian and that’s because they offer the greatest P wave flexibility. So this specific design is a 50,000 target amount and a funding duration of seven years with this specific design and product the kind of the sweet spot would be between five and 15 years or so of funding duration.

And there’s various reasons why people would choose shorter funding period or longer funding period that, we would go over their goals during a call in this case. It’s a seven year funding period looking on the left of the annual premium breakdown. So this is where that $50,000 target amount, the base premium is really only 45, 46.

So that is what we would call the cost of insurance. Commissions are based off of that. So by shrinking down that number to the smallest we can, and this is basically the smallest number we can based on the 50,000, this is a company limit. That we we’re shrinking that down. We’re really shrinking down the expenses and commissions, therefore, really boosting up the cash value to you as a client, but that 45 46 buys a certain amount of whole life.

That’s $190,000 of whole life death benefit, but in order to stay within that me limits and the IRS limits that $50,000 target amount, you need $985,000 of death benefit. So because you only have 190 of whole life, the cheapest way to boost your death benefit up to that amount is the use of one year term.

So you’ll see this other number $478 and 86 cents. That’s the paid up additions rider scheduled. So that’s so that you can add UAS to the policy, but embedded in there is this $402 and 14 cents of O I T. And that’s one year term. So that one year term is buying an additional, $794,000. So combining that with the whole life death benefit, that’s how you’re getting up to that required death benefit and then allows you to stuff in 50,000 total.

So what would be due on your premium anniversary date or initially to put this in is the sum of 45 46. 478. So that’s, $5,025 is basically an or about 10% is what would be due. And that’s basically all ex insurance expenses and costs, but then that 44,975 that’s paid up additions, unscheduled. So that’s the cash dump.

That’s the flexible portion that you can put in as you please throughout the year. Now there’s a question out there. What if you don’t max fund it that year or the flexibility of it, especially with guardian, not only within the year, you can dump money in as you please up to your target amount or your me limit.

If you don’t reach that amount the remaining amount will roll over to the next year. So say 50,000 year one you dumped in 50,000 year two, you only dumped in 10,000, that extra 40,000 of space will roll over to year three. So year three, you would be able to catch up that missed 40,000. So you could dump in 40,000 in addition to the 50,000.

So you could then catch up a whole 90,000 in year three and make that policy whole. So you don’t really lose the ability to dump your POAs in as long as it’s within your funding duration. So within that seven years, as long as you make your catch up payments within that seven years, then you can do that as you please outside of that seven years guardian in this case, and all insurance companies will require you to go through additional underwriting to qualify again that, Hey, why are you dumping in this large amount?

It did some health. Did you get some health scare or something happen that you’re dumping a lot of this money into your policy? So that’s where the funding duration can come into play. And that’s why, longer funding durations allow greater flexibility. It does require more insurance products.

So there is slightly more expenses, but that’s where we, on our call, we can model out different scenarios. So you can see what best fits for you. Some of the key things that we, the metrics that we like to look at is how much cash value do you have early on and this design maximizes that cash value.

So you look at that column, the net cash value. So dumping in 50,000, year one, you would have $41,735 of cash value. That’s about, little over 83%. So when people ask us, what is the expense of, what is the cost of starting this policy? That is one cost. What I like to tell people you’re gonna lose about 20% liquidity, in year one.

You’re 50,000 you’ll have access to about 40,000 via policy loan. However, in year two, if you’re to dump in 50,000 you’ll see the cash value go up at the end of the year by about 49,000 and change. So still some hit, but way less of a hit as most of the expenses are front loaded.

And then you’re three, if you’re to dump in 50,000, that’s where a lot of people have that shift in mentality from, Hey, this is an expense or premium. I have to pay to more, truly a deposit where they’re putting in 50,000, what shows up in cash value is 50,000. And then every year after that, it just gets more and more, so that’s where also, the funding we can play around with the funding duration because in the later years, including myself, we start looking forward to when can I dump in more cash, more funds into the policy and boost up the cash value even more , that’s that one metric of cash value, then the break even point is another one.

So the break even point in the sense of the amount of cash value you have versus your total outlet when does that break even, and in this case is breaking even between years five and six. So you’ll see, at year five at the, you put in 250,000, you have 249,934. Again, these are projections based on the current dividend rate.

This is assuming, 5.65 gross dividend rate is what this illustration assumes. That dividend rate is not guaranteed. Dividends are pretty likely to happen. As lane mentioned, guardian specifically has been around for 162 years. They’ve paid a dividend for 162 years through, consistently the amount of dividends have fluctuated.

We are historically in a low interest and dividend environment, 5.65. But and we would expect it to possibly remain low interest rates are increasing. So possibly, we’ll see a rise in dividend rates, but this illustration assumes 5.65 gross dividend rate. Every year, there are some tweaks we can do with the design, that possibly pulls that a year ahead.

So breaking even maybe between years four and five, even that liquidity as far as 83% year one, there’s, it there’s some tweaks we could do based on your situation that maybe we can get that as high as 87, maybe 88% liquidity in year one. If you have capital available and able to jumpstart the policy, basically the, so my understanding of this sheet of numbers, and this is the, this is what’s called an illustration.

So this is what Tyler when you guys meet and you guys get illustration, this is what pops up and is given. I don’t really understand all these numbers, but I personally look at is, the net cash value as a percentage to what you put in, like Tyler said, you, when you configure like how we do, typically you’re running away with something better.

You’re losing less than 20% your first year. I know. My first policy I did who, who was taking a lot more in commissions before I found Tyler it was like, Double that or double the loss basically. That’s your little quick tip on comparing these policies. And then, another good exercise is that, it might be a loss of 20% here the first year, but then you start to recruit it by year three.

It might be half of that. 90, 92% is what you get. But then, like Tyler said, like the break even point is always a quick way to compare policies and ultimately how much fees cuz these life insurance policies, they’re commodities at the end of the day, they’re all underwritten and done by the same top tier companies.

Now I’ll mention there are other, some like lower tier companies that you wouldn’t even wanna mess with. In my opinion, you might get a little bit better, but I just don’t think it’s worth it when you know, the whole purpose of you doing this is security and asurity that’s that net cash value.

That’s how you evaluate the break even point. And again like that, most people doing these policies it’ll break even at year seven, you’re eight at best, but obviously, when you ran this number little after your five. Yeah. And you’ll see on that left the premiums go to zero.

So from year eight on, when we’re designing this for a seven year funding, you, we ex you’d exercise the option where at year eight, you’re converting this pre the policy to a paid up policy. So by, by doing so, no more premiums are due. That’s the good thing. The bad thing is then you can’t contribute, you can’t stuff in any more funds or POAs also.

Again the that’s where we can play around with the funding duration. Some knocks on the, this 10 90 design is that, Hey, we wanna fund this for long term. That’s where maybe we would choose a different company that has a different flexibility, but again you’ll be giving up some of that year to year.

Flexibility that guardian specifically is to me the benefit of that is not having to dump in 50,000 on your policy anniversary date, every year you have that flexibility throughout the year. It rolls over and things of that sort as lane mentioned other companies, and I think we cover that maybe in a later slides are all companies the same.

And we, I can go over some of the basic differences there. Did you get a next question? I think that was it right? Yeah. So we are independent. I would say ma the majority of the companies we use majority of the policies you write is for mass mutual or guardian.

Mass mutual has a different flexibility and that’s in the funding duration, but that’s where that the, that company the P way of flexibility is not as great. So the funding duration, they have a lot of flexibility in that. So we don’t have to necessarily determine the funding duration up front.

Whereas with guardian, we’re saying, Hey, this is a seven year design or a 10 or a 15 year design with mass. You don’t have to set that. It could be a five year design, or it could be a 30 year design. However, it’s best suited that you have that 50,000 it’ll dump in every year on that policy anniversary date.

So not too conducive for investors in the sense where most of our capital, we don’t wanna have it tied up and building up and have to put in 50,000 on that, on, within a few weeks, every year early. So you can’t contribute, but that’s another option with mass mutual. Yeah. And just Tyler says, uses the word flexibility.

The way I look at that word is I have three policies, emeritus, pan, and guardian. So what I don’t like about my emeritus is exactly what Tyler’s talking about, which is the the flexibility. I gotta like fund that thing every single year or something like that on the policy. And I think at Penn, I have to do it every other year.

I’m probably butchering this, that’s what it means by flexibility. Whereas guardian, I don’t really have to do that. Tyler tell me, yeah, 10% like this design it’s the 5,000 a year is what you’ll be putting in for a $50,000 design. And the 45,000 is truly flexible and you won’t lose the ability to put in that 45,000 if say you skip two or three years it’ll just bank up and then you’ll be able to make that catch up at the very end.

Yeah. And going over Annette’s other question in this illustration is the policy paid up after seven years and no more premiums need to be put in. I can already tell Annette’s already doing something like this, like this is the, I think this is the downside of the 90 10 arrangement because the 90 10 is great for new people, stuffing a whole bunch of money in here, right?

There’s a deal. You’ve got two, 300 grand, you just throw it into the policy and then you take 180 200 grand and put it into the next deal. That’s ideally what, the 90 10 it’s kinda like the launch pad, the quick start plan. But what I, what I tell most folks is yeah, do the 90 10 get started, get. A hundred, few hundred thousand dollars of cash value loaded up in there and just get that. You might take the money out the next day and put it into deals and that’s great. That’s exactly what you should be doing, in the long run, as in, that’s looting to shoot, as you near end game, right?

And it’s not necessarily how old you are to me, it’s where your net worth is when your net worth starts to go around four, 5 million net worth or even two and a half. If you guys are more frugal out there, you start to be seeing this infinite banking policies as end game for you to where you can make 5% tax free with very little to no volatility.

Then you’re maybe looking for more of a long term place to just store money as deals, cash out. You don’t go into more deals. You just put it into your life insurance and have it grow under your umbrella. That’s I think where, some of the members who are already in that end game stage might be one to that 70, 30 split. Is that right? Tyler? That’s my understanding of it. Yeah. I’m a strong believer in the 10 90 for all situations. I outlet. There’s some questions on here about so main mentioned, there are no deals. In life insurance. That is a very true statement. I know we’re talking a lot about the different companies, maybe different products.

The statement, there are no deals in life insurance is. Yeah. If you look across the board through all the strong mutual companies the product themselves, I think will vary very little in actual performance. Now, illustrations is one thing, actual performance, historically, I think and we’re talking the four mutual, large mutual companies, which is like New York life, Northwestern, guardian, mass mutual, all of those have all fluctuated basically would be performed the same way in, in actual performance.

What I feel is the differences with the companies is some of the nuances, it might be the PWA flexibility or the funding duration, flexibility the portal use, the ability to just go in and do things online on the portal the ease of the portal I’ll throw Penn mutual in there also, cause I think that’s an up and coming company that has been you know, making a strong move historically though that the, the The actual performance hasn’t and there’s not a lot of transparency there from the company itself.

I think they are performing icy. So I think that’s one other company that may get added as far as a very strong mutual insurance company in the future. Some of the trade offs with the, do the 10 90 split or the 90 10 split for me the one downside is that for the way we’re doing it with guardian is the funding duration limitation.

This maxes out because you priest premium is so small there’s a racial on the amount of death benefit you can get towards this 45 46, or really in this case, 190,000 of death benefit. So I can’t, we can’t push the death benefit, say to two mil based off of this 190,000 of whole life death benefits.

So it ma it, it limits that part where you can’t do this, you’d start have to paying a little bit more premiums but it also limits you on, 15 years, 16 years max, maybe for 50,000 design that you would wanna fund this towards now, I personally view, 16, 15 or 16 years as a pretty long funding period.

The true IBC practitioners or Nelson Nash, you’ll hear that you wanna fund this thing forever. I personally feel well you would open up additional policies. As long as you have, you are insurable. If you’re not insurable someone within your family or within your business, you would have an insurable interest for.

So that’s the one major downside you may hear on the downside is the dividends are less because it gets, PUA gets treated different than base premiums and so forth. But from all of the case studies we’ve seen is that overall, even though your dividends may be less, your overall cash value is more.

And that’s really what we care about is the cash value component of it, of the way we’re designing it. We haven’t been able to find one where overall performance, as far as cash value wise is impacted versus say a 30, 70, or a 40 60 design. Because even though on those other designs, the dividends are higher.

The overall net cash value is AC is still less because of the added expenses built in there. Yeah. And I think we’re getting out the scope of the infinite banking today. I think a lot of the people are, that question is alluding to what do I do an end game in my opinion, end game, like IOLs and these putting a whole bunch of money in here, like we’re talking over a few million dollars in life.

Insurance is a little overkill to me. Yeah, you might not be in value, add real estate, but you’re at least in like triple nets and you’re still in real estate. And that’s why the way for most of the people listening here, you guys are sophisticated investors. You guys aren’t like the average, Joe, just throwing a whole bunch of money in life insurance in end game, you’re still making, doing better than 5% if you want 5% cool. If all you need is a hundred thousand dollars, a passive income a year. Cool. But I think most of us in a retirement and end game, we all want, $20,000 of cash flow every month. You’re getting a lot of money in life insurance.

So that’s why I, like with Tyler this kind of goes into more end game financial planning, this is maybe we’ll answer questions at the end of this, to me there’s other investment options other than what we’re talking about for.

That lower risk, lower return, like I said, triple nets, maybe going back into the traditional investment market. The kind of we gotta get through some of these last slides here whole life versus term life term life, the reason for that is to protect you against somebody prematurely dying, whether you it’s, your spouse and your family is left out.

That’s the purpose of term life. And I think everybody should have that at least to cover, at least a million or $2 million. But that’s cheap typically. And a lot of times that’s, in your employment, your employer will cover some portion of that already. So I think that’s two separate things, right?

Again, we’re just using this whole life product to get this infinite banking, building this asset, making money in two places at one time. But when you start to fund larger policies like a hundred grand a year, $250,000 a year, it’s a byproduct of the term life. So a lot of the clients just turn off their term life because they already have it at this point.

And then a, quick discussion on IOLs iOS is like the third portion here we don’t use. IOLs are typically for higher returns, but you give up the liquidity. And typically I would be careful everybody, anybody selling IOLs, they’re typically very high commission products and the it’s a very multi-level marketing kind of a program.

What I’ve seen out there, they get you to, they get everybody to sign up for these Training programs where you can sell life insurance to your friends and families and suckers. And, I would just stay away from the IUL. There is a certain tool for it in the end game, if you just wanted to make 6%, but to me, for the people listening to this webinar today, you guys can do better than that.

IUL is investing for the clueless, for it’s like when, you build up four, five, $10 million plus in your kids and your kids’ kids to take over that money. That’s what they invest in because they don’t have a clue. They don’t have a network of what to invest in.

So that’s, to me what the IUL tool is for, but Maybe Tyler, can you go over like the mutual insurance company, stock insurance company differences real quick. Sure. And I’ll just add a little bit about the IUL. I actually bought IUL. That was my very first policy. That’s what sent me down also this rabbit hole of researching because it didn’t really perform to what I wanted to do now, again, with IUL similar to whole life, there’s a lot of design features in there.

So it probably wasn’t the most or best design, but why I personally don’t like IOLs is the underlying product of IUL is term life is renewable term. Unlike the guarantees of whole life where, it’s a set premium those expenses can be managed with renewable term. Basically you’re buying a new insurance product every year.

And although the numbers and the returns may look great as you’re young, similar with like level term is cheap. When you’re younger, It’s ridiculous when you’re older. If in your seventies or eighties, if you’re having that premium renew every year that’s a large expense and a very unknown cost that I’m not personally willing to utilize this strategy for.

That’s my take on IOLs. There is a question. Can you convert it into an I B C there is something where with all insurance, you can do a 10 35 where you take the cash value of one policy, turn it into another PO or roll it into another policy. Sometimes that makes sense.

Not, I wouldn’t say it, blanketly, it, it always makes sense, but there’s times when we don’t recommend it, or we’re just trying to, would recommend people how to maximize what they already have and not roll it over because there are some expenses, you’re starting over, but there is something called a 10 35 where you’re rolling over the cash value to a new policy.

Are all companies the same? We touched a briefed on this, but what we particularly choose and what we recommend is a mutual insurance company. And, the mutual part is key because that’s where you, as a policy holder are basically owners of the company. There’s no stockholders or anything.

A stock insurance company say Prudential has stockholders. So their vested interests maybe split, right? It’s not purely about the policy holders. They have stockholders that they have to appease as a mutual insurance company with and participating mutual insurance company.

That’s where the company profits are returned to you in the form of dividends. So that’s where, you’ll be receiving dividends from the mutual insurance company. We like, the, we like to play with the large ones. Lane mentioned, there are some smaller ones, some of those limits that we talked about, maybe a lot.

Less restrictive on some of these smaller companies. There’s usually a reason for that, that they wanna, they’re trying to build up, they wanna attract people. So maybe that 10 times P limit maybe 15 or so, or it may be, you could do like a 90 or 5 95 split on a policy. But there’s high risk.

I think with, smaller companies, the unproven track records. I don’t, I wouldn’t wanna utilize a long term strategy with some of the smaller companies. That, that’s where again the strategy is more for stability and for long term planning and I prefer to use proven large companies.

Yeah. And trust me guys, I get approach of all kinds of stuff these days. And like insurance companies show Puerto Rico that supposedly can get you around some tax things and all that type of stuff. Like to me, like you’re not like this infinite banking thing is what, like everybody should do. Everybody should be flowing your money through your infinite policy.

So you can be growing that asset there and then taking out in an invest it right. And make way more money there. That’s the one, two step program to make a little bit more on the, on this banking side. Taking on a lot more risks is just not worth it guys like that’s, I don’t know. I don’t, I just don’t think that’s Wises.

Yeah. And this is another question we get asked a lot. Is, am I too old to, to start this? Or would this strategy benefit me? I’ve had, I have some 60 year old clients 70 year old, maybe pushing it, but again, we can we can run some scenarios and see if it makes sense. The, again, because we’re using insurance, I think the largest determining factor would be being able to qualify.

The age itself, isn’t really the factor. It’s health conditions. Even whether you’re 70 or 40, the health conditions usually is the factor on being able to utilize a strategy, if it makes sense. The biggest thing, a 20 year old versus a 60 year old, if you look at the illustration the biggest difference you’ll see is the amount of death benefit.

So say for that 40 thou $50,000 policy, it’s around $900,000 of death benefit for a 20 year old, it might be like 1.3 mil for a 60 year old. It might be 500,000 for that same $50,000 target. So that’s one obvious difference. Again, we’re not designing it for the death benefit, but that’s one obvious difference as far as the cash value performance.

Surprisingly, it’ll be pretty similar between the different ages. The biggest difference is when you look further down, because this is a long term strategy where, you know, compounding really is impacted later down the year or down the line a 20 year old has theoretically about 60 plus years of compounding a 60 year old or a 70 year old may only have 20 or 10 years of compounding.

And it’s on that back end when you really see these huge gains. So early on it’ll probably perform the same. It might, instead of breaking, even between years five and six, it might break even between years, six and seven for someone, a lot older. But it’s really what you lose out on the back end.

Compounding, at the end of the day, it’s not configured off, like we’re not doing it for the death payout guys. That’s what term life is for. This is just mainly to get an asset that grows in two places. If you can’t qualify. Maybe you’ve got younger kids, you can buy a policy on them.

We’ve had some people, people who are in their seventies buy it on their 30 year old kids who, that’s where you dump all your money to. And it sounds counterintuitive because you think you’re getting a life and policy on your LF, but then again, you aren’t right. You’re just buying an asset and stuffing money into it is what we’re doing here.

And then I’ll caveat this slide that we, we, you would definitely need to consult your tax professional. We’re not CPAs, but you’ve heard the term me and the modified endowment contract. So if you were to cause the insurance product to become a me, then anything you do from there on forward would be taxed.

So even a policy loan take out distribution a, any of that would be, will be taxed. So that’s why by far you, we wanna prevent that from becoming me. There is maybe a time down the line where you want it to me. If you intend not to touch any funds from it, and you just are planning on having it transferred to your, to the beneficiaries, but while you’re utilizing it, we definitely don’t wanna meet Cash out surrenders.

This does perform like a Roth RA in that sense where you’d be able to withdraw your contributions tax or penalty free at any time. You technically, there may be a time to do that also, and we can talk on specific strategies on that, but once you B take it out, then you’ve stopped the compounding on that.

And that may not be wise, especially early on. As far as the other, any other time would be, if you were to just totally pull the policy out or surrender the policy in that sense where any gains above what you contributed could be, would be taxed at that point. But other than that, the death benefit at the upon death, the death benefit transfers tax free to your beneficiary.

It still falls under the state tax limits though. So be aware of that and there may be strategies to help with that. So we’re gonna get into some questions, that common questions that people will normally give us. The first one here is if I become ill what’s just AATE death benefit writer, caller.

Yeah. The good news. So the good thing is with a certain size policy, there’s an accelerated death benefit writer. That’s free of charge that gets tagged onto the policy. That in the event you develop a chronic illness or a terminal illness, you have early access to the death benefit. You always have access to the cash value regardless, but this, often the death benefit is much higher than the cash value.

And in the event, a chronic and that would be basically, you can’t do two of the six daily acts of living terminal illness would be that, two different physicians determine that you have less than 12 months to live. Both I think, bad situations, but the benefit of utilizing this asset again, we’re not doing it for that, but it does have this benefit where you’ll be able to draw higher amounts from it to help cover those expenses while you’re living versus just the death benefit.

And I’ll just mention it too, it’s a PSA. Like we had a guy, he had a, I, a heart attack or some kind of operation on his heart. And apparently he qualified for this. He’s fine today. Probably just can’t do, enter the CrossFit games or do Woff method and go swimming or anything like that.

But, he got a big payout. So if anything happens like that to you guys, talk to your insurance provider, cuz it might trigger getting.

Yeah, we tell the chronic terminal other writers, there are other writers that could get added to the policy. Again, we are utilizing this purely for the cash value component of it. If you wanted, these other writers oftentimes is better off having a separate policy specifically to address those needs. But if someone really wants to, we could add these on guaranteed insurability rider that’s an added cost that you have on your policy that, even in the event that you your current health rating changes that you’re able to purchase additional death benefit or insurance long-term care writer similar to that accelerated benefits writer, it’ll it just allows you to access some of the funds in the event for care.

Again, that one specifically, I think it’s better off to have it a separate policy or a separate life long term care insurance specifically to address that versus trying to tie it on. And then the waiver of premium writer again, also another Expense that in the event that you can’t make your premiums, it they can cover it for a certain amount, but for our design, because we’re minimizing that the PWA or the premium payments that really doesn’t benefit much, because it doesn’t really add much to the cash value since our premiums are so small to begin with there’s possibly, you could have a PUA premium rider, but that would be very expensive as well.

And usually once you one, if you’re able to make one or two years of full payment, max funding, that the growth of the policy, even if you are to just stop payments from there on out, and, we have the policy growth cover the premiums. That’s usually a better strategy than paying for the premium rider.

Yeah. To me, these are like, add-ons on a car, you buy the car to get from point a to point B, just like how you do this IBC to make money in two places and have a store of cash. So all these other things are just addons and other additional fees. I don’t know, depends talk to Tyler if it makes sense for you, but this is this is I think this opens the eye for a lot of people.

This is like a working example of people actually using this dang. And how it augments what you’re doing on the investment side. So maybe walk us through this Tyler. Sure. This was, if people heard me talk about, Hey, if you wanna get a hundred thousand of passive income a year, you literally would be investing a hundred thousand a year for years, 1, 2, 3, and four in syndications, and then year five, theoretically year one deals would be cashing out doubling if things went well.

So the a hundred thousand in year one turned into 200,000 in year two. And then it would you live off a hundred thousand, reinvest the other a hundred thousand and keep the machine going this strategy, this double dip just rolls insurance into that. The I B C into that year, it would require a little bit more upfront capital because of that loss of liquidity in year one.

But in this case, it would be a hundred thousand dollars target amount funding for 10 years. Your actual me limit would be 150,000. So that’s where you can actually year one stuff up to your me limit, but in this case, so this is that blue box. You max fund, you would fund 125,000 year one. You would have a hundred thousand available, in a form of a loan.

So you take that policy loan. Fund your two policy or two deals. $50,000 deals, year two, you have you fund a hundred thousand and your cash value at that point would be about 198,000. You could take out 90 or total. So it would go up about 98,000. So you could take out nine, 8,000, you’d have to supplement 2000 more.

And these are just rough numbers, but that would fund your next two deals. Year three, you fund your policy a hundred thousand. You would have access to that a hundred thousand and to fund your deals and year four, same thing you’d fund the a hundred thousand to your policy have access to a hundred thousand fund.

Your two deals in year five, when your deals pay out, instead of now having living off of a hundred thousand, you could take that a hundred thousand pay or your policy premiums or max fund it to a hundred thousand for that year, and then take that other a hundred thousand and fund your two deals and keep that machine going.

And then from there on, out from your five on technically, your deals are funding your premiums and you still have access to the cash value. On those later deals, you could then do the reduced, paid up at year eight, or because this was designed for a 10 year funding. You could continue funding at.

Most people at that stage when they’re seeing dumping in a hundred thousand and having more than a hundred thousand show up in cash value would wanna continue funded for as long as the design was for. And another concept that I look at this IPC is when you first do this, you gotta decide how much you’re gonna fund it every year for a five to 10 year range.

Basically what you’re doing is that’s your container side. And because we configure with 90 10, it’s pretty easy to hit your minimum contributions. You fund most of your first year, you’re done. You don’t really need to put anymore. So if you lose your job or something like that after you don’t really need to make your next year’s commitments.

And I think that’s a big game changer and it took me like four or five years to understand that myself. But the idea is creating this container to grow. You may not have the cash value inside, or cuz you’re taking the money out and growing it somewhere else as you should, because you’re gonna make a higher yield.

You should make a higher yield outside of this policy, but at some point, and this is the concept of end game or growing your net worth past two, 5 million, you wanna return the money back to this container and you’re gonna wish you had your container as large as could be. This could mean for a lot of you guys.

You. Maybe a million and a half, $2 million of potential cash value funding that you could hide money in there, asset protected and, tax free dividends there. That’s the concept of, this is more, this is a different diagram, which you guys can take a screenshot.

What, all this will be in the eCourse where you guys digest, this is, maybe partially, this you’re starting, you’re funding it like in toddlers standard plan. And then, you start to keep some cashier for unexpected life happenings college. There are a lot of different use cases where we’ll get to the end of the presentation here, but this is there’s a lot of different uses for the same thing.

And, like I said, this is how I use it in the growth mode, when you’re taking the money out, you’re investing in deals or whatnot. But yeah, just a lot of different use cases.

This is maybe a little another advanced strategy of the triple dip. The first thing you dump it into the cash value or the, you dump it into your policy. You leverage out, you can dump it into a brokerage account and then take a security back line of credit and then do the syndication.

So it’s just putting it in another asset that can be leveraged. Again, these are maybe more advanced and someone who you know, is comfortable with debt and strategic debt and maximizing that. But this is where, that same dollar could technically be working in three areas at the same time the limitations or policies. So again, be because it, it is insurance, there’s a maximum insurable amount. Your human life value is what the, what insurance companies are looking at. That’s generically tied to your annual income. And as you get older, because your earning years or less, that means you, you can qualify for less.

You could qualify for less and less. The rule of thumb is based on your annual income. There’s some flexibility with that and we can talk specifics on a private call. One major threshold is a $10 million death benefit or a cumulative death benefit. That’s where usually a third party verification would be required to validate your, the income look at possible tax returns.

And it becomes a lot more challenging once the death benefit crosses 10 mil health, your health obviously 📍 is a big factor on what health rating you get. Again, keep in mind that you’re being rated amongst the average American your age. So it’s it, some existing health conditions are expected.

The biggest thing is that it’s being monitored or are treated and there’s follow ups in that. One thing we normally recommend, if you, if there are, you would go to your primary care or someone to see what your records will look like, because the underwriting process does pull the records from your primary care provider.

And just see if there’s any notes in there or ask the doctor, if there’s anything in there that may impact your insurability. And if there is say, like there’s a recommended colonoscopy, but then you didn’t do it that it now would be the time to do it. So that there’s that follow up documentation in your record.

And now if you become uninsurable for whatever reason, then that’s where you could look at, a spouse who may be insurable some business partner, as long as you have an insurable interest, or why would you, why the need to be pulling a life insurance policy on someone else? That there’s possibilities of that.

So even though if you’re very old, maybe a working child, that they have a you have an insurable interest on, on, on their life that you maybe be able to fund a policy on a working child versus yourself. Yeah. So the 10 million cumulative death pay, or that, that cap at 10 million, most people won’t hit that in their first policy.

I think most people will get up to that in their second policy where they layer on top of that. But, $10 million, that’s like putting in quarter million dollars every single year for six or seven years, I would say most people will start off with maybe, a hundred, hundred $50,000 and that kind of segues into alright, we talked a lot about this stuff today.

What’s gimme a starter. What do people normally do? I did this video way back when my hair was a little longer, or if it didn’t stay down so here’s the use case. So like a million dollar net worth person, they’re able to save 60 to $80,000 a year. That’s the net, right?

Which you save. Most people in our group make, maybe make two or $300,000 a year and they spend most of it, but they have 60 to $80,000 left over. That’s like the net is what I’m calling. So what I normally will say is now take a third of that net. So a third of the 60 to 80 and use that as your base commitment every year for five to seven years.

So what that works its way out to is for most people here, at the very least do 30 to 50 grand a year. But then if you have a lot of like lazy equity, home equity, IRA money, then you may wanna layer up more on top of there. So in a, in addition to your 30 grand a year, Say another, another case somebody has 500 grand of lazy equity, which is very common.

Most of our investors, they come to me in their forties and they have half a million dollars, million dollars in their IRAs or, various places, at least half a million dollars in their home equity and they wanna get it working. And I think this is the use case of you’re supposed to put it in deals, you’re new, so you don’t really know where to put it. Or so the infinite banking is a great way where it is relatively zero risk in terms of like where these life insurance companies are gonna go. It’s a great place to just throw your cash from now, make a little bit of yield before you get your bearing, build your network, figure out where to put your money, who to trust for these deals.

So for this example, if you have half a million dollars of home equity or some other source of liquidity, what I would probably be doing is in addition to your 30,000 a year and in a hundred, cuz you funded in five years or, double up, put, a little bit more the first several years.

So I mean you could fund it anywhere from $130,000 a year to $250,000 per year again, because the way it’s configured with only 10% insurance, once you’ve funded, the 10% of it you’re done, which is typically in the first year or partial of the first year, If, and this is the game changer.

When people are configuring this with 30% or 50%, you may have to put in, another two, three years of payments so that the policy doesn’t cave in. So this is all the goal of this is to get your money into invest, but also increase the container size as much as possible. The 90 10 policies to me is the best tool for that job to overfund it and expand that container size as quick as possible, getting you the maximum amount of the cash value.

So you can go and take it out as a policy loan and invest it in deals or whatever you want and make our money elsewhere and still make money in two places. We, there was some discussion over what do I do after? That’s where I would say, maybe in year two to four, you get another policy on and layer on top of it.

Cuz at this point you’ve taken some policy loans. You get the you get it, you’re more comfortable with fields. So you layer on a bigger policy, big kid policy. And this is what I did. I started with, $50,000 in my first policy. I did that for a few years and I layered another one.

And then I layered another one where I hit my $10 million. And as an entrepreneur, it’s hard for me to verify my records because I don’t pay taxes cuz I don’t make income. That’s make all passive income. You drive it down to zero. One of the downsides is you can’t qualify for more than a $10 million insurance policy.

Or as Tyler tells me, it’s hard, it’s going to be hard. But I would argue, why do you need bigger than a 10 million policy where you can suck away one, 2 million of liquidity. At some point it becomes impractical. And to me like the way I look at money, even in end game, you should still be growing your money in maybe less value, add aggressive deals, but maybe more stabilized assets triple nets, things like that.

But I would say like the lesson learned that most people say is don’t wait and overanalyze. Like I think we got into some of the details a little bit, but is keep it simple folks, like just create a policy, fund it with a hundred grand a year, take it out, take a policy loan and invest it.

It’s simple, very simple. The interest rates and the way these policies they’re always changing and they’re never getting better. So the best time to do it was yesterday. And at the end, like your money is more safe than deals and banks. And that’s why. Tyler. And I will, we’ll talk about, new people coming in, and, I believe in the deals and I invested in myself, sometimes there’s very green investors that have a lot of money that they need to get it working.

I always can say with a clear conscience, I’m like, yeah, Tyler, just sign ’em up for a policy. And just at least make, they can make 5%, on that chunk of money. Because they’re new, they haven’t done this syndication E course or met other people and started to diversify into a multitude of different alternative investments.

But here’s some of the, if you guys wanna start to queue up your questions, we can get going through them after this slide. But here are the use cases that I’ve personally come up with. So starting at the top, or top left, comboing, this, we’ve talked about this quite a bit, investing in investments, alternative investments I’m coming out with a new pro fund where it’s just gonna be a straight 12 to 13% paid monthly.

What better the combo with your 5% infinite banking? You can also combo it for like college savings. They’re at the top, right? This is the 5 29 plan killer. This is the ability to keep money for the short term. Maybe your kids are going off to college in five years or 10 years. Great place to put this money.

The bad thing about 5 29 plans. They’re like 401k plans, they’re investment vehicles for the clueless, and they’re bad because they you’re stuck with all these retail investment products with high fees. And they’re just investments for the masses where all you guys listening, you guys have been opened up to the world of alternative investments.

Sure. You have to grow your network and get comfortable with the people you work with. But as you can typically find better returns and a lot safer in more real assets than the stock market or those investment options. But, this is where, it’s a lot of people use this interchangeably with their college savings for their kids or their retirement.

Bottom left, the end game investor, the guys that are above two, $4 million net worth, they have, they’re totally fine living off of 10 to $20,000 a month. I probably put Tyler in here a little bit, maybe not all your money, but a good chunk of your money is just sitting here just churning at 5% and.

At this point, maybe like a 70, 30 split policy where you can continue to fund it longer term might be better. But that just an opportunity for you to have just, it’s simple, right? If you need some money, just take a loan from your cash value your life insurance company, it’s super easy and your money is there and secured more secure than banks.

And then the bottom, just general new investors, right? You come into the alternative investment space, you don’t know what to do. Some people call it, wow, I got all these options, right? Multifamily, self storage, hotels, right? All these private funds where you’re investing, when you know the people and you’ve come out to a retreat and you meet all these cool people.

And they’re all like, not paying off their houses using debt appropriately, but it’s, it takes a while to get into this world, right? Unless you wanna just start throwing a hundred thousand dollars in a couple dozen places, know this is a great place to put your money and let yourself season let that relationship seasons, let’s see that first round of deals go full cycle.

Before you start to invest larger and larger amounts, certainly get over 20 to 30% in your net worth into alternative investments. But the majority, I would feel comfortable telling people that putting into this stuff is probably more secure, much more than the stock market mutual funds, and probably more secure than just leaving it in your own bank.

Banks fail. But well capitalized in life insurance companies that put people through rigorous health underwriting is a lot more secure. And at some people, some people will do the Helo set first and they’ll feel uneasy about that monthly interest, same concept here, like instead of the HELOC, you’re using your IPC, but for the reasons that, the banks can’t pull your know asset protection.

And I think this’s also great for, a lot of the people on the call, you guys are the more sophisticated investors in your family, but maybe you have older parents or, younger kids that don’t really understand the whole syndication investing. You, if not, let us know, maybe we can give ’em access some e-courses to get a more educated, but, maybe that’s just all they want.

My parents, they’re never going to invest in deals. They’re just stuck in their ways, but maybe this is definitely better than what they’re doing. And I think it’s something that you can promote to them as and feel good that it is very secure. I, I don’t know if the term risk free, but it’s the closest thing to zero risks out there.

Any other use cases, Tyler? I think I missed, or no I think that 5 29 is a big thing for me per se. I don’t, I have a 12 and a nine year old. My don’t con instead of contributing to a 5 29, which I feel is trapped that I put it into a policy also with long term care because you’re growing cash value or you’re growing cash.

Instead of, having a long term care insurance policy, I intend to tap into my, the whole life policy in the event, for healthcare in the future a couple others. So doctors or just high net worth people in general, who are more concerned with legal liability, getting sued.

Like I’ve combo this with my irrevocable trust where irrevocable trust is not a revocable trust. It’s a lot more heavy duty. If you’re under four, 5 million, it’s probably not even worth it. People who are an end game or high liability, like doctors, you can make an irrevocable trust, get it off of it.

But the problem there is like getting your money in and out is difficult and cumbersome. So by leaving some of your money, your liquidity in this infinite banking policy, it’s life insurance, like we said, it is protected. It’s under the umbrella or in my visual representation. It’s like under the patio in a way that you have the simplicity of use and access, but it’s still protected and you can have maybe more or just a portion of your network in your irrevocable trust.

So that’s another way of, use case for this. And then, entrepreneurs out there, business owners, this, I think the biggest thing about businesses is, there’s always gonna be ups and downs. The people who survive the downs are the people who take over the competition that fails and dies off.

The people who are well capitalized are the kind of, businesses never failed. They just lose money or did they just run out of money to keep ’em. But this would be the place where you would put your liquidity for your payroll. In case of a rainy day now, for most of you and you folks listening who are just salary guys, I don’t really see a huge need for liquidity stores.

Most people, three, four months of, salaries more than enough. So this is more for the, on the business owners out there who may wanna keep a few hundred thousand dollars in there for their, their staff of a dozen people, payroll. And Jay brought up a good point, Keyman insurance for a succession team.

That, that is huge also. So a lot of corporations do utilize that it’s a way of having some incentives also for their key employees. A business will pull insurance on their key employees. Business continues to own it, but it serves as a potential retirement incentive or supplemental income for the employee.

Maybe at some point it become, they become vested and you could either transfer the ownership to them or just pay their retirement from the policy as a business. So that is a key thing. One more thing is just, is, generational wealth. I think we touched a little bit about that, but insurance and life insurance specifically plays a big part in that as far as potentially creating generational wealth and continuing that legacy for generations to come.

All right. So we’re gonna get into the questions as you guys are typing into the Q and a box, but if you have to go, you can sign up and get access to the ecourse@simplepassivecash.com slash banking. But if you’re already part of the club, this is the URL to get access to the e-course. So everything that we talked about today broken up into a lot more bite size pieces.

In the the eCourse format that you guys know and love from us and a lot other, cool little tips in there too. I would say, the next step is, just getting an illustration and just moving forward. But let’s let’s hit into these other questions. Let me maybe accept this overall one that stands out.

So I think mark, mark asked as a commission agent, why would you design a policy to minimize your commissions? Truly it’s the reason why I do it personally is because it’s a better product for the client. I’m really doing it for the client first. I am an investor first also, so commissions are nice, but that’s not my livelihood or why I’m personally doing it.

It really is to give back to lanes, community specifically, but other investors also and provide them the best product that I feel is out there. And, truly have the client benefit. I feel even as with the minimized commissions it’s still very good. I’m very willing to share what those commissions are on a call, but.

Minimizing the commissions it’s still pretty healthy the commissions which is somewhat appalling when you hear like a hundred percent, the standard whole life, those commissions are basically 10 times what I would be pulling on the same size policy. And I’ll also comment that if you look at all my business associates, like the one thing I don’t want at this point in my life is nonsense.

And that typically nonsense occurs from somebody who is not financially free and still working in scarcity mode. And, in the deal side, it’s nice to work with high net worth partners because when things go wrong, we just throw in a few hundred thousand bucks each, and get the problem solved and make it right for the clients.

But, business is tough and when you’re not an alignment for the clients and you’re more in alignment or, there’s a lot of people out there, real estate agents, insurance agents, lending brokers, all the people in this financial industry that are they need to pay their own bills, like financial planners. It’s just not people I wanna get into bed with personally. And I, and I mentioned that and they, I that’s just maybe. Life advice for people is when you can get to a point, why do we all do this to get financially favorable? Why well, to do what we want with whom we want when we want that, so that’s why work with people that are, have seen the investments work fi in, in a place in their life.

And it just makes things better for everyone, including myself. , and it’s not like we need to really make money with this life insurance thing either. It just helps augment everything else going on more, less fees, more money to invest. And then, the investments, we can take down better deals in the future.

But other questions here, what life insurance company do you use? We’re not, Tyler’s not captive, so he’s not forced to sell you like a certain company. He can go wherever. Currently I think I know this is where Tyler goes to all these like meetings and they hang out and they do their secret handshakes and they figure out which ones are like the best one based on the rates and the flexibility.

But I think they’re the cool kids are using guardian these days, but, that’ll change all the time. I’ve seen it change couple times these last five years. There’s a minimum amount of a suggested amount of life insurance.

I would say, look guys, like if you’re gonna do less than 10 grand a year it’s a waste of time for everybody guys. Most people are at minimum, I would say, are doing like what 50,000 a year? I don’t know. What’s your take on this one, Tyler? Yeah. The tech, the true answer is, you could do a, any size policy the, that enhanced accelerated benefits writer.

And this is specifically for guardian that gets tagged on for free. If you’re whole life death benefit is at least a hundred thousand. So in that 45 year example, with that 45 46 a year, he was buying 190,000. So in his case, he could go about half of that 25,000 a year, or maybe 27,000 a year would be the smallest policy that he gets that benefit from.

I’ve done, I’ve written policies for people, a th 10,000 a year. It’s. You can see it, but it’s not the, it’s a small policy where they’re not gonna be able to have access to percentage wise you’ll have access to the same amount of money. It’s just that it is relatively small in the sense of why we would be doing this.

Yeah. You guys are investing in private placements and syndication. I would think guys, and you all your networks are over a million dollars. So I would say, like use case, I would say average person, our group million and a half, they are able to save 50 to a hundred thousand dollars at least a year.

And they have a bunch of liquidity, maybe a hundred or a couple hundred thousand dollars a year for five to six years would be a good starting point. But sure, if if you’d like to get a health review twice, that’s what I did. I started with a $50,000 policy every year and then I wish I did more because then I figured out what it is.

And I think that’s where you talk to other investors. And until you get the hang of oh, we take a policy loan to go into a deal. You realize that 50 grand is hardly anything. And then, you start to understand, oh, I nine understand why every, why everybody’s doing a hundred, 200, $250,000 a.

Into this, they just put it in there and they drain it out.

Number three, I think. Yeah. So niece, wait, our question is we are older and don’t have any children. Can these policies be set up for any relatives like nieces or nephews and maintain all the same loan benefits? Yeah. So there’s three main components to the policy. There’s the owner, the insured and the beneficiary.

So in this case you could be the owner. We’ve had, I specifically having haven’t done nieces or nephews, but there could be a reason why we would do that. And there’s insurable interest. The key thing we need to establish is what is the insureds insurable interest to you? Or if you have insurable interest to the person you’re ensuring and nieces and nephews, if you don’t have children could be that something, some, some writeups we’ve had is that they intend the nieces and nephews will in take care of you as you age.

You guys have that agreement. So you have an interest if they were. Pass then you would use that proceeds to hire someone else or, have to care for that. Or the death benefit would be used to find someone else to care for you. So that’s a typical story we’ve presented multiple times, not specifically for nieces or nephews.

But I think that story plays will continue to, then again, we can talk specifics on a call and to get to know all the details. Question four here is infinite banking appropriate to start if I am over the age of 70.

Yeah. We touched about this on the earlier parts, but it depends typically at 70 you might have a working child or someone else that may make more sense starting on them. But again we could just run the different scenarios to see what makes sense. My oldest client is 68.

And it’s yeah, because normally older people have done it on their working children. Question five here, are there no deals? There are no deals in life insurance. And I would say, yes, this life insurance folks are commodities. You guys can go shop it around. It’s just a matter of how much your agent wants to take in commissions.

It’s all the same Dan thing from the same underlying insurance company. But the question is, can you address the downsides of the nine, 10 design or 90 10 design which again is, where you maximize the cash value you decrease the commissions. So once a policy is paid up, we’re not able to sync a big amount into it.

You wanna take that one? Tyler? Sure. Yeah, we I, we actually answered the first half of the question, I think on the, during the call, the the downsides mainly is, there’s some limitation on the funding duration for that target amount. At some point that’s one of the biggest downsides for a 10 90 or a 90 10 design.

But the other question, once you, once a policy is paid up, you won’t be able to send yes. So you once the policy is paid, it, we, you do an option to do a reduced paid up that makes the policy paid up. So you no longer can contribute any more funds to it out of pocket, the policy will continue to grow.

Cuz as you receive dividends, it goes to purchase additional, paid up insurance in that fashion. But the good side of that is that you no longer have to put anything in either and there the premiums are zeroed out. So they’re not taking out any premiums from your policy cash value.

Yeah. And I don’t comment more on that one. Like I think if you wanted to, do you wanted to fund your policy long, long term because you’re in that stage of life where you just don’t care anymore, you’re not taking coupons, or maybe you are, but you’re not like optimizing at this point in your life, right?

Imagine you got $20,000, $50,000, a monthly passive cash flow coming in every single month and maybe you don’t have kids. You just don’t really care, right? Your time is more valuable than money. You may just wanna put your money in somewhere and have it make a little bit money and be able to continue to grow it and fund it with more new, fresh cash instead of taking that cash and investing it, which I think most of the people on the call are going to do because they’re still in growth mode then maybe a 70, 30 policy where you can keep funding.

It might work. But again, I think that one is, maybe talk to Tyler on that one too. Alright, so more questions. Number one here, can you talk about the advantages of using I B C with your charitable giving

you or so, I don’t know about specifically charit beginning, but you could have the death benefit or a charity be a beneficiary of your policy. Or secondly, the, your death benefit could go to a trust and you could have that within your trust. Determine what to give. I don’t know if that’s the question or in regards to your annual charitable giving.

I know if yeah, I don’t know exactly where that question is going, but. I know you can assign, if you didn’t have any kids you could probably assign an I B C to whoever you want. Yeah. Maybe if whoever’s question that was maybe type it into the Q and a box and we can come back to it.

But question two in this example, and I think they’re referring to that illustration page, what is the max we could take a loan from, is it from the net cash value? Yeah, that’s correct. The net cash value column. And we conservatively say 95% of that is what would be available in a policy loan.

So in, in year one, 41,735, so 95% of that. Yeah. The way you guys should be doing this, or most people, if you put the money in, you have 41,000 in net cash value, but you take a $41,000 loan the next day and you go into some deals, right? That’s the way you do this. And then of course, the next year, when you have to make your next premium and paid up additions and you fund it and you get that, but.

At some point, the money rolls in and then you refund it up and then you use this as that liquidity source to slush money in and out of. And then now maybe you’re seeing the big picture on the usage of this whole thing. There, there is. So there is a slight delay because the, you can’t do it the very next day.

You, it would be 10, it would basically be 10 business days. If you’re using that same funds that you just deposited, cuz the insurance company will need it to clear. So they look typically wait 10 business days, then they’ll process your loan. You can go in and request it right away, but it normally won’t get processed till that 10th business day cuz they, they wanna see that the funds cleared.

There’s one way of getting it slightly sooner than that. And if we can provide a bank statement showing the funds, cleared your bank they’ll accept that and then release the funds. But typically that doesn’t come into play unless you’re taking it out right after. So yeah. Good point.

Good point. I definitely, I think that’s where you guys talk with either Bri or Chad or team at simple passive cash flow.com. If you guys. You guys are cutting the wire a little too close there, just, let us know. And we typically can accommodate people. We do this ourselves, so we know it’s the, it’s not like the day of, but it can take a week or so question four, what do you think is a good target of how much percent of one’s net worth should be atypical and best should put into IBC?

I don’t know if net worth is a good thing right off the bat, but I would say whatever excess liquidity you have should be is more of an indicator. And I would go back to my other RX slide on that. But as far as like net worth as a percentage, when you’re under half a million dollars net worth need every single dollar going to investments, not this stuff.

So I’m not I would say if your net worth is under half a million dollars, don’t waste your time on this stuff, go make more money or will save it, save more money and invest it. But I think once, for most investors million dollar net worth, we’ve got X is we’re not the greatest.

We’re not the most efficient with our liquidity. Meaning you got 10 grand here, you got 50 grand in this account, you got. Hundred $200,000 of liquidity or equity debt equity in your house. I think that’s most of us on the call here who are credit investors, I think at that point, it would make sense to start implementing this strategy.

But as your net worth rose, it’s hard to say, right? And I think this is where you mix it up with other accredited investors. You have these types of conversations to me. If we were on a consult, I would ask you what are, what is your long term goals? Do you wanna continue to ratchet up to five, 10 million, 20 million net worth and con continue to grow, or once you get to formula and you wanna just shut off the engines and live life as the 4% rule with 20 grand of passive income coming in every single month, it’s it really matters up to you.

But I, yeah, I don’t know how to answer that question. I know you wanna put in your 2 cents that yeah. I think you covered, the net worth is slightly different. The net worth can play a part as far as being able to qualify for more insurance based just on your annual income.

But I, I don’t it’s hard to say. What do typically the net worths of these guys and, the financial profiles, like what’s I think that’s what the question is asking, right? Like of all the sophisticated investors doing this, what do you see them doing? Think it’s more like people want a bucket size, a certain bucket size. And so say someone wants, a $2 million bucket at some point, but that could be funded differently, that could be a hundred thousand or 200,000 over 10 years. It could be 250,000 over eight years. Or it could be, 50,000 or 50,000 over what was that? 40 years. So it’s really the size bucket and that’s I’m talking like your cash value size at some point in life. That’s usually what people are trying to target of saying, oh yeah. Good point. I think for like most business owners having half a million or a million dollars to be able to get at an end game is cool.

Any more than that, it’s just a little excessive, right? You could have your money elsewhere. This is not a growth option. You should have your money elsewhere making at least five to 10% elsewhere. To have more than a million dollars is a little silly. So yeah, good point there, Tyler.

This I would look at it, not as a percentage of your net worth, but like what kind of liquidity slush bucket that you want to have? I would say at most investors, it’s at least a couple hundred thousand at least is what you want at some point question five what’s wrong or not so good about, they mentioned Northwest mutual, what are like, we’re talking about the flexibility and the rates, but like, why is it that the ones that, we’re rolling with now are the ones that we are well I think specifically Northwestern, we mentioned them as a, one of the strong mutual insurance companies from my understanding, those are all captive insurance agents where they have to be with Northwestern mutual exclusively.

I personally like being independent and being able to be a broker, shop around or see different companies versus stuck with one company. Yeah. Nor Northwest nation is definitely one of the, like the triple a rated ones which is what we’re looking for. But the word on the street is like, when you start to build these policies for liquidity, taking money. Their policies just aren’t set up for that. There’s certainly your cash values. Aren’t gonna be as high, which is the whole point of why we’re doing this, which most financial planners don’t under, really understand what a question here, would it be better to do two policies and keep one going rather than having it total paid after seven years?

So either way it doesn’t matter. I think, it’s like the whole ready fire aim kind of mentality, I think is the best approach here, especially because the stuff here, commodities, and it’s no risk essentially, these stuff is more secure than banks. So the ready fire aim mentality here might be good to just get one policy and you’ll right, size it on the second one a year or few years later. That’s again, that’s my personal, like I got one and then I got another one for myself and then I followed up with one for my spouse.

I hit that ideal bucket size where I will very soon. And then or comments on that. Yeah. So I. It depends, it, because there’s flexibility in how we can design it. So we’re not, even though we show the seven year funding duration you, if you, if the funding duration is an issue, we can design something for 15 years or so, or maybe even longer.

But from a financial efficiency standpoint, I think starting two policies. If it started, if it’s, if you start at the same time, then I think there’s no loss of efficiency. If you’re starting one, maybe a little bit further down the road then one there’s a risk of the insurability. Something may happen over the two years that makes you less insurable, but also even if it’s the same health rating, you’re, you may be two or three years older.

There is some cost to that. But again, that cost may be less than if you started off with a larger policy that you don’t always max fun. So it depends. And that’s where we can go back and forth with some designs to show you the what ifs or compare the different two scenarios.

Yeah. And then piggybacking on the last question question two here. End game. What amount of cash value would you think is too much, 5 million, 10 million. So the cash value is, again, that bucket, that source of slush fund that you I ideally want, I’d say for most people, it’s at least a quarter million to like a million or 2 million.

I think you gotta be careful that, sometimes the cash value bucket size is different than like the death payout, which we mentioned before, we mentioned 10 million, that’s the death payout. But as far as like rightsizing the bucket, which is the cash value portion, that’s up to you personally, just, just know that, your money could be making more money elsewhere, so you don’t wanna go overboard with it.

I don’t know, a million dollars is a nice, if you’re an end game, it’s nice to have the peace of mind that if something goes wrong, you’ve got a million dollars to just throw down. And bill somebody out bail yourself out at some point that might seem like a lot of money, but yeah, end game.

More security is what you’re looking for at that point. And I think the bucket size can be large, but you’re in control of how full it is. Most of, even though say my bucket is too mill at this stage, a lot of that cash value is out deployed. I can make a choice at some point to start filling that bucket back up by paying off the loans or continue having it deployed in investments.

But having a large bucket size is beneficial to me. How you utilize it. You can make the decision and it’s not one size fits all, or you can course correct. Or right now I have everything deployed at some point I may want it full and just live off that four or 5% dividends be happy and not have to have the funds deployed.

So I think, I don’t know for me personally, my goal would be five mill target. I’m not quite there as far as total bucket size.

I think when you’re getting to really end game. Now, you’re thinking about, you’re putting your life insurance in your irrevocable trust and that’s caught an eyelet, but for most people on the call, your guys net worth is not end 20 million plus. It doesn’t matter because you don’t hit those state and federal estate tax limits.

So doing that is really no benefit to you guys, but yeah, we always like to have a conversation over in person when you guys buy a nice bottle of wine, because your net worth is 20-50 million. Of course, if that’s the question you’re asking, but similar on those lines, maybe your net worth is not 20 million, but it’s five.

You may wanna be thinking about charitable giving and that’s this FI question here. So that kind of was a follow up to the last question. And they said your regular annual charitable giving instead of cash contribution, purchase a single pay life policy with no me concerns for a nonprofit on yourself as a major donor to the charity would have insurable interests on you with the charity as the owner and beneficiary, they can use the policy loans for whatever they would have used a cash donation for, and the death benefit to buy more single pay life, making it an infinite endowment. That actually sounds like a very interesting strategy. I personally haven’t looked or used it in that way, but this definitely sounds like Yeah, it sounds very possible to do this.

Yeah. There’s a lot of uses for this stuff. And I think we put a lot of these more advanced strategies in the client section. Because when you’re in the end game, you get a little bored and you’d look for these types of strategies. For now, I think we just wanted to keep it simple for folks, just get going with a policy, throw in 50 grand a year, a hundred grand, maybe a couple hundred thousand a year for now.

And then, get going down the road and make money in two places. The quicker you start doing this the quicker you can make money in places the quicker you can start to create the time space, the head space for you to ask these kinds of good questions and come up with these strategies. Also along the lines of the end game.

One last question came in here. If you still use this bucket for deals or whatever else you want while still compounding, why would you want to limit it? I think the big thing that I’ve personally found and what was a roadblock for myself is when you go over a $10 million death payout or policy.

Now the life insurance companies are gonna want to see a whole bunch of documentation proving that is how much you make per year. And that might be a little bit of a pain for you to do. And especially if you’re not making income at that point in life. So that, that, I think that is another reason why, if you guys are still working your day jobs, you gotta do this now because all these policies are based on your ability to make money.

That’s what life insurance is at the end of the day, you being able to make money, which is why, getting policies on your little kids is a waste of time, cuz they can’t really qualify for that much. Why? Because they don’t make money. They don’t have jobs. So you know, like a lot of it is based on how much you make at your business or how much you make at your day job, your salary.

So it’s one of those things where you set up a policy before you leave your day job or retire. But if you’re already at end game and you’re looking to just keep funding this thing to in turning, I think you’re gonna run up to the issue of them saying you’re not making any active, ordinary income where you don’t have an income source at that point, other than your passive investments, of course, but they’re gonna have a hard time qualifying.

For you, but I dunno, Tyler, any thoughts on that one? Yeah. I, what you’re seeing is I think right on, I think Mark’s specific comment is why stop using your bucket for deals when you, it still compounds, you can still have it out for deals and grow your wealth. And I personally feel that’s a, the backup plan is to fill back up the bucket, right?

And then you no longer have to chase any deals or expose yourself to risk. It may be de-leveraging risk at that point to just say, Hey, I just want that consistent 4%. I intend to have my money working, at some point maybe deals may be a lot harder to find or whatever it is. This can be a fallback plan to have that, four and a half percent.

Dividend returns and live off of that without having to, to deploy money at all for going forward. But there’s that, I think that’s what that, that alluded to the thing about children which we didn’t really touch about. There is a limitation on non, so you can pull on children or minors.

The limitation would be the death limit. The death benefit limit will be 50% of what the parents have as death benefit. So if you, as a parent, have 5 million, a death benefit, a child would only be able to qualify for two and a half million of that. And then the health rating is a general health rating, like what it would be for a group, like at work, when you get group term insurance, It’s just a generic health rating.

So that health rating is not as great. So oftentimes with all of that combined for a minor, you might be able to throw in, eight to 10,000 a year total that’s the maximum you could put in a year still. And because the health rating is not the best, it may not be the most efficient use of that 10,000 purely for financial reasons.

There’s other reasons you might wanna do it for a minor, for a child anyway, but if you’re looking purely financially that may not be the best use of that, that $10,000. Any other questions please type it into the box?

Oh, Luke, raise his hand or, yeah, type it into the box there guys, but I wanted to show you the E course. So you guys know how to navigate it, but we’ll put the replay of this up on here, the way we have this laid out is, the introduction and then we broke out all the little slides into individual sections here for you guys.

And then implementation. And then, once you become a client, get access to the more advanced content here. That’ll just keep things fun and interesting, but this is the e-course, but, they get access to this. You gotta go to simple, passive, casual.com/banking, put your information in there.

But for most people yeah. The only other thing too is that the, it definitely is customizable and it’s not a cookie cutter, one design fits are or meets people’s needs. So that’s where a lot of times it is some back and forth tweaking and that, so a lot of the information we’re provided today is general overall, guidance definitely feel free to reach out and we can talk about specifics cuz there are small tweaks and things to that. Maybe more beneficial for certain goals and than for others so definitely reach out.

Why You Need to Protect Your Assets | Tax Audit With Clint Coons

What’s up folks. Now this week, we’re gonna be talking to Clint Coons from Anderson advisors about legal and tax questions that a lot of you guys had submitted to me in the past. I know this stuff, but I’m always catching myself knowing that I’m not a CPA tax attorney. So we’re gonna hear it right from Clint.

A lot of your guys’ questions that you guys have given me in the past. I’m really excited. I’m gonna be seeing a lot of you guys this next week in Napa valley, as we do a little bit of a Huey mixer and then off to Huntsville, Alabama, to check out all our apartments out there. We try to do an apartment tour for you guys to come and check out the apartments that you guys own with us.

At least once a. This is about the time before Halloween and the holiday season. This is probably the last opportunity for the year, but if you guys want to interact with us, meet other investors again, that was a big turning point in my investment career was, really meeting other really passive investors and really understanding why I need to get out of rental properties because it’s a headache too much liability as we’re gonna be talking to Clint about that today.

And it’s just too much headache and really this whole brochure strategy. Buy rent, rehab, repair refinance. That’s a great strategy, but it’s just too much effort. And for a lot of our credit investors, most of the people who listen to this show and especially invest with us these days are credit investors and their time is more valuable than their money. And they certainly don’t wanna go to the risk of doing a remote BRRRR or a BRRRR even in their backyard.

So again, hopefully you guys can join us. January 13th, the 16th in Honolulu, Hawaii for our annual retreat. For more information about that, please join our club at simple passive cash flow.com/club. If you want to be considered to come to that you guys need to book those mandatory onboarding calls with me.

There, you’re gonna get a bunch of other content such as our free, even a banking eCourse, and a whole slew of other free resources. So again, join at simple passive cash flow.com/club and enjoy the show.

 

What’s up folks we have Clint Coons from Anderson advisors on the show. , we’re gonna be talking about tax and legal, a lot of the questions I’ve been hearing from a lot of you folks. What do we do by asking for protection? And I wanted Clint to answer some of the tax questions that I keep hearing from you guys. We will put this video up at simple passive cash flow.com/tax. And from there you guys can also sign up to have a pre-con with Clint’s folks. And all this other tax information we have on that page against passive cash flow.com/tax. Clint joined us again. It’s been like two or three years. I think it’s the beginning of the pandemic. I last saw you in person, I think in 2019 looking the same man looking good out there. Thank you, likewise.

So like the first thing, asset protection, why is it important? And maybe we start with some of the basics , it really comes down to ensuring that if anything were to go wrong with your investments or on your personal side, that the assets that you’re investing into are not gonna be put at risk.

Look, I’ve been investing now, like you have for 15 years, I’m older, so I’ve been going at it longer and I’ve, I built up a sizeable portfolio, over 300 properties and multiple different strategies, buy and hold, fix and flip self storage, apartment buildings.

And so through my investing. I’ve come across some issues before I’ve had two houses burned down in the last year. Luckily nobody was hurt. I’ve had a tree fall through a house and strike the master bedroom again, narrowly avoiding disaster. And through it all, if anything had gone wrong and somebody had actually died or been severely injured, that would’ve resulted in a lawsuit.

And I see people day after day not quite on that frequency, but I do see people every year that will send me a lawsuit, a letter from an attorney, explain to them how they’re being sued because of something that happened on their property. And, they live in Hawaii and the investments over in Florida and they have never even seen the investment, never physically been to the property.

And now they’re involved in a lawsuit. And so with asset protection I tell individuals time and time again. Hey, listen. The likelihood of being sued, it’s not huge, right? You’re probably pretty safe. But the thing is that if you do get sued. The first person you’re gonna call is Anderson or another attorney.

And you’re gonna say, what can you do to protect me? And unfortunately, there’s nothing I can do. I was just responding to an email before you and I got on here and this family’s going through a situation where the grandfather owned the property. He contaminated the property and now where four generations or four buyers down the line, and they’re asking me what they can do to protect themselves now because of that environmental contamination, cuz they know, they’re, they’ve already been threatened that they’re gonna be sued and they wanna start protecting their assets.

And the answer is nothing. I can’t help you now, you shouldn’t have told me that you were going to be sued and all the backstory, because it really ties my hand. So asset protection, you need to be proactive. You set it up just in case the worst harm occurs so that you’ve minimized your overall risk exposure very similarly. 

I just just heard this story from one of my investors and they, it was a story of, they got inherited a property from their dad and their dad does everything old school just doesn’t do anything with lawyers. And I guess somebody, there was an elevator that broke and then, now they’re suing all the three siblings equally, so just can expand the scope of the lawsuit. So a windfall for the person suing to go after everybody. A lot of that stuff, like to your point, you can’t do it after the fact.

So maybe talk again where I’m always like why the heck would you wanna own any rental properties in the first place, our group, I know you work with a wide spectrum of investors, but to me, once you go over, million or $2 million net worth, that’s where the syndications as the LP position comes into play. But I guess, from When you’re in an infancy, under half a million dollars net worth, what do you think is more appropriate and maybe walk us through as people grow their net worth, what is more appropriate from an asset protection standpoint?

I get that question a lot. And what I tell people just think about its properties. How many people say, how many properties should I put in one limited liability company? And they’ll be shocked. I’ll tell ’em one property per LLC. I’m like come on. My property is only worth $60,000 or a hundred thousand dollars each in equity and say, yeah that’s fine.

But how much income do those properties generate for you? Because really for most of us we wanna protect the income stream. And if something goes wrong with one property, you have five properties in one LLC. And they make $5,000 each on an annual basis, you just lost $25,000 a year in income.

Wouldn’t you rather be in a situation where you lose $5,000 and you save $20,000. And so this notion that your net worth determines the type of planning that you should use for your structuring, I think is misplaced because the person that has $500,000, if they were to lose a hundred thousand dollars, that’s 20% of their net worth.

Whereas somebody like yourself or myself, I could lose a hundred grand and it’s not gonna impact what I’m drinking. As you can see on my back shelf, they’re all empty by the way. It doesn’t impact me to the same degree because I have so many more properties and I make so much more income.

And so I think when you’re first starting out, you’re at more risk because you don’t know what you don’t know. And many times, and until you start having, you don’t even know what you need to know. And you get this backwards in your structures that you need more protection at the outset.

And then as you start to grow and you get to somewhere where I’m at, I don’t have 300 LLCs. There’s no way I would create that for myself. So what I’ll do is I’ll start grouping properties. I’ll put 10 properties in an LLC, and yeah, I could potentially lose an LLC if one of those houses that burned down was in an LLC.

If somebody was killed, I would’ve lost 10 properties. But the point is that I have 29 other LLCs or 290 other properties in that loss is not gonna change my lifestyle. Whereas the person that has $500,000 has one house. You get involved in a lawsuit because of that one property, or maybe you have two properties and you get involved in a lawsuit because of that, not only could you lose those two properties, but one impact is gonna have on your personal’s life as well.

If a judgment entered against you. And so I encourage people to always put plans together that is commensurate with the risk, but also ensures that if anything happens with the asset they’re protected, or if they’re involved in a lawsuit because they’ve entered into a bad lease or involved in a car accident, or a bank comes after ’em for a deficiency judgment that people can’t get after their assets, number one, their savings, their real estate, or what, a lot of times people don’t think about what you brought up syndications. If you’re investing in syndications, I think the biggest mistake people make time and time again is putting their own name down on the syndication. They should invest through an LLC so they can preserve that cash flow as it comes out. It wouldn’t be paid out to her creditor.

Maybe we can talk about that a little bit. There’s two types of liability. There’s the ones coming from so many chips and falls or the elevator breaks in your rental property, or I think what you’re referring to in that case is if the outside in. Liability. Is what your kind of primary concern is. Maybe expand on that.

And unlike, people that differentiate between the two, because I think that gets lost in the shuffle a lot of times. Yeah. So you, we have what are called dangerous assets that create liability for us real estate creates liability. Freedom. Just if you live in Hawaii and you have an investment property in Florida, if somebody injures themselves on that investment property, they’re gonna Sue the owner and you didn’t have to do anything wrong.

You had a property manager that was managing it, but it doesn’t matter. You’re still responsible cuz you own the property. And if you own it in your own name, they’re coming after you. But if you aren’t in an LLC, they’re going after the LLC. And hopefully that’s the only asset that’s available to them in that LLC.

So worst case scenario, what do you lose? You lose the equity in that property. Plus what I say is more important, the income, but you are preserved. I had a client. They’re a client and I met them a long time ago and they had this issue where they owned everything in their own name. And so now we’re gonna switch and talk about what happens with assets on our liability on the outside.

So they had multiple properties, 14 homes, and they sent their son off to college and he’s there less than a week. And he hits someone with a car and he makes this person a paraplegic. So the attorneys, of course. Sue the parents because they were paying for the kids’ education. They were still responsible for ’em and they found them liable for this person’s injuries and they bankrupt them.

And so here’s a couple, they had actually retired with living off the income from their assets. They’re in their early sixties. They BK themselves because of this lawsuit. And now they’re back at different jobs trying to rebuild. And the thing they said to me is they said, you know what? I wish we had this knowledge when we had the assets, we just didn’t appreciate the risk at that point in time.

And so this is what we refer to as outside liability, you’re gonna be sued personally. And then the question is, what can that creditor attach? What can they get from you? By using limited liability companies, certain types of trust, limited partnerships, what you’re able to do is limit a creditor’s recovery to what we call a charging order, which means that if it’s in an LLC, if you set it up the right way, we can’t take your LLC from you.

We can’t take the properties that are held inside of it. We can’t take your cash flow that is being generated from the properties or from a syndication that all stays protected inside of that box. You control it. I have a longtime client who lives in Oahu, and she was involved in a situation where.

She got into a deal with two Hawaii real estate developers. And she got the short end of that deal. And now she was going after ’em for $2 million and she got a judgment against them, a personal judgment against each of them for 2 million bucks. And she wrote me an email a couple years back, really frustrated.

She said, Clint, I’ve got this judgment and I’m not getting paid. They’re living in my own neighborhood and luxury condominiums, driving Teslas and Mercedes. And I know what they have. They have all these LLCs and there isn’t a single attorney that can get me paid. And she wanted me to look at it and see if I could offer any advice.

And unfortunately, my response was, there’s nothing we can do. She set ’em up. The developers set it up this way, so they’re protecting their income stream and their assets. And I knew every LLC that they had, and I knew how the money flowed through all the LLCs. And I explained to her, I said, I did the same thing for you.

And if the shoe was on the other foot, You wouldn’t have to pay out. And so I understand it’s frustrating, but that’s why people use entities. And that’s why I think people who have assets, people who are investing, they’re putting themselves out there need to take adequate steps to protect themselves.

So hypothetical question here, cuz it’s always hard for us to determine which one is the biggest liability outside in the inside out. If I had 10 rental properties, which I think are dirty assets, cuz things happen in them. And would you be more concerned for me personally, driving down to the grocery store, hitting grandma like that kind of outside in attack versus something happening with the 10 properties, I guess just that cuz you see these cases, you see the actual lawsuits and from the outside and inside all the time, which one?

Like which one would people do? People need to worry about more? It’s equal. People get sued for the most random things, cuz you can never predict when a lawsuit is gonna happen. You’re right. Driving down to the store two years ago, I was driving to a restaurant near Christmas time for dinner and it was raining.

It was dark. And some guys walking across the street in all black, in an unli street, I’m like you idiot. I almost clipped him. My wife freaked out. And because I couldn’t see very well cause it was pouring down rain and had I hit him that would’ve been a lawsuit and so things like that can occur.

But at the same time, I’ve got a whole bunch of emails and letters from clients that I use in my presentations, even where I show people, Hey, this person bought a piece of property and they’re being sued cuz this is what happened. And. It’s equal and that’s why you need to balance that out. And by putting together the structures, you’re protecting yourself from the asset. So if anything goes wrong there you’re protected. And you’re also protecting the asset from anything that you do. So you get two forms of protection by putting it into effect.

Yeah. I would also mention if you’re a doctor or high liability profession, even like a real estate broker, you’re gonna get sued all the time. That potential for that outside in attack is probably much larger than the average W2 employee out there. That’s what Clem’s saying. So if an investor is dumping all their rental properties, going into syndication deals as a passive investor, then they don’t have to worry too much about the liability from the investment, but they still have to worry about the outside.

They themselves are the worst enemy or the liability. At that point. Yeah. So actually a physician client one time called me up and this was classic. He’s a physician client. He wasn’t the time he wasn’t. And he said, Hey there’s a judgment against me. That’s coming down. And I’m about to have a liquidation event with this syndication that I’m invested into.

How can I word it to this deal sponsor, that’s running this syndication that I don’t wanna receive that money right now. And I want ’em to hold it until after this thing all plays out. And I said, really, you think they’re just going to make an exception for you and say, we’re gonna liquidate out our, every other investor in this deal.

But for you, we’re gonna hold on to your funds because you’re afraid that they’re gonna go to a creditor. I said, that’s not reality. And in fact, if you made that. What is it gonna show that you’re trying to influence or hide assets and you’re gonna put that person at risk. So they have no incentive to help you.

They, if I was their attorney, I tell ’em not to. So how do you protect against that? What you do is you take your syndication interest and you put ’em into a limited liability company. Typically we’re gonna set it up in Wyoming or Delaware, and you have it held by that LLC. So when the syndicators do pay out, it doesn’t go to you directly.

It goes to your LLC that you control. You’re the member of, and if you were staring down a lawsuit or a judgment, the creditors can’t step in front of you and swipe that distribution from you because the only time they’re gonna get paid, get this is if you decide to take money out of your limited liability company and pay it to.

And I haven’t met a person yet. That’s been in that situation where they say, yeah, I’ve got, 500,000 sit in this limited liability company. I’m just gonna start taking distributions to make sure my creditor gets paid more likely. They’re gonna say, I’m just gonna reinvest it, sit on this until that judgment expires.

And then I’ll start taking my money out. That’s how it works. But most time you’re never gonna get there. And the reason why is because attorneys understand how all this works and they’re gonna settle. One of my clients in Los Angeles $1.7 million judgment entered against him earlier this year.

And of course, he’s tripping all over himself, freaking out, he’s going into a debtor’s exam. He saying, what do I tell him? I said, you have to be completely honest. You disclose everything that they ask. And so he started going through and telling him how, set up LLCs. He was using myself as his attorney through Anderson and they pulled it up.

Our information on Anderson. And there was three attorneys that are grilling them and they started conversing amongst themselves. And then they turned the mic off, turned off the camera. They did a re they took a recess for, I don’t know, 15, 20 minutes. They came back and they said, listen, I understand you’re using this firm.

You’ve set up the structures. You’ve already disclosed. We don’t need to continue on if you’re willing to accept $400,000, we’ll settle today for 400 grand, 1.7 million to $400,000. Once they knew what they were up against calls me up, he goes, what do I do? I said what do you wanna do? He goes, I want to take it.

And I said, no, you don’t wanna take that. That’s just their opening offer. They’re gonna go lower. They just showed their hand because they knew they wouldn’t get paid otherwise. And so sure enough, we went lower or he did. And that’s the point why you have this stuff because it puts you in a stronger position.

And again, I think that’s where not a lot of people realize like this stuff it’s not black or white binary, it’s gonna protect you, not protect you in a way it’s like a magic card that yes, it shields you from a vast majority of the settlement. Everything’s pretty much settled. I don’t know what the stats are but like 90, 99% of things are settled.

Just goes to a math formula. If you have your LLC or some other legal entity set up that it’s basically like a shield. Correct. So what’s like the standard, like on the podcast form here, we can’t really go into too many details, but what’s some, like a typical like entity structure or maybe multiple structures, for the average, multimillionaire they’re just a passive investor. What kind of does that kind of look like for folks.

Typically, I tell people anonymity king, make sure they don’t know what you have, because if they can’t find it, they’re not gonna know they can go after and it’s not something they can recover against, make yourself appear as if you don’t own much of anything, because that increases the likelihood that a personal creditor will settle for policy limits and go away.

And that’s really what we’re driving towards. It’s those aggressive creditors where the attorney, is trying to make a buck more than the policy limits. That’s gonna push past that where you wanna make sure you have a firewall set up. And the best way to create a firewall is to use limited liability companies and LLC, that has what we refer to as charging order protections.

So I like to always set someone up with a Wyoming limited liability company, because it’s some of the best protection you can use to ensure that if you get sued personally, A creditor cannot break that LLC and get into whatever it holds. So we start with that as the base foundation, and then from there that LLC will own other limited liability companies because that’s the outside end shield.

So if somebody sues you that stops them from getting into your assets, your investments, you hit grandma going down the road, the outside in. Yeah, that’s right. Perfect example of that. So now your investments, your syndications your real estate that you own, your brokerage account equities, things like that.

You’re gonna set up separate not the syndications or the savings guy. You drop that right in your Wyoming, LLC. But if you own residential real estate, single families, maybe you have a duplex here, there you put those in separate LLCs. They all point to the Wyoming, LLC. So they’re all owned by that one, Wyoming, LLC.

So if you were involved in a lawsuit and somebody said to you, Hey how many LLCs do you own? I only own one. They need to ask the question. How many LLCs does the one LLC that you own? Oh, maybe it owns eight, but it’s your shield. So by setting this up in the manner which I described, if something were to happen with one of those other upper tier LLCs that happens to hold a duplex, then it’s gonna stay contained in that LLC.

And that’s going to absorb any losses associated with that, but your syndications protected your brokerage account. Your savings is gonna be exempt. You’re gonna be exempt from that lawsuit, your personal residence, not gonna be attached, it’s just gonna lock it down. And so for most people, that’s the type of structure we would recommend you set up now.

Where you’re investing is really important where you live is important as well, because there are nuances to the types of entities and strategies we use. It’s not a one size fits all people think I talk about LLC. So if they’re investing in Florida, we’re just gonna use a limited liability company. Or if you’re in California, it’s gonna be an LLC.

It’s really not. And so in different jurisdictions, we use different types of entities because you have to look at not just the asset protection you need to look at what are the tax implications. Do you wanna put together a structure that’s going to create a taxable event when you put the property into it?

Yeah. You get asset protection, but at what costs, it costs you $7,000 in transfer taxes or reassessment of the property. So you need to understand that other side of it as well, and look to different types of tools that will ultimately achieve the same desired result. But it’s not going to be with any type of negative consequences that can come from reassessments or transfer taxes.

And I think what Clint’s trying to say too, there is don’t go to legal zoom, cuz I think that’s where this stuff gets personal. And I think that’s why, let me tell you guys to, if you guys are new to our group book, a quick call with myself, we can dig into your guys.

Other, non-legal side that’s my area expertise, but it’s all personal finance and this is, it’s all legal structuring and it’s all personal to your situation where you live, how much money you make, what’s your values and what’s your legal liability is your profession, et cetera. But I guess Clint what’s what are some of these legal structures that you’re not a big fan of, or maybe don’t really apply to situations.

And I guess before you got you answer that I’m just gonna take a time to also say, tell everybody here, make sure you guys get your umbrella insurance, that’s essentially what is the giveaway for the lawyers when it comes settlement time? So get a umbrella insurance at least like a million bucks.

Most people on our family office group were getting that for three, 400 bucks a year. There’s nothing. Absolutely. What are some of the mistakes that people end up making. I see like these series LLCs, these land, there’s a bunch of like flat different options out there.

Maybe you can talk to why sometimes that doesn’t, those things don’t make sense, because where you’re using it, it has to be recognized or it has to provide. Some benefit. If you set up a series, LLC, for instance, and you create a bunch of cells associated with the series, LLC, and then you wanna own real estate in Hawaii through these independent cells of a Delaware series that ain’t happening.

You could do it, but at the end of the day, if you got sued, you’re not gonna have the protection that structure would provide you. If you’re making that same investment in Texas, that actually recognizes the series, LLC. So you see people try to use structures that aren’t appropriate for the state, where the assets located.

They think, oh, I’m gonna save a couple bucks by going with the series, LLC. Hate to tell you that it’s not gonna work there. Land trust, I use land trust for my investing, but I’m not one of those that I’m gonna tell you, you need to use a land trust in every situation because the problem you run into it complicates your life. So I like to keep things simple. I’ve seen multi-tiered structures before that the benefit doesn’t outweigh the cost. And when I say cost, I’m not talking about monetary costs. I’m talking about time, right? For you to have to get you wrap your mind around all this and operate it, that’s equally important, any type of structure you’re creating.

And then the other mistake that I see people make is not understanding the tax side. So there are things that we can do when the way we’re setting up our entities to ensure that we’re always going to look better to lenders so we can fund more deals or if we wanna sell the property. So I’ll give you two, two concrete examples here.

One individual comes to me, found me on the internet on YouTube, said, Hey, Clint I wanna book a strategy session with you. We get it all set up. His problem was he had a multi-family. Trying to sell it. Two buyers keep fell out of financing. He had it in a limited liability company set up by his CPA.

So the CPA got the structure, right? He just didn’t understand what tax election to make, which, he’s a CPA. You’d think he’d know this. He chose to treat that LLC as a disregarded entity. Now the benefit to the client is he didn’t have to file a tax return with the disregarded LLC, but the CP didn’t know the right questions to ask which would’ve been, Hey, what do you plan to do with this property?

Is this gonna be a rehab stabilization and sell? Because if that’s the case, this LLC needs to file a tax return and we’re gonna set it up as a partnership or maybe an escort that would kind of be my secondary option so that when we go to sell the property, the underwriters who are financing the deal for your buyers, they’re gonna get a tax return to verify the income and expenses and CapEx and all that with the property, cuz absent that.

It’s gonna be tough, cuz they’re always gonna ask for tax returns and he didn’t understand that. And so as a result, they kept falling out under financing. And so there wasn’t a clean cut solution for him. He had a third buyer and the same process, they kept asking for tax returns for the LLC. people say, just give him your 10 40.

It doesn’t work that way because underwriters, they got these little checkbox. They have to go through in order to underwrite a loan. Otherwise it isn’t gonna comport with the lenders requirements. And so they wanna make sure that they’re hitting all these boxes and the same thing with the private investor that owns multi or owns, residential real estate.

I’ll explain to them, Hey, you can set it up where you own it personally, or you own it through a disregarded LLC. So you don’t have to file a tax return federal return. But what is that doing to you rather than what is it doing for you? And if you don’t know what that is, then you’re missing out on a big part of real estate investing.

So what I’ll tell my clientele, what I like the way I like to structure it, that Wyoming holding LLC, all of it treated as a partnership for federal tax purposes. And the reason why I do that is because it hits your income will hit your 10 40 on a different line. Then if you own the real estate in your own name and so where it hits your 10 40 makes you actually look better to lender.

So you can get more deals done because your debt to income ratio, doesn’t go outta whack, cuz this is what can happen. If you own it in your own name, it screws up your debt to income ratio. Cuz they hold back income. You can make a hundred grand on your real estate and rental income. They’ll say, no, we’re only gonna give you credit for 70,000 of that.

You’re like, what the hell? There’s a hundred grand. You can see it. Yeah, but we’re forced to hold back. Whereas if you structured it slightly different, same income, same taxes to you, but where it hits your tax return, they give you a hundred percent of that. And then you take that and you look at the audit risk and now you just reduce your risk of audit as well.

So if you’re gonna engage in cost segregation to massively depreciate your property to throw off huge tax breaks to yourself, I prefer to do that through a partnership K one, then on a 10 40 schedule E page one, so that I’m taken out of the audit risk pool. And so there’s different layers. And I call that the business planning side of investing, where a lot of attorneys, if they’re not investors, then they’re not gonna see that, that side of it because they haven’t been down there and making the mistakes that, I made these mistakes.

And so it took me a few years to learn this stuff just from my own investing. And thankfully, because we work with so many clients all across the country, I would find myself talking to experienced investors like yourself and, You’re asking me for asset protection and I’m asking you questions yeah.

To help you plan, but also to figure it out, Hey, what is he doing? That’s helping him to achieve his goals so much faster than I am and started putting all this stuff together. And it’s really helped out our clients a lot in their investing.

And I think, like for our group, this is the simple passive of cash flow ways. When your network grows, you eventually get out of these little rental properties and not only for the legal headaches as we talked before, like why do even maybe I should take myself out because I still sign on the debt personally. But for most of our clients, why do you even need to show income to qualify for a loan?

Unless you’re gonna buy a primary residence, but then that’s another problem. I haven’t figured out personally, when you start to buy 2, 3, 4, $5 million properties, you can’t get a loan for bigger than a million dollars, but if you’re buying a regular house like for mostly you guys out there, you’re not gonna be doing deals, you’re not doing buying a duplex. TriFlex you’re just getting out of that world. And that’s where, you don’t really need to think about, these things as you start to gravitate more as a professional investor, as opposed to deal maker or, the bigger pockets world, group, B guy, those kinds of types of folks.

Let’s say that I’m in four year deals, that’s four K ones then that come down to my tax return. So if I held it through one entity treated as a partnership, not only have one K one that comes down to my tax return rather than four. So how does that benefit me? The benefit comes in the complexity of your return and that should you go to qualify for new personal residents and you want to use, qualified mortgages.

You’re not working in the non QM world. Then when they look at your 10 40, whoever you have to turn, your 10 40 over to less is gonna be better. The more you have, the more scrutiny it draws and you take yourself out of potential situations that you could have ordinarily qualified for. If you just didn’t have your tax return structured in a certain manner.

So when I look at planning, how your 10 40 looks is just important to me is how your asset protection side’s gonna play out. I think all you guys just should go work with Anderson and then go to the tax pitch, cuz I’ve just as the syndicate and sponsor, I’m just tired of working with some of your guys’ CPAs that ask, like they need to file this.

Or the mortgage brokers they ask for all these little K one S and it’s dude, it doesn’t even matter. It’s not like they. Debt recourse to this loan. They’re just a passive investor along with a hundred other investors. They give you guys, if the bureaucratic guy actually knew what a K one was part of a partnership, they wouldn’t be asked in these questions, but they’re just following a checklist.

And I don’t know, that’s my little rant against all these little doc or these requests that these mortgage brokers or underwriters ask for at the end of the day. Yeah. It’s frustrating because it just, can screw up your deal for sure. Oh, and it’s time consuming for you to have to deal with all those little request that come in.

Before we move off of the legal side and talk a little bit about some of these questions, these typical questions that I get on the K one and taxes side, you mentioned like the kid going out and getting drunk and you. Incurring liability for the family. We, this specific question has come up many times in our family office group.

The kids are becoming teenagers. Do you buy the car in their name? Do you put the, the loan in their name? What’s the best practice for that? Especially when, mom and dad worked for $5 million net worth and, mobile juniors out there doing OLS one.

That always comes down to what is the cost of insurance and how much you’re willing to pay? Ideally if a child, when you say child, what over 18 or under 18. So 16 year or even going up to the college, I guess I get, I don’t know if it matters, it really doesn’t matter so much.

If they’re going off to college, like the example I gave you, that vehicle is still in the parent’s name. So that brought the liability back home, but they can also say that you’re still supporting that child and therefore you’re responsible for them. They could try to rope you in that way because you have the deepest pockets.

So what I would recommend, if you have someone who’s over the 18 or over under 18, I don’t think you can get out of it, but over 18, make sure that the registered owner of the car okay. That legal owners aren’t necessarily liable. It is the registered owner. And you know this because when you finance a car, the legal owner is always the bank and you can’t Sue the bank because you go out and pull a DWE and you hit somebody else’s car and destroy it.

You Sue the driver and the registered owner. So that’s one way to, to minimize your risk exposure to the kids that are going off at college. Second thing is to show that they support themselves. Structure in such a way that maybe they’re earning income, where they have their own investment stream coming in.

So you bring them into one of your LLCs and you give them, five or 10% interest in that. And that gives them enough money to cover their expenses. And some people say heck if I give them a 10% interest and they’re making 80 grand a year, how do I know they’re not gonna blow it on, parties and girls and things like that?

Because if they are you’re in control, you just turn it off is what you would do. And so that’s what I tell people, you always wanna make sure you’re in control of of what you’re doing. Yeah. So have them put the loan in their name too or that doesn’t matter? The loan in their name, you could do that.

The benefit of doing the loan in their name is that now they’re gonna build business credit or not business credit. They’re gonna help build their credit. You may have to co-sign on the loan, but if they’re on the loan as well, now they’re starting to create that credit profile. So that’s advantageous for sure.

To do that. What about insurance policy does or does that does not matter, I guess it doesn’t matter so much, but what’s gonna happen, it’s gonna be more expensive for them than if they’re insured under your policy. I guess at what net worth would you say, would it make sense to bring it?

Irrevocable trust to take care some of these issues where they don’t, nobody owns the car. It doesn’t matter about the owner. It’s a registered owner that comes down to it. So you could have the legal owner is the trust, but the registered owner, what gonna be your child, or maybe you make the trust also the legal and the registered owner, but the child’s driving it.

Then the liability flows back to that trust. And whatever assets it would hold and the child gets sued. I could see you doing that. And that’s the only asset that holds is the car. The problem with that strategy is that someone’s gonna look at it and say, what is the purpose of the trust?

And you’re gonna say to hold a car and for asset protection, and then you could run into problems where they don’t respect the trust, because it was set up strictly for asset protection purposes. They might look through it. You could try it. I’m not opposed to doing it because I think more roadblocks you put in place the better off you are.

You could just tie an attorney up. Oh, that car out’s owned by an irrevocable trust. Oh, that’s owned by limited liability company over there. Oh, there’s a corporation over there and we don’t have the insurance that’s in the kid’s name and all of a sudden they’re just chasing down all these different paths.

To me that damn car is really the biggest point of contention. If you’re thinking about how to not lose your money, as far as here’s what you do, you give your kid a bicycle. Okay. And you solve the problem. Or number two, you make sure that all your assets are protected.

So even if they do Sue you, what are they gonna get? Or get an Uber one and give ’em a whole bunch of Uber credits and stuff like that. Yeah. So they never have to leave their house. Correct.

So let’s switch over to some tax stuff. And I had some questions here that I get asked a lot and I always feel bad. Taking your guys tax Tuesday videos and regurgitating it back to them. Appreciate Clint, answering these for me because they are the same old questions over and over again. The first one I normally get is this grouping election, right? Investor invests in syndication deal where they’re a passive investor and they get their gains and losses on this K one form.

And especially if there’s a cost segregation involved, there’s a huge amount of losses created often, like at least half of what they invest . And then, so the investor goes back to their CPA who looks up from their glasses and says you can’t use those losses to offset the gains on other rental properties or other syndication deals.

Maybe talk a little bit what’s the logical leap there. And. Should people handle that one. I’m not sure. As long as there’re passive losses and you have passive income, those net out. And so that’s the way that should be playing out. And there’s always gonna be nuances if people are going back to their CPA with passive losses, and they’re trying to take those passive losses against ordinary income or non passive income, then you’re gonna struggle unless you’re a real estate professional.

You’re not gonna be able to do that. So the losses that you pull out of a syndication, those can be grouped against similar types of income, but they can’t be used to set up unsimilar types of income, right? Similar types, meaning passive income gotta be passive. So from other rental properties or other syndicated deals, all passive that’s correct.

Let’s talk about then that kind of leads into the next question. You can’t use the passive losses to offset order income such as from your 10 99 to your day job. Unless maybe go into rep status, what that allows them to. Yeah. So unless you become a real estate professional, which means that, you’re spending 50% of your time, so you don’t hold a full time job in a non real estate related activity and you spend 750 hours on real estate related activities.

And so with reps to meet that test, it doesn’t have to be with your own rentals. You just have to be doing stuff in real estate. So you could be a broker, you could be a contractor, you could be someone that’s involved in that, an appraiser, and you’re gonna meet the first prong of the reps if that’s what you do for your living.

But then the second prong of that test. Is you have to materially participate in your rental real estate business activity. Or you folio there folio the properties you won’t correct. And so that’s either there’s seven tests, but the two that we look at the most is gonna be the 500 hour test. You spend 500 hours on your real estate.

Plus you met the seven 15 half of your time on other real estate activit. You’re good. Or you have to spend a hundred hours and that a hundred hours is more than anyone else that works on your properties. And so where I find that people struggle with the reps test is that they have out of state PMs. So they’re not involved with their own real estate.

And they try to use education looking at balance sheets and qualify. And there hasn’t been a case yet that I’m aware. That’s ever happened now that could probably qualify for that first 750 hours. That’s not involved in their portfolio. One might use that, cuz that seven, that 750 hours outside of their active portfolio is a little looser.

It’s gonna be tough because you got 50% of the time. So if you’re a physician, you ain’t making it. You’re already you miss out on that prong. So what I typically tell people is that if you wanna make sure you’re gonna qualify, self-manage your real estate. Now you don’t have to. Self-manage all of it just self-manage enough where you get the hours and you’re good to go.

Or if you’re not, if you don’t have the time and you can’t meet 750, 50% of your time, just do short term rentals for a bit, buy a property, turn it into a short term rental, spend a hundred hours on that property. You don’t have to worry about 750 hours, 50% of your time. You just do that.

And your average rental period is seven days or less costs like that thing, harvest a ton of tax deductions, turn it into a long term rental next year. And your goal, you can take that money now and you can offset those losses against all your income that are generated from that short term rental activity.

And so what I find is with many of our physician clients that are not yet just putting all they’re diversifying, they have their syndication interests, they have their equities, and they’re doing some single families on the side. We’re taking those. And we’re saying those need to be short term rentals for the first year.

Focus on that. So we can harvest the losses. We had one guy who sold a his interest in a clinic. He had a big windfall and. Poured all that investment into a property in Texas and turned that into a short term rental. His wife was the one that qualified. He still was busy wife qualified with the a hundred hours.

And it freed up for him must say he was $670,000 in deductions. So it can be huge. If you look at it from that perspective. So if they turn on the, short term rentals, they do that for the first year. What about the next year? Are they real professional next year?

When nothing goes to be a transition to a long term rental? No, you’re not because you couldn’t meet the test to begin with. Yeah. So only that it’s that, that one year. Everything comes here. You’re eating all the cookies the first year. There’s nothing left for the second year. So you don’t care in the second year you took it all now.

Yeah. So this is that strategy where you’re investing in a whole bunch of syndication deals. Maybe you invested half a million and you got 300,000 of pass the suspended, passive losses on your 80, was it 82, 85 form or something like that, but you have that ready to use. So you pulse it in next year.

You, you do a short term rental. Now it’s your game to use those passive losses as you wish. But after that, you lose that kind of that Starman ability that, that rep status for after that year. Or if you look, if you had excess passive losses, look for excess passive income opportunities you have where you have appreciated positions that are passive in nature, sell ’em harvest the law the gains this year to take your losses and offset it, or buy another short term rental next year, a couple years later, buy short term rental. Yeah. One of the things I, you and I were talking about, I had a client that approached me, said, I have this property, I’ve owned it since 2014. I told I couldn’t do a cost se on it. What should I do? And I, I don’t qualify as a real estate professional.

I need some tax deductions this year. I said, sell it. His complaint was well it’s tripled in value. If I sold it, then I have to fail this additional gain said sell it on a 10 31 exchange. Let’s exchange up into even a larger property with that. Now, since you bought the property between two, September of 2017 and the year 2022, it qualifies for 100% bonus depreciation.

So we exchange into a larger property for you. We then perform a cost segment on that larger property, generate a huge tax reduction this year that you can then use to offset that gain that you have. There’s ways to use the code to to fix your tax problems if you’re willing to do it. And in that case, he had to sell the property under a 10 31 exchange, find the replacement property, which he was willing to do because he wanted to get the tax losses harvest it.

And this is the best year to do it because a hundred percent goes away next year goes to 80%. Yeah. Still not as bad, the year after, I think 20, 24 be 60%, but , that’s another strategy that I’ve been personally thinking about is, buying a big house that I eventually like to live in, but to buy it and then cost it out stuff, those passive losses in my pocket, then maybe living it at some point.

That’s a strategy too. It’s exactly right. I’m running out of time in the year 2022 to do that. You are but the thing is, if you buy it this year, you don’t have to spend a second this year. To get a hundred percent bonus you could cost second, two years from now, as long as it was still an investment property.

And it relates back to the year of acquisition. So if you bought it in 2022 and you held onto it, put it in the service and then didn’t perform a cost second until 2024. Your bonus depreciation would be 100% because it relates back to the year of acquisition, not when you do the cost sec. So that’s why this year, as long as you buy something now, 4 20, 20 twos out a hundred percent.

Ah, that’s a good one. That’s a new one. I probably should know that. That’s why our other CPAs on our cost fixed indications. They say, yeah, you don’t need to do it just yet. But that’s a great point. And I really, I don’t know if people missed it, but Clint’s idea. I’m not a huge fan of the 10 31, but if you’re gonna do the 10 31 to get a larger property to, make the bigger bang for your buck on the cost, say before the end of the year or acquire it before the end of the year, then the 10 31 allows you to get something bigger, to get a larger cost say, and stick those losses in your pocket, or at least kick the can down the road. A little bit that way.

So the other questions that kind of come to mind as far as passive investor taxes like I, I think the big thing that, a lot of CPA firms are scrambling, or at least on our side, we’re seeing, K one S get taking so long and most times in private equity world, to have them get it completed in January, February is just ridiculous in the private equity world.

We tell ’em to do it in October when it’s normally due. But still, investors are their CPAs asking for these K one S and what, if a K one is missed, right? Can they just refile it next year? Or what’s the, they could amend the return, just make sure, approximately if there’s positive income there, what that’s gonna be and just report the income.

So you didn’t under-report your total income, but here’s the thing with, like you said, the CPAs, we have a large tax group inside of Anderson, and the problem you’re running into is industry. Why can’t you find enough people to work? And so it’s just really slowing down the process for everyone and getting their returns completed because there just aren’t enough preparers right now in the workforce.

That is willing to do the job. And so you see it across the board, doesn’t matter, you guys it’s taken them a long time to get their K one S out. Unfortunately it’s because they don’t have the manpower. And everyone we talk to cuz we are, we’ve been trying to grow and expand our tax department beyond the 140 people that we have to buy up other companies and thinking, all right, we’re gonna get more people, economies of scale and they’re behind, they’re struggling to get through their work because of that.

And here’s my personal tax question. So I get 80, a hundred K ones every year, then I make it into a little spreadsheet. So I can spot check you guys at the end to make sure approximately how much passive losses I should have.

Yeah. But like the K ones they’re never right. Like the names always felt wrong or the damn boxes on the bottom they’re checked, they’re all messed up anyway. Does the IRS even look at that stuff or does anybody even care that it’s not gonna get an issue audited?

They’re just looking to see if you’ve got the income reported on your return. They’re matching up, not with the name, but with the E that’s really what it’s pulling down to. So it matches back to the parent return. If they were to audit, they would partner, they would audit on the partnership level and just make sure all the numbers add up to what the partner divided up in the beginning.

And here’s why you’re not getting an audit. You have 80 K one S in your return. You’re an audit. You look at that, you’re like the hell , I’m going up for this 10 40 guy. That’s the biggest joke about it. That they keep talking about what they just passed. But with that inflation reduction act scam.

They say they’re hiring all these auditors. Who do you think they’re gonna target? They’re not going after the people that have the K one S and the more sophisticated returns they’re gonna target the middle income taxpayer that doesn’t have the investments that just files the 10 40.

because that’s the easiest person. Plus you don’t have the knowledge. We’ve got some X IRS attorneys that work for us that used to work in the audit department. And they said, it’s crazy. You gave me a room of a thousand auditors. There’s only 10 in that room that handle corporations and partnerships. And those types of returns, 10 forties that have K one S on ’em.

He said the rest of ’em can’t touch ’em. Yeah. So he said, that’s the best way to hold assets. So what should I tell a lot of our investors were new. They might have three or four K ones, and then they’re asking you, they’re saying, oh, we spelled their name wrong on this K one.

Or, this checkbox needs to be checked. It’s just not a big deal. I think you can send them a corrected K one, but as long as they’re gonna be reporting their income then it’s not in and of itself gonna trigger on and on. Yeah, I get it. People are always everyone’s concerned about being audited, but that’s not the thing that’s gonna co you know, trigger the audit.

What’s gonna trigger the audit is that you, the 10 65 reports that you earned $250,000, and you report that you only made $250. That could be a problem. If they catch it and you’re part of the 0.04% or whatever that number is that actually gets audited or point, 1%. But I think if I’ve followed your guys tax Tuesdays enough, your guys have a big strategy as you guys put as many things on as the schedule C right.

As opposed to what normally people will put things in a 10 40 or the schedule E and that’s a lot more audited. Schedule C is more audited. So you have page one of schedule E that gets audited. We prefer to put things on page two, which is gonna be via K one. So all those K ones that you get that have to do with real estate, those show up on page two of your schedule, E not on page one is reserved for real estate that you own in your own name or through a disregarded entity.

That’s the audit because again, 990 auditors handle those types of returns. When you put that income over on page two via the K one. Now you have 10. So another reason why not to own little rental properties. Got it. Yeah. That is the closest plan. I know you’re always looking at these inflation reduction acts and the B B.

Any, like looking into the crystal ball, anything coming up for investors to be on the lookout for for like new tax breaks, like maybe a new opportunity zone ish type of thing or something exciting you coming up or or should be really be worried about the 80,000 IRS agents who they’re teaching with the fake code.

I wouldn’t be worried about the 80,000 IRS agents because they’re not gonna find them. We can’t find tax preparers. What, who are they gonna find to do this? And you can’t find employees right now. They’re not gonna find employees. Just finding people that show basic level skills that they actually wanna work.

Good luck. But beyond that, I think that the biggest thing on my horizon for people who own entities is gonna be the corporate transparency act where they’re gonna issue the finals. Regs, and they’re gonna have the auditing procedure that’s going to be released in. They said December is when they have to release that.

And so I think that’s the one thing that I’m curious to find out what’s gonna be required and what the reporting requirements are for anybody who has a business that have set up a, Ivo business trust, or LLC, or corporation, how that information is gonna get disclosed to the federal government does that one have to do with I remember a couple years ago, I told everybody, that were, putting their syndications and LLCs.

They all got pissed off at me because I said we need your social security number, man. Like when they got all upset with me and I’m just like I’m just the messenger, I know. Is that what the corporate transparency act is that part of it or. Yeah, you’re gonna have to, you have to report on all the members of the limited liability companies, the managers, the officers, all that corporation, same thing that’s gonna have to get submitted to, to the federal government.

And I forget if on a syndication, if there’s a, if there’s a de minimis rule where you don’t have to provide that information, but it’s gonna be an annual reporting requirement. Government wants to know what you’re doing, because they think that you’re committing tax fraud or your money laundering is really what they’re concerned about.

Yeah. I know people don’t like to give that stuff up, especially when they’re purposely using entities to invest through like you mentioned earlier. But, from a standpoint of Iris doesn’t have enough agents and to collect revenue from people who are doing bad things like, on purpose, I think that night may be a good idea for them so they can go catch those guys because that’s what people were doing, right?

They were, creating all these LLCs and creating all these deductions or hiding all the gains. And it’s impossible to track unless you can tie it to one E or one social security number. And we’re not doing fraud here. They should go catch those guys. That’s not gonna change anything.

Tell me a law that stopped some type of crime from occurring, right? Yeah. It’s gonna happen. You wanna commit fraud? You’re gonna do it. so side note here years ago, this makes it harder for all of us. It does. The IRS came in to audit our company because they wanted transparency cuz we set up entities in Wyoming.

Or at that time we did a lot in Nevada and they said, we want a list of all your clients, which they can force you to provide. They do it all the time to companies. And we said why do you need this list? We said, we wanna know who’s behind all these companies. He said, you already know that.

He said, no, we don’t. We said, every time we set up a company, we obtain an EIN and we provide you the member, the owner of that company and their social security number. Who’s behind every single company that’s set up. That’s how we acquire the EIN. We don’t acquire ’em under our own names and this is what they told us.

You may do that, but we have no way in our system of matching that information up. I said, are you kidding me? That’s a basic computer system. You can’t run that. I said, now our system can’t handle that. And so that’s why we need to ask you for the information . So it just shows you how antiquated they are and the way they approach things.

And so even if they collect this information, it’s not gonna do ’em any good. It’s basically whether we didn’t keep our records straight or we didn’t, it’s too much money to revamp for a computer. Let’s just bother everybody again. That’s exactly right. Thanks for coming on Clint. Again, folks, we’ll put this in the tax section at the webpage at simplepassivecashflow.com/tax.

We’ve hit Clint on there and passed the webinar. So those are all up and there too. But remember, a lot of this stuff is personal. This is just a podcast made for entertainment, but hopefully we’ve created some questions in your guys head to ask more probing questions and again, join the investment club simplepassivecashflow.com/club. We’ll get on the phone there or get on a zoom call and we’ll see you guys next time. Thanks Lane.

Investing in YouTube Channels

On today’s podcast, we’re gonna be talking about investing in crazy digital assets or digital companies that happen to invest in YouTube channels. YouTube channels are a form of the big three in terms of the digital world, eCommerce, SAAS, businesses, and content websites, simple passive cash flow is a content website, except I’m not looking to put out some crazy NTF thing to lets you all invest in simplepassivecashflow.com.

It is a passion project of mine. It’s been a great way to meet a lot of you folks and build a list of cool people. That came out to Hawaii. Once a year, we are going to be doing that little mini wine tour in Napa valley. Actually, it’s not gonna be mini. It’s probably gonna take us the whole day of visiting several wineries.

We get on the bus, everybody gets to meet each other and make sure you go apply there because these days we vet everybody who comes. You’re a weirdo. You don’t get to come. And how do we figure out you’re a weirdo? We get to know each other. And we are also a big enough community that a lot of people coming in these days are referrals from friends.

So we’ve got a tight knit circle at this point. So no random strangers. And I think our group is the only group out there. Is not just like a fake to you, make it be a general partner one day because you’re broke and you’ve got nothing else going on. You know, Most of our investors, although they are in there, they are younger, maybe in their thirties, forties at the youngest.

And I say that with a lot of respect, a lot of you guys make so much more money than I could ever personally have done in the professional world. And you guys are high performers. Individuals in all your own respects that often we put on these events, I’m very flattered by the people who come.

But the thing that ties us all together is, we are pretty financially minded and we appreciate financial freedom, but we also understand that we need to invest with people we know, like or trust and have a small. Community of other purely passive accredited investors. Not a bunch of people who are looking to get to know us on a loose basis and want us to invest in their first deal because there’s a lot of fake team make groups like that.

Trust me, been there, done that and also got the t-shirt and lost some money doing it. There are a lot of those types of organizations out there, but we are not one of ’em. We are an exclusive passive investor group. So if you’re looking to grow your net worth from one to 10 million, number one, check out our family office, Oana mastermind, but just, check us out.

We usually let people come to an event at least one time. Check out our community. And then see what it’s all about because personally, I didn’t really start to get outta my shell until 2015 and 16 when I started to realize, wow, there’s a lot that could be gained from, master mining informally with other investors.

And then when I started to join different other higher level groups, of course you have to pay a lot of money for that. And that’s what I did, but there’s really nothing out there for the purely passive accredited investor. Which is what I sought to create with simplepassivecashflow.com. Hopefully you guys can join us on October 1st in Napa valley. Simplepassivecashflow.com/napa is the info page for that.

And here we are talking about YouTube channels, but Hey, let’s make one thing clear folks, just because we have somebody on the podcast doesn’t mean that I’m saying to invest with. Actually I am saying the opposite. If we have somebody on the podcast or you see anybody on any podcast do not invest with them.

Podcasts are a great way to create that sort of fake type of influencer, all that content type of stuff to conjure up, fake amount of followers. That’s just how the Al coin. World is created in all these discord channels out there. To me, the only way you can really figure out if something is legit is to know another purely passive accredited investor, get to know them organically and build a true deep connection and see where they put their money and have had a good experience with it. And I’ll tell you guys, anybody can do a podcast. It just takes a certain character, these days to do it. Thanks for listening again, guys and enjoy the show.

Hey simple passive cashflow listeners today. We’re going to be talking about a different kind of investment that I’ve been looking at in this realm of buying, not hard assets, real estate, but working businesses, no family offices, they don’t invest in all this equity stocks, mutual funds types of stuff.

That’s a very small minority portion of their portfolio when reality. No it’s businesses or a huge part is real estate. Someone even says at least 50% of their high net worth portfolios. Now not saying that you guys should do this, or just show us any sort of investment advice. You’ve got to be silly to think that you can listen to a bunch of podcasts and get a bunch of financial advice and even further.

You’ve got to be even more silly. Or if you think that you can just go on a podcast, land, figure out who a bunch of operators are and start investing with them. Do not do that guys, unless you would like to win the financial Darwinism award of the year. All we’re going to do today is talk about a little bit of a different opportunity.

I’m not investing in it personally. But again, I just want to expand people’s thinking, right? Because when you expand people’s thoughts to other things that you didn’t think were investible or in the arts world, you start to do private money lending, or, you go into a multi family deal or you buy a rental property, by expanding yourself, going a little bit past your comfort zone. You get past that block where you were originally. And a lot of you guys, just quite frankly, by some rentals or get into. Or move from 90% into equity stocks, mutual funds and get maybe 10, 20% into being outside.

I want to introduce Michael call-up who works for an eCommerce content website? That produces YouTube videos. And you guys watch a lot of YouTube videos out there, but it’s pretty profitable for those folks out there that get a lot of views and you can turn it into a business with Michael and his partner.

But we’ll start off at the top, right? Because I think most people here are pretty familiar with investing in alternatives, such as real estate. And that, that one line they’re just crazy real estate as alternative investments, wherever they go wrong or get to the macular. But let’s get into something I’ve been interested in personally over the last few years, as someone who runs simple passive cash flow in a content website, where I create a bunch of content.

And it creates relationships with people and then I’m able to do the masterminds. We do the events, we do, all kinds of things under this umbrella of simple passive cashflow. But Michael, why don’t you just give us a quick outline of different businesses within the internet space.

It’s funny you say it’s good going back 20 years ago, I owned a cleaning company, and so I bought it. I had worked on wall street for 10 years. Got burnt out, and had my first kid quit. Didn’t know what I was going to do. Ended up buying a franchise. It was a cleaning franchise and I got really bored with it.

And 2007. So I got into the online space and started my first, what is now today called drop shipping. It wasn’t really a thing back then. But I would cold call. Like companies like Hoover vacuums and stuff like that. And the microphone I’m speaking into, I used to sell this online and we would drop ship it directly from the manufacturer.

And the online space, as we all know has shifts, escalated tremendously and particularly with COVID. You mentioned YouTube before we saw a huge spike and people now that they’re homework sitting there online watching YouTube. And I was pretty active with my e-commerce company, which I sold in 2013.

And then also started investing in software company SAS at that time. So I had a Twitter automation tool that we had 10,000 users with. And that was great because it was recurring income. And so somebody just signs up for a piece of software. If you build. That software can run itself.

And then we had individuals in the Philippines and Morocco that handled the customer service for the customer. So that was a tremendous investment for us because that was just consistent money coming in $50 a month. But each of those customers until Twitter suspended our API which is always a risk in any type of a software business.

And I went from 10,001 at night to zero the next morning, zero. Which was like an, oh no moment, but, throughout that time, one thing I’ve always done is use content to brand myself because that’s great. And I’ve always been fascinated with YouTube, met this individual. His name is Saad and he was working for you, familiar with what family offices are.

It’s a little bit. We run the family office, Ohana mastermind. A hundred million dollar families and above are defined as family offices. But what do you do when you’re going from one to a hundred? That’s the kind of group that we have. It’s more of a coaching format. People want to get more involved with that. Join our inner circle, simple passive cashflow.com/journey.

So you’re very familiar with it. So what side was doing is for that family office, he was actually doing this on YouTube. So creating content, it was all what’s called faceless videos. So maybe, like somebody famous, Evan Carmichael Evan Carmichael, a lot of his videos online to all faces. So I, the motivational ones. 10 quotes from Steve jobs, right? And people love specialties. I can engage the entrepreneurial world with that type of content, and it can get a million to three, 10 million views.

And so what’s great is obviously, as we both know on YouTube, once you have been approved by YouTube to be monetized, which means you have a thousand subscribers and 4,000 watch hours. Every time somebody watches that video, it’s like owning a piece of real estate where you’re getting passive income from rent, or you’re getting paid passive income every time somebody watches that video.

The definition of faceless videos for the folks, it’s one of those really dry, boring videos where you get the, sometimes it’s a bit of an animated narrator, but it can be very boring. The copywriter, whose text is typically good, it’s not like a YouTube influencer, if you guys like YouTube, go to my rich uncle’s channel. We try to make it more for the kids out there where it’s more personable and it’s easier to listen.

Whereas if somebody just reads something to me, I just drown out personally. But the cool thing is you can turn and burn these things and you can, Shern this stuff out with very bold, cheap labor. Cheaper content writers to turn the stuff and you can turn it into a machine it’s repeatable. You don’t need to get lucky, like with an internet influence.

Not at all. You just have to be very good with SEO and understanding what people are searching for online, what they’re interested in, and then very good with, from the SEO standpoint ranking the video. So it gets seen because there is a ton of content out there. And so some folks might always say, Yeah, I know content creators and their stuff never gets seen. It could be that they don’t understand SEO. So before we dive into content, we’ll back up, we talked about SAAS. So SAAS, as you build a little web app or application. I don’t know what are some things that are common that people think of.

So if you, on social media you most likely use some type of social sharing tool, right? Like a Weber. These are, they’re not entrepreneurs, so they’re not using sweets or things. Like a lot of the web apps that entrepreneurs will use, but. MailChimp looked at MailChimp today. MailChimp is a SAAS company. MailChimp was just purchased this morning by Intuit for over, I think it’s $12 billion and that’s a privately owned company, but that’s a piece of software right at the end of the day. All right, man is a more consumer one. Correct me if I’m wrong, but like the way I look at SAAS businesses, the cool thing is recurring revenue, but.

You create a product, but then now you’ve got to go sell it. So it’s more of a sales and biz-dev type of yeah. Yeah. And so that’s SAS. Then the other third one is e-commerce. Which you mentioned you started with now, this is something every guy under the age of 35 years old thinks that they can run an ecommerce business, but you guys are 20 years too late.

Maybe if you can list off the brews in this space and we say, it’s probably not good to spend $2,000- 5,000 for stuff like that and I would tell everybody to be very careful when looking at that online, like a lot of folks are Bellflower, I believe is the name. We’ll say, oh, we can start you through Shopify and online drop shipping business.

Nothing to do, just, invest $5,000 in this program or what have you. The reality is everybody else is selling that same product that is listed on a site across. And so it’s a race to the bottom, right? There’s no branding. You’re not going to be able to compete and there’s so many people, I waste so much money on those. And the only people where he makes the money are the ones who are selling courses. On how to do this and a lot of them have never even done it themselves. They watched a program and then they just came on. Like I’ve literally got into that drop shipping was not a word like back then.

I didn’t even know that I was drop-shipping. I used to go to conferences and literally go from booth to booth, just introduce myself, say, Hey, do you sell online? And they would be like, now, we haven’t cracked that yet. We sell online and would love the opportunity to have a conversation and just, I would assign on it eventually three years later, I was selling 200,000 products and then all of a sudden drop shipping became a thing.

So it’s crazy. I forgot the name of the Dan Martell site. He’s a big guy in software but I’m listed on it. And I had done a lot of poaching on drop shipping back in like 2015, 2018 frame. I still get so many calls from it, from people that have bought these courses. And aren’t anywhere from it because they thought it was so easy and everybody just said, Hey, it’s a passive investment.

It’s not, it takes a lot of work. You have to be good at Facebook ads. You’ve got to be good at SEO. It’s more than people think. And you’re competing with people that are like the general masses and it’s high competition and people that live in their mother’s basement. That’s all hours of the day. You think you can work a six-figure job.

Do this on your side type. You’re incredibly mistaken. That’s, you’re not a professional by the true technical sense of the word. You’re not a full-time person doing this type of stuff. And maybe what are some of the other things they tell you to do in this industry? Like they tell you to send them those cards with your product, say, Hey, we’ll send you another one.

If you just give us a good review, or we’ll bake, we’ll pay you guys 50 bucks. Or they’ll find influencers on spark, Toro, whatever, and they’ll pay them to shoulder their ad or they’ll just straight pay them for review. They’re just, although they tell people they can become an influencer today, and what’s funny is like so many of them have been called out online because they go out and they buy fake subscribers and then, they’re charging people to be an influencer again, another passive investor. But it’s very not because they’ve called out eventually they burned their account and then they got to start another one.

Yeah. It’s like when you have a really ugly kid and that they’re ugly. And then they, the modeling company comes and says, oh, we can make them famous. You just have to pay $300 for this total package. Yeah, I got a, I got to say my daughter’s gorgeous. But I fell for one of those. I didn’t fall for it. They got her on Instagram and said, oh, come on. And the next thing you know, we went in, there was a modeling runway, and then dad’s in the back saying, did you love watching your daughter on this one way?

And I was like, yeah, this was awesome. They’re like, listen. She’s got potential. And for this, you can I think it was $3,500 for a two month program Dyke. We can get her amazing gigs. And if you want to do this, which was a $5,000 program and it was just bam, LACO, yadda, and fall for it. But I know friends of mine who have actually paid for it.

And then they say like at the end of the two months, they’re trying to upsell them another program. It’s just it’s me, again, as a parent, I can’t stand Pam, people like that. So that’s like the e-commerce world, right? You’re buying and selling. The people who are doing it right there, they’re flying their butts over China or wherever at the manufacturer, building those relationships.

And 100% you have to I’ve had stopped. And so I did a lot with I was doing this thing that was called an H2O mop and, I bought a half a container sold out of it. I thought it was amazing. I bought a full container. It was a six figure investment while it was being shipped here to the yes to the U S in Edison, New Jersey.

I got served a cease and desist from an individual by his name of Kevin. What’s what’s his name? Harrington. Remember, but not herring, but he is a, this guy is a shark tank guy. What is his name during the blank, but anyway, he’s from as seen on TV. And so the mops that I was buying. At night in this plant in China, apparently they would swap and use the same molding, but then use different boxing.

And so he basically reverse engineered find everybody that found everybody that was purchasing them and dropping drop shipping them, serve them with a cease and desist. So I was stuck with this whole container and almost lost a hundred thousand. Luckily I came up with a clever way to get rid of all them all, but I was like, I am never doing this again.

And that’s, if I fly my butt, like you said, over to China to work with somebody. So that’s the e-commerce, we’re all it’s like one of those things where it’s if it’s too good to be true, it probably is you don’t have to have any inventory. The people that do this right. To fly their butts over the China, and they have the big warehouse here at the states, the house, all these multiple schools, like thousands of schools or products.

Yeah. But so we’ll talk, we’ll stop talking about e-commerce cause that’s something and it’s. We’ve we mentioned SAS, we’ll get off SAS, which is that subscription type of web app. And we’ll now diving more into the third, which I’m both familiar with the content, and the content can be a kind of a a faceless video.

Some of you guys are aware of like, whenever you Google something, there’s some like more like HubSpot and like different kind of aggregator kind of website. Visit Hawaii, or, where people will they’ll create that buzz, that domain authority, and then other websites, or, or people who want to buy ad space will pay under.

And this is how the internet works. But it’s more, what I like about it is being an investor. I like to throw thing I’m more low, always. Long-term I like to do things. A minimal to semi hard work, but they offer the returns far in the future and it’s guaranteed. You just have to wait.

It’s real estate deals or planting vegetables in the garden. You do enough content and you, as you stay consistent and you’re halfway decent, you might get somewhere in the future. Do you guys talk a lot about the author of rich dad? Poor dad. Which I not see. Cause he’s just a, he just an influencer, right?

That’s all he said. That’s why I, you bring up like, he, he is big with content. He’s a content, that’s where he makes a lot of his money is the content side. And when you mentioned YouTube before he’s got a ton of faceless channels. Not only is he, an investor in real estate, but he’s a very big investor into content.

And in fact, I don’t know if people realize, but like he does a pretty good job. He’s a chameleon, right? He’ll use that book, which is jamming. That’s a good book, right? Like I wish I had that book, but he’ll use it and he’ll do it to different things. I think we all see from the real estate end, he’s also pushing it to a bunch of young kids doing SEO.

E-commerce stuff that you have to own your own business. I see it as the lead magnet for essential oils companies. There are all these little vomit paws, but that’s the thing. Yeah. Tony Robbins, he’s a big one too, right? Like he has so many different like ways he monetizes this influence.

He’s got like the fight. He affiliates with financial planners. He just dumped his last guy. I forget the new guy. He works with, at JVs with, but he’s got all these like health type of products. This, it’s brilliant, When you, as the consumer kind of understand this little game that’s being played.

You start to realize that Santa Claus is not real and Easter. Bunny’s not real. Yeah, I’ll stop now. It’s it is a game, but I, I can say again, I’m 49. I’ve owned a lot of different businesses and have just been involved in a lot of things. And you think the grass is always different until you’ve already get in and you learn the way that it’s being operated and that it is a game and that it does take work at the end of the day.

And it, it takes. What is the same, like luck and opportunity is just, you need luck, but you also need to put yourself in the right position to be in that red spot. But you also needs, you also need luck. So I think a lot of people listening are very familiar with financial blogs, the financial, the PF blogosphere.

So I’ve been always into this space as a consumer reading content. I don’t really these days because they’re just a bunch of broke guys who don’t buy any caught $4, $5, lots of. And they don’t like to go into debt, but I went to fin con one year, which is the, just, I think it was in Florida several years back.

Yeah. There’s like 10,000. He’s a MC a certain level of bank at 10,000 financial blogs slash podcasts.

They did. And so it’s going on in this month and Austin. So in September I believe, and so I’m not going this year. I go more to network and just meet that top 10% because it’s all about partnerships and collaboration. But to your point, a majority of them are just, BS and they’re just copying each other’s content and they have no idea what they’re talking about, which is scary.

Like taking financial advice from. Not that 21 year old can’t understand it, but that they have no battle wounds. And they’re just preaching what they’ve read in a book. I don’t agree with that, especially when it comes to money. Yeah. Some of them are really good and the, to me, I got to have lunch with a lot of them and a lot of them have like really, they write really good stuff.

Very interesting pieces, whether I agree with her. But nobody reads it other than themselves. And you can tell. And that’s what I, I look at it as luck, right? As an entrepreneur or a blogger, a YouTuber podcasts, like you can put all this stuff out, you can do a hundred, 200, 300 podcasts, which to me is like the level of commitment you have to put through.

But if it’s not good, you’re not going to have anybody listen to it. But even if it is good, you may not hit success, which is okay. And that’s where your guys’ model comes in. You guys have picked the video platform, which is a good place to start because everybody watches more videos these days.

That’s the uptrend, but you guys aren’t relying on a shining face, a star, right? Because a star is another rare commodity. Now, these are all non-branded for that exact reason. So we’re sticking more to researching a niche before buy. And so is this niche get a lot of interests more from a viral standpoint?

Yeah, I was speaking to somebody earlier that want to do cryptocurrency And but that comes with a lot of risk. Why while there’s roles on YouTube. And so if you make an investment recommendation that video can not be monetized. And so there’ll be monetize possibly that video with, and also that would mark your channel.

If you were to try to get. Yeah, money from YouTube to show an ad on that. And then all of a sudden, somebody marks it as, Hey, they were making a recommendation. Next thing you know, your channels demonetized, and now you’ve lost out. And we’re very strict with what we will. So we like channels we just we’re looking for an investor in a golf.

That’s a lot of fun. There’s so much you could talk about with dolphin. There’s all kinds of people that are searching that each and every day. So we could review the top golf players in the world. show inside their houses and mansions. We have a sports channel and know we have a video on it that just took off.

It was Floyd. Mayweather’s insane. Car collection. Don’t know why people want to see his car. But they think it’s the coolest thing in the world. It got caught up in the algorithm. And within a few days I had a hundred thousand views. And so that kind of thing will die. But if you really get caught off and you’re putting financial capital, meaning like advertising it on YouTube with some money or with Facebook ads, you can get a video that takes off and is getting a million views a month, which is going to bring you in, several thousand dollars a month in income, just from one video.

And so it’s about stacking good quality videos over and over again, not all of them will take off, but for the ones that do it, it becomes a, an ATM in a sense. , let’s take a. Sports. YouTube channel. But you create, what does it cost to start, on your guys’ part? And, is it just, you have a creative director and like a video editor? Is that kind of how it works? We look at, how many videos is somebody want to upload to a channel and I’m on three basis. Once we determine what that is.

And the niche that they’re in, we then have internal tools that we use called an algorithm. That’s looking not only on YouTube, but outside of YouTube, what are people doing online? What are they interested in? In the masses? We don’t want something. That’s just like a thousand views or 10,000 views. We want to see what our a hundred thousand, a million, 10 million people searching for when that shows up on our radar.

And we see that’s doing good on another channel on YouTube. That then is passed off to our content creation team and what our content creation team consists of is it’s going to be somebody that will actually go out and copyright, write out all of, write a script for somebody who’s our voiceover specialist who will then once that video is created by graphic designers and video folks will then final step go through and do the voiceover of that five to 10 minutes.

And then what we do is once that video is uploaded to YouTube, we have an entire secondary team that’s going to go in and then optimize that video from an SEO standpoint to get it to rank. So when you upload a video, most videos, when you upload them to YouTube, They don’t do much. And so what you have to do is you have to go out and start doing one, putting financial capital behind it and advertising it on Facebook and on YouTube and on Google.

Number one, number two, we reach out to people who have emailed that list to see if you can get them to email out that video. Because again, once more people are watching, it does an algorithm and YouTube, and it starts seeing that more people aren’t engaging with the video. It will start showing that video to more people.

Potentially, the last thing that we’d like to do is when you upload a video to YouTube, you tag videos. And so a tag is basically passive income, real estate investing. So you can put a certain number of tags up for every video. It’s very much a character limit. And you want to watch those when you go into the analytics, which is part of our process every morning for every channel.

It is one of these keywords meaning real estate investor. Maybe our video is ranked on the 12th page of YouTube when somebody typed in real estate investing. But all of a sudden it’s on the second page of YouTube. Why is that? Maybe it’s a different keyword. And so now what we do is start optimizing those keywords.

Changing those tags and that can get a video to really take off on YouTube, which is great. And so a lot of YouTubers don’t do that because they just fully don’t understand it. And that’s why you see a lot of channels that start and then stop because they don’t realize they don’t think there’s a lot of work to it.

They just think, oh, create a video. And then my video’s gonna take off, but that’s not the case. It’s already that secondary step that I was explaining that he causes all that and then the thumbnail, then that was a huge thing. And so we’re constantly changing thumbnails to test it out.

You have to. Yeah. So that’s the process of a nutshell. One question I had is, you start with a new channel, right? Do you start with like maybe a bunch of videos just to get it going? Maybe it does a couple of dozen. Piecewise content just to have something there or do you start right off, start off the bat, you start to really sniper and what are the keywords?

Am I going up through a Floyd Mayweather video that kind of went viral? This is if people haven’t caught on yet, like this is what businesses do. They have a business plan and they add value to in this case, it’s not worth anything in the beginning. It’s just an empty YouTube channel.

We need to fill the content. Yeah. But like on the apartments, we try to do the interior upgrades for us because that’s what people will pay extra a hundred, 200 bucks a month for and exterior stuff kind of gets put to the wayside or whenever it’s convenient or especially at the end, it doesn’t really bring dollars in the bank.

So in this virtual value add kind of business, what do you, what’s the first or is it yeah. So we’re going to, the really initial thing that we’re doing with a channel is when people come in and get started with us again, we’re doing all of the work for them. It’s determining how many videos that they’re going to be wanting us to upload on a monthly basis.

Once that’s decided. That’s the number that we’re uploading, but what we’re really doing differently in the beginning is trying to monetize your channel as fast as possible, meaning that we need to get that thousand subscribers and 4,000 watch hours. So we always allocate a certain amount of dollars.

Every time we upload a video to market that video online, but in the initial six months, what we’ll do to get it monetized faster is we’ll put additional cap. Behind a video that we start to see get some action. So is that, that can help us bam, trigger that channel. So if you can trigger a channel in the third month to get it monetized, that’s just, faster income for an investor.

So that’s really what we’re doing in the earlier stages. A little bit of both, right? You’re making maybe a handful of videos and out of one of those that are the better, best out of the box. Yep. They’re terrible at charging it with paid ads. 100% Google, Facebook, YouTube, and we’re watching it much more closely.

Because sometimes we upload videos for four months. They just, they do nothing, maybe 1,005 thousand views, but then all of a sudden within a three-day time period, we just had this happen with another video. It had over a hundred thousand plus. They didn’t do anything to it. It just got caught in the algorithm. And so the more financial capital we as a company put behind those videos that we do start to see move the faster. It is as a return. So that’s what we’re really doing in the first 3, 4, 5, 6 months of a channel. So you got, I got five videos you uploaded, right?

Most of them suck. Just like most videos where they only get maybe a few hundred views or less. And one of them has. A hundred thousand views, which is a lot of views for a new channel. And okay. How much would you throw down on ads like that? Yeah, like two examples. One of those Floyd Mayweather examples we put in.

Zero money behind it because the channel isn’t owned by an investor, Foley B, so we didn’t put any money behind it, which is fine. It got caught in the algorithm because we were changing words, those tags that we were speaking about a little bit earlier now on the flip side, when we do put financial capital behind it, it’s not a lot like our max that we’ll recommend sometimes it’s a couple of thousand bucks.

And then just bam, once that happens. Do we turn on a per video basis is insane. What is, a hundred thousand views is a lot of views. I think more in practical sense that maybe it goes up to. 10,000. Yeah. We have a fashion channel with that gets, 40 million views a month, 40 million views a month.

But why, like you’re familiar with the compound effect. So the compound effect is you gotta remember, like all those videos were uploading and. We do what’s called evergreen videos. So they’ll still be watched in years 2, 3, 4, because people are still interested in that. We don’t want to put something up like space acts.

Space X is taking off today. Like we want to do a video like that for somebody because it’s relevant to today, nobody’s going to be searching. And three years from now, but you know how space X got started, somebody would be searching for that. You want evergreen stuff. So investors out there, this is like some people like unsophisticated investors, they always invest up like the shiny offic thing.

Like when a hurricane comes in hurricane Harvey, they want to go in there and invest in the area or they always invest in gimmicks, right? Like short-term rentals or something like that. And the certain area during certain times, This is no different what’s going on here. So like the near investor is going after oh, space X, the rockets flying up, or the Tesla model, whatever that is leasing this month, or, like with a Ford F-150 the lightning thing, it just came out. You’d make videos about that, but then nobody watches it. And so that’s where a lot of channels go wrong. It’s 100%. We just said they are missing out on the compound effect. They are because like in three years a channel, if you have strategically thought everything out and created evergreen content consistently followed a formula, done good SEO.

Those videos from one month, one, three years ago are still being watched three years later. And now all those other videos month in and month out. So now you’re stacking. So let’s say you have. 300 videos and you’ve done good work over a two year period and going into that third year. A good percentage of this is still being watched, plus your new videos that are being uploaded, right?

So that’s why from an income standpoint, income appreciates and compounds exponentially as a channel stays older and older. But if it’s not evergreen, It’s not going to work. Yeah. And in this business is a doggy dog world. It is not working at a job where everybody gets paid between a hundred and a few hundred thousand dollars for being really good and halfway decent.

One out of a hundred thousand million youTube channels are good. The rest are just horrible and they don’t do anything. And maybe even if they do have the systems, the staff to do every one little step along each side of this workflow, it’s hard.

I love my son. He’s 19 years old. Yeah he just graduated high school and he’s got a YouTube channel about walking. And he’s always coming in and talking to me in my office about why his subscribers fluctuate or his income fluctuates with it. I’m like, let’s look over your last five videos.

So you have great content. People engage with you all the time about the walking dead, but one out of every five videos you’re uploading you start talking about a new game that’s coming. On whatever he plays. I don’t even know, like I’m not a gamer, buy XBox or something like, so when he’s doing that, it’s I’m like all those subscribers, which look your subscribers decreased when you came out with that video, because they’re not interested in that.

So they unsubscribed, whereas I think a lot of YouTubers, they just, they don’t have a philosophy. And if you want it like a business, you run it like a piece of property, right? Like you, you would do with an apartment building and you have processes in place and you follow. But somewhere down the line, like you, your kid just wants to make fun videos that he likes, which is not the point.

If it’s a. At 100%. And I told him that I was like, if you were going to do this, it’s, you’re not going to college. And his goal is in four years to be making a couple of hundred thousand from his personal channel that he wants to do, then here’s what you gotta do. Cause then he says to me, he’s oh it feels like a business.

What do you want to do then? Yeah, we want a business, you run it like a business. And yeah, now it’s a, and I think that’s where ego comes into play with just a lot of people of any type on the blogs. You see it, and they just never monetize. But I have a good friend that does this in the blogging world.

And so he makes good money for folks. He’s got several different blogs that are managed now that’s harder in my opinion. Because it’s actual content and you’ve got all this AI that’s coming out and writing content that I think you could tell that a robot’s been writing it.

There’s a difference from that standpoint, but yeah, if you understand the content game, it’s a great option. And some insights for the folks, like all the blog articles these days, guys, not the pop, your bubble, but they’re all written by AI. I know what I don’t, I use some of them for the headers and it grabs my research for me, but I can take, I could take it another level, but it just would waste my time or waste the staff’s time in my opinion.

But like you can write, have them write the whole thing out, T3 it’s new technology and it just keeps getting better and better. And it’s all like it’s written by. And this is why you don’t want to do a blog. That’s why, because the robots can do it now. And it’s just minding the waters for the most part.

So let’s go back. Maybe if you can give people some sense, because I want to have some people get excited about this stuff a little bit. So that’s like Mayweather, right? Outlier of course. You got a hundred thousand views without juicing it. That would make what, like 20 bucks a day or.

How much. So every channel is always different. So for instance, YouTube, right now, we’ll pay more for gaming channels. Then they would for celebrity channels. So we have a lot of celebrity channels, celebrity gossip, very popular. But gaming, although, you would think gaming’s huge.

They don’t have enough content yet for the search volume. That’s coming in on YouTube to watch a game. So they’ll pay the same viewership, four X, the amount per view. In gaming now that will change at one point. And it is just so most of the folks, like from an investment standpoint, when they invest, they also want to enjoy the channel.

And so some of them like to share it with their friends and family and what have you, and say that they own this and that’s super cold too. And when you have a video that takes off and an algorithm and it gets a million views, you’ll make $10,000 off. Yeah. So a hundred thousand dollar view video would be like, a hundred bucks, two bucks a day.

Okay. And that will start escalating and then it will also decrease and that in every video. So it just depends. How long has it stayed in the algorithm? When do you take your foot off the gas of putting more fuel behind it? And when do you have to start accelerating? Cause you want it to stay as high.

Also it’s. Can you link for words, like by itself, again, for you with a Mayweather, can you link for just that? So Floyd Mayweather’s house, Floyd Mayweather’s income. Okay. But if you could rank for just the word Floyd Mayweather, how many people are going in and typing injustice. The masses type in that versus what’s called long, long tail.

So we start off trying to rank for the long tail keyword, ultimately trying to come in to a big thing, like passive investing, if we could rank for that, like you yourself, like that’s really big versus in the beginning you got to go long tail. Yeah. So it’s not like for those guys or, trying to find similarities and art assets.

Real estate goes off forever. In fact, the return has go infinite after a certain point, but like the videos here, Floyd Mayweather, he’s not going to be alive for. You could think about an oil rig, people invest in oil and gas or ATM machine. It’s just a decaying asset after a while.

It’s not going to be worth Jack and it’s not going to perform at cashflow after a while. So that’s how you think of it. I need to see as you’re trying to correct. That’s why you have to be putting content up all the time. I see it with people all the time. Somebody bought one of our investor channels for a lot of money and they stopped uploading videos because I had all these say stop for three.

And then I was wondering why like the income was dropping so fast and it was dropping because YouTube rewards people who keep producing content. And that’s one thing too, if you keep producing content, but the quality of the content drops, that’s another thing where the channel will just start dropping very fast.

So it does a lot of work that happens behind the scenes. That folks just don’t understand. But if you understand what happens and you fight. It’s very consistent. It’s predictable. So here’s a hard question to answer, but if you can give just a broad answer. So my flight may weather video.

It’s not mine, but if I, if somebody had it right, that makes a hundred bucks a day, which isn’t much, but it’s showing signs of light. If I turbocharged that thing with, when you say a couple grand of ads, what would the views go up to? Yeah. So 10 million views, they will go exponential a hundred X or is it a thousand?

You could go 10 X you don’t like it. It’s unpredictable from that. So we know we won’t make an investment of one last. We know we’ll make the money back minimum, but obviously the goal is we’re shooting for, can we invest the least amount? To get the most amount of views. Can this video take off and get a different topic?

Basketball. We had a basketball channel and this isn’t very often back. Let’s go back to Floyd Mayweather. So if I put in Joplin a couple grand instead of a hundred dollars a day, what does that go up to? Like a thousand dollars a day could go to 10,000 hours? Yeah. I’m recouping my investment. In that one ad once I found that a winner 100% target that ad you could be.

So how do you get people? What is the $2,000 going towards exactly like what’s the creative that gets people to click on your flatbed weather ad? Or is it just some algorithm that you pay to get in the algorithm to get to the next video or something like that? How would we invest the money internally?

You say for that owner, what does $2,000 to push light men? Weather’s video? What is, but how do you do that? What are we doing? So we’re reaching out to the number. One thing we’re doing is reaching out to other channel owners and cross collaborating with them. Yeah, because CFL promotes our video on their channel and gets a shout out for it.

With a call to action that’s number one, two email lists are huge. So before we’re doing Facebook ads or YouTube ads themselves, definitely outreach is the number one thing. Yeah. So this is, I put this in the category and pay the butts with equity. You can make a lot of money by buying rent, rehab, and repair.

There’s also a lot of risks, but in this case, it’s not really a risk other than just losing gear, your buddy and paying an influencer a hundred bucks and they don’t share, or they share your video, but nobody watches it. It’s a numbers game. It’s reaching out to as many. And that’s why, we’ve had YouTubers themselves.

Come to us to manage the channels because they just, they don’t want, they know what the work is. And so we have a system in place. We follow it. It’s not for everybody. There’s a lot of work. That’s why we’re not afraid. Like we have, it’s an investor manual. I don’t even know 300 pages I think, or 200 and change.

We share everything that we do. I don’t care if somebody can go and take it and try to do it themselves, they’ll realize after a while, it’s hard. You have to be very good, partly right. YouTube changes all the time. And so if you’re not staying up with YouTube rules and what you’re allowed to, one of our biggest investments in.

Is copyright issues. W we’re very careful with that because if you get strikes against your channel the music that you play in the background of a video if you’re using something that’s copyrighted, or if you’re using the actual editing so if I’m using Floyd Mayweather, but I’m showing 12 seconds versus nine seconds of that actual clip, that channel could be flagged for awhile.

And you don’t want that. Cause if you have too many. You eventually lose out from the opportunity of making a return on your investment and we don’t want that. So that’s where we invest internally. A lot is staying up to date with what are those rules? What do we have to do when we’re uploading content?

Because we want to protect. And that’s also why we don’t share a lot of the channels that other investors have, because then you can have competitors going out there and trying to do something to mess with the channel. And we don’t want to do that either. So we leave that up to the investor. If they want to share their channel.

Like I have a family, I think I shared it before. Yeah, I love golf. And they think it’s very cool. They want to share that with their friends, their family. Great. Other than that’s up to them. Yeah. I think what this really comes down to is magnified as if you’re, let’s say you are an e-commerce person, right?

You sell weighted blankets or you sell kitchen chairs. You buy a channel that’s in there, you push your product through it, or it’s funny, you said I just spoke to a big angel investor before I was joining you. And that’s what he’s looking for is he wants to start an entrepreneurial channel.

That’s just going to be like, 10 fun facts about Steve jobs, 10 things that you didn’t know about Elon Musk and his goal is that, to get it to one of those channels that are getting 10 million views on. And then halfway through the video, we’re going to interject an ad. So it will look like it’s coming from YouTube, but we’ll stop our 10 things about has.

And interject and add about, Hey, are you a startup? And if you are, and you’re looking for, financial capital, what have you click down below and come and watch this free 30 minute webinar. And then it will come back into our video that we’re creating. So our content team will always be, just inserting that ad of his, in the middle of our content.

Now that will affect the channel when we go to salvage channel, if you ever wanted to sell it in the future, It’s somebody else’s business advertised in the middle of the video and we can’t change that ever. So that’s the flip side. He doesn’t care about that, but we always make people aware of that.

So that’s what family offices play around, where they buy good businesses that supplement each other that are in the same industry when you are there, they magnify the businesses, others most people here, if you’re. $10 million and above. You’re not listening to many podcasts. Your most people listed are somewhere between one and 10.

Maybe, probably not to that stage, but I think it’s interesting to get insights of how wealthy families do this type of stuff. And it, to me, makes so much sense, but you need a lot of money to pull off fullest, pull this star strategy off. Definitely. Sod, who’s my business partner.

He’s been, that’s how he started. I was doing this for a family office back in 2006. And they were investing over seven figures into this, but they saw the opportunity. They understood. It’s like owning a billboard. Yeah. I don’t know if you’ve ever had anybody on your show about billboards.

But there’s a lot of money in that. And that’s what this story is. This is an advertisement in the middle of interesting content. A billboard is just, a popular road you’re driving down and you see this billboard that billboard owner is making. And, if you look at how family offices have made their money, initially, how they got wealthy as they concentrated one thing, they were an operator of some business and then they diversified into half real estate.

I think that’s the safer way of going to build your wealth over a long period of time. But yeah. You also look at the people. I think Forbes did a study of the fortune 40 or 400, right? The people that were there, that they did a study of the people that left it.

And the reason why they left is because they were too much concentrated area. So what got them there, what was also knocked them off the horse. So it’s a prudent advice is to concentrate in the beginning, whether for a lot of people listening, the way you guys are going to get rich as investing in value.

But, this is 10%. What we do is only 10% of somebody. It shouldn’t be more than 10% in my opinion. I’m a big fan of Charlie Munger. If you haven’t read the book, read old Charlie’s Almanac, it’s like this big it’s phenomenal. But it’s a great book and that’s Charlie Munger. Who’s Warren Buffet’s partner.

That’s the investment philosophy, right? It’s boring. But it’s what makes money consistently over time. And then you can take 10% and try different. But trouble is on YouTube and podcast land. And some of the guys listening are broke, they’re under a million dollars net worth at some of the advice that they say does not apply.

And then you got guys like Kiyosaki spoon off a bunch of random stuff to different chat, different things at different channels, different audiences. And it’s even making it more confusing. Is he saying. Diversification is radiates or something like that. Like it’s just so much noise out there.

It makes it a little difficult. Yeah. And I don’t understand that also. Yeah. I get one folks are like bashing also, you hear with, real estate or whatever, like it’s that? I don’t think so. It’s not going anywhere. I’ve got an investment property. I would never sell it. I’m not going to so yeah, no I’m with it.

That one always gets clicks. The real estate market is it’s going to crash, right? Yeah, what it is. That’s how a company like Buzzfeed has become who they are. It’s this, a very good copywriter makes a ton of money because that’s what they’re doing. I don’t know if you’ve ever heard of our girl financially.

They’re very big in the finance space for newsletters that you can subscribe to for 2000 to $5,000 a newsletter. And that’s all, when you lead through all of that The headlines for the newsletters. It’s all clickbait. That’s very much what it is. Some of the writers are very good.

Don’t get me wrong, and that’s what you’re paying for. They got to get attention in a noisy world learning brew. A great example of a SAS business. That’s just mentioned morning, BU and who’s that that just sold the hustle they do sold to HubSpot and that was brilliant.

This morning, again, MailChimp was purchased. You’ve got the hustle that was bought by HubSpot for 30 million hours. They wanted the audience and it just made sense to TopSpot and it’s a content company. That’s what the hustle was.

And that’s it for the show again, the disclaimer is, do your own due diligence. And people always ask me, Hey, have you heard of this guy? Have you invested with this guy?” Guys? I don’t do that anymore. I’m not giving out any financial advice. If you guys want to get in the inner circle, join the family office ohana mastermind, we’ve got over 70, 80 people in there.

You have to pay to play, sometimes we’ll do events where you guys can interact with some of the live accredited investors within our community, but due to some people finding out about us, if people have found a great place to pull off very trusting investors in our group.

So we’ve had to close the walls, helped Japan in the 19 hundreds. You guys want to join that, go to simple passive cashflow.com/journey. Or if you don’t just throw down your money everywhere and hopefully you don’t blow your leg off, stepping on a landmine. All right. So you guys bye.

September 2022 Monthly Market Update

What’s up folks. This is the September, 2022 monthly market update where I go through a bunch of news headlines that I feel really impacts how investors should be thinking. Welcome everybody. This is the monthly market update. Here we go. Now I’ve gotta warn you guys that this is going to be a pretty beefy presentation today.

I went a little bit crazy with the amount of articles. I think a lot of people have been really attuned to what’s been going on with all this talk about recession, Ukraine and supply chain in China. But I would say if you don’t know what to do with your money and it’s sitting in some kind of 401k with some financial planner or Vanguard or fidelity or some kind of retail investment option, I would say pick up my book.

The journey, the simple passive cash flow. I think we’re up to almost a hundred reviews now. But here we go. And if not, if you guys like podcasts, check out our podcast, simple passive cash flow, passive real estate investing. We also put this up on the podcast too. And for those of you guys who are listening on the podcast right now we also have all the slides that we’re gonna be going over today on simple passive cash flow.com/investor letter, where if those of you guys joining us live, thank you for doing so.

If you have any questions or comments, as it comes up, feel free to drop into a comment below. It somehow magically fed me. And I do give you guys a shout out as we do this live, but here we go. Indicators for a recession. There’s some flowing data. This is a pretty cool article or it’s actually not really an article, it’s just pictures, but they graph eight different types of supposedly indicators for recession.

And in case you’re wondering the 2020 recession, which it technically was since the country was shut down that was a recession, but they’re showing like what’s been going on this last six months before and downturn six months after, and you can take a look at some of these, percent change in non-farm employees, employment level.

Unemployment is at an all time low right now. Industrial production is very high. GDP increases higher personal consumption, GDP product, personal income except manufacturing. But the other three, I mentioned they are. Comparing pretty well, that really begs the question or really in a recession.

Are we just gleaning what the headlines are saying? As I said earlier, unemployment is at about 3.5%, which is very low. And to some people who believe in healthy economics, they believe that unemployment should go up and down a little bit within the ranges of five to 10%. Maybe not 10%, but maybe five to 8%.

But certainly right now at 3.5%, we are very low and this is pretty evident in, people are getting paid, are able to go around and negotiate higher salaries. And this is humbled with the inflation data, which is inflation really higher than what it really is.

Right now it’s put out there at 9.1%, but when it’s been said that they remove the energy costs and some of the food costs and some of these other things, is inflation really higher than it really is, which I would probably argue that it is, it’s probably more like 10 to 15%.

And why does that really matter? If you have your money sitting in some kind of investment account or worse in cash holding onto the sidelines, I would say that’s the worst option you could be doing? GDP growth from b.gov, real GDP decreased at an annual rate of 0.6% in the second quarter of 2022.

Following a 1.6% increase in the first quarter, the second quarter decrease was revised up 0.3% point from the advance estimate released in July, the smaller decrease in the second quarter, compared to the first quarter primary reflected an upper turn in exports and a smaller decrease in federal spending. So Novo grad, a website that I follow for different tax information.

They’ll release semi commentary on, like solar and, taxes in general, but they had an article on there talking about Biden science, inflation reduction act into the law, including renewable energy provisions. It was a 750 billion budget. And a lot of people, especially Republicans were laughing saying like what the heck type of inflation reduction act.

That actually is spending money, it’s counterintuitive, it was a cut down bill from almost like two or three times what it was. So $750 billion of government spending is a fraction of what it was. So from that point of view, it actually is a little bit of inflation helps a little bit, or it helps inflation a little bit.

But the things that were stuffed into this bill were renewal energy production tax credits, and investment tax credit. But who knows how that will work its way through the system, but the government continues to spend more.

But then, I always talk about the fundamentals, there’s all this stuff coming around and news headlines, but what are the fundamentals? And that’s really what I think what attracts a lot of folks to our community is, value investing, whether that’s investing in companies where they produce some kind of economy that people need in good times or bad times, or this is one of the main reasons we invest in residential real estate.

Multi-housing news reports that 4.3 million new apartments are needed by the year 2035. And this new demand research shows that despite economic uncertainty and growth during the pandemic in single family sales and new products such as built to rent, the fundamentals for multi-family remain strong underbuilding largely resulting from the 2008 financial crisis and decline of 4.7 million dollar affordable units. So basically, it’s the lower middle class that are the underserved more immigration. And those immigrants who are on the lower end of the economic spectrum who live in apartments are the ones driving up this demand.

And some 40% of the future demand for apartments will come just from these three states. You guessed it, Texas, Florida, and California, which alone will require 1.5 million units in the next 13 years. Things are happening now. Things can get really good. Things might take a turn for the worst. We don’t know, but in the long term, people need a place to live. Now, the visual capitalists report that these are the salaries needed to buy a home in 50 US cities. And The top 10 are San Jose, San Francisco, San Diego, Los Angeles, Seattle, Boston, New York city, Denver, Austin, Washington, DC.

So these are all the places where the median home prices range from half a million to $1.8 million. And in San Jose, you need a salary of $330,000 to be able to afford an immediate home there all the way down to Washington DC at 110,000. So pretty ridiculous.

As I get more involved in hotel investments, large brands like Hiltons, the Marriots make a lot of money. They make the most money off their timeshares because it’s just a branding in play. So when somebody is making a lot of money off one product line, you as the consumer, in this case, people buying timeshares, those are the worst products to buy. So don’t do that.

If you guys like this video and you wanna make up for that person, please like it or share it with your friends. But continuing on, so flip flop it, the salary needs to buy a home in the bottom 50 US states. Those would be. Pittsburgh, Oklahoma city, Cleveland, Louisville, St. Louis, Detroit, Buffalo, Cincinnati, Memphis, Indianapolis, those salaries range from 42,000 to 53,000.

And those median home prices range from 185,000 to 271,000. Now I think this is where like most of our clients who live in high price areas like California, Hawaii, tech, we have a lot of investors in Texas, but their home prices are pretty low. But some of these other places have a lot of sticker shock.

When you start to see some of these, where one place we invest in like Cleveland, 190, $2,000 for a median home price. Actually we don’t, we invest in too many at these places, but I used to want a home in Indianapolis. 271,000. That this is how a lot of America, in fact, probably the majority of the people in America not invest, but live in these types of homes.

I’ve always said, when you’re buying your little rental property as most non credit investors do, a lot of us are accredited investors these days. When you’re trying to buy that first rental, you’re looking for anywhere from like 80% of the median home price.

So what does that mean? So if you’re looking at $192,000 median home prices in Cleveland, maybe starting around $160,000 is a bad place to stay, to start looking. But I think, a lot of unsophisticated investors when they start off and I was there at one time, you’re starting off to what one of these.

Areas like, your Indianapolis is good and the median home price is $271,000 are there. And I see a lot of people buying houses that are 300,000 and above, and now you’re starting to get more into the B plus a minus type of tenant profile there. And you’re just not gonna get the returns you are.

Although there is a, probably a lot less headache investing that way. So CBR braces for impact of interest rates hike. So there’s no secret that the interest rates pushed up again and it probably will push up maybe another two or three more times. So what this is doing, it’s creating an aftershock into the capital markets, which is, basically the capital Marx is the term.

Where people get their loans from the banks. The Fed increased rates in March with a 25 basis point hike and a 50 basis point hike in may. And the three quarter 0.75 for you, people who understand numbers more than English terms that got raised in July. Now the largest since 1994. And it’ll probably get pushed up a couple more times.

Like I said, now, the goal, the Fed, what they’re doing is they’re raising the Fed’s fund rates to fight inflation. So it’s one of those things where you increase the interest rate to Dow inflation, because what probably happens is that the cost of capital you can’t expand. Businesses can’t buy more factories or infrastructure or, on our end, like our cost of borrowing money to buy assets such as apartments, our ability to go down.

So our ability to pay more goes down. Sure. This also affects the Joe blow random small homeowner, right? Their affordability obviously goes down too, the world doesn’t revolve around the little homeowner, it, the way I see it, if you look at what the businesses are doing. And in this case, the business will not be expanding.

Now at some point, they’re probably gonna change their forecasts. Whether that’s next quarter or next year or years down the line, they may say maybe we shouldn’t make as many widgets or units, whatever their business may be. And also let’s also, now let’s start to maybe not hire as much, not replace attrition or maybe even cut back on hiring.

And that is what the Fed is trying to do. They’re trying to create that behavior to push that or unemployment to creep up right now, like we said, it was 3.5%. It probably needs to be almost double that for, to get to a point where we can get back to a little bit more equilibrium. I follow a guy, Richard Duncan, if you guys are interested in this stuff and really wanna understand it as opposed to just get, screwed around left and right with all these news headlines.

I would go to simplepassivecashflow.com/duncan, and read a, watch a couple of those podcasts there, how everything’s connected now, the problem is like this stuff, isn’t exactly in a vacuum and with the war Ukraine and the China, still a kind of in lockdown, basically pushing up our cheap labor sources.

Now that’s also gumming up how this is all working. And also it’s not like you, you push up the 0.75 points on the rate and the inflation pops up. It’s just not that there’s gonna be slack in the system. And the one good thing going into, the past year, there was a lot of money liquidity in the system.

So it’s gonna take a while for that to drink, which results in a longer slack period. Now obviously the fit is watching this and they’ve probably got the best insiders in the game, or they should make sure that they don’t tip the scales and push us into a hard landing recession. But, I think this is all very natural and it’s one personally, I don’t really wanna see rents go up 10, 20, 30% or 10 or 20%, like how we’ve been seeing it. I think that’s the most sustainable. What I would rather see is just the normal, two to 3% rent increases, which is just normal average, basic inflation.

Because when you’re a business owner, you just wanna do business in normal times as opposed to things going up and down. And that’s what the Fed proposes in my opinion. And I gotta, I have faith that’s what their angle is just to keep the highs, not as high, but the lows not as low and compensate things out to make things a little bit less bipolar.

Pretty much give it a L give the economy a little bit of I don’t know, a drug that is, little more chilled out I guess. Multi-housing news reports, senior housing’s next wave of investment opportunity, like how we were saying, there’s a huge demand and supply shortage for low income housing in apartments. But there’s also a bunch of baby boomers going to be retiring right now, but it’s gonna be a while till they need that senior housing facility.

And nobody knows exactly when that will hit. We’re not there yet, but there’s an obvious need for this in the future. a 45% uptick in construction loans for the first to third quarters of 2021 on the investment sign transactions quickly started to rebound in 2021 and Tate, a 55 year over year increase. Now, I think there’s obviously a silver wave, what they call it, that the baby boomers need these facilities. But I personally really haven’t found reliable operators who could capitalize on this wave. So basically good surf conditions, but coming, but nobody can surf too well, basically.

And, as an investor, unless you’re the one who’s gonna get your hands dirty, take out all the debt and the risk and be the young person who makes the on the general partner side, you’re looking for people who are standout operators that are honest, that do what they say they’re gonna do to help you capitalize on these macroeconomic and microeconomic events.

So Fred Mac expects, the pace of growth is slow in the second half of this year. I think that’s what everybody has known. And I, what I wanted to compare here really is look in 2021, look at that kind of just slack back year from 20. It’s just worked, do it.

And I, and a lot of the industry reports that I read. And if you guys are interested in that send an email to team@simplepassivecashflow.com. We can send you everything that we read or what I read, but, I guess what they’re saying is 2022 will continue to be, as slower growth year 20, 23 is a slower growth year, but 20, 24 is when things are off to the races.

So I think a lot of people may make the mistake of it. All right. I’ll just chill out and do nothing for 2024 and just sit on my butt and have my money lose 9.1% every year with inflation. I guess that is a semi logical idea, but unfortunately I think the way it works is like, once things get moving, you can’t get into these assets for the prices that right now they’re fetching for right now, As the same goes the best time that buy was yesterday and in support to buy under fundamentals, despite what is going on in headlines.

Now, this is a top and bottom 10 metros by gross income growth. The top ones were Jacksonville, Albuquerque, Tampa, West Palm Beach, Orlando, Phoenix, Tucson, Memphis Raleigh, and Fort Lauder. Their annualized growth in income was 12.7% to about 10%. Vacancy rates range from 2.7% up to four, up to five and a half. That’s a normal vacancy rate. I would say some of the bottom metros were Memphis. I don’t wanna talk about Memphis Minneapolis. Washington DC. Lexton Knoxville, Kansas city St. Louis, New Orleans, Columbus, Buffalo, San Jose. Those annualized growth range from 3.1% to 4.8% and their vacancy ranges from 2.7% in Buffalo, all the way up to 8.9% in Washington DC.

The one outlier I see on this list is I thought Knoxville was a little bit better than that, but, maybe that was like Knoxville’s kind of Boise, Idaho, where it had a huge 2001. Maybe it just got a little too overheated and slack back. Not to say it’s bad, anything bad with that market.

But sometimes when you have a breakout year like that, you’re bound to come backwards and it gets lost in these types of arbitrary ranking articles. Joint center for housing studies of the smart people at Harvard university, who makes these really insightful articles. They’re talking about rental deserts perpetuate social economic and racial segregation. Rental deserts are disproportionately located in the suburbs where there are restrictive land use regulations and not in my backyard. I N Y politics can be common. So to highlight that a few of these rental opportunities for households in these neighborhoods, less than 20% of housing units are either occupied by a renter or are vacant for rent. In contrast, I rental errors are at least 80% rentals where a mixture of neighborhoods fall in between the two.

The lack of multi family homes in these neighborhoods is like a significant factor in limiting opportunities for rental households and for lower income renters in particular, single family homes are much more common in rental deserts, which is Unsurprisingly given that single family homes have higher ownership rates than in units in multifamily buildings, kind of obvious stuff.

But it’s kinda interesting. Maybe, if you guys check out the video on this, check out some of these slides at Harvard university put together but moving on Arbor reports at small multifamily investment trends report of 2022 Q2, the they’ve got like a little chart of the action, the volume year over.

The record total represented both a wave of pent up investment in bands that sat on the sign lines during this pandemic. I’m searching for 2020 in anticipation of the monetary Titan. The 2020 ones, the original nation’s total, represented an increase of 5 35 0.6 billion, up 63% from the prior year.

Yeah, I would say, yeah, 2020. We lost half of the year because nobody was really doing business, ourselves included. But as the second half of 2020 went on and 2022 was a big year acquisition wise for ourselves. Key factor that led to an unprecedented search in ordination value volume last year was a wave of refinancing activity ahead of the federal reserve initiating its interest rate hikes. But I think a lot of the mainstream medias, it’s whoa is me, the interest rates, have gone up the last several months to a lot higher levels, everybody in the know, knew it was happening, in 2021 or at least this time of 2021, it really isn’t that surprise to any of us.

Now, how long is it gonna go? That’s the other question? But yeah, refinances and loan originations really took a tail off Q1 of this year.

but, I think the important thing for people who own real estate is rents continue to go up. And in this case, small multi-family asset valuations continue to grow at a robust rate. Best time the buy was yesterday, especially if you cash flow through it cap rates and spreads. Now this is comparing all multifamily with smaller multifamily.

I don’t know exactly what they mean by smaller multifamily. I gotta believe it’s like your 20 units that a hundred units. And then all multifamily is skewing in like larger complexes. Two to 400 units would be the way I would be reading the differential. Usually the smaller multi-families have a little bit of higher cap rate because they’re in less desirable areas which have higher caps and they’re just not as an institutional, they’re a little bit more effort required for those small multi families, but you can see there’s always gonna be a spread between the two, but what’s interesting here is in the year 2020.

Well actually tell end in 19 early 2020, there was like a little pinch where the way I read that is people started to really buy a little more of the smaller multi families. And then there was a little bit of pinch mid 20, 20, but then I think we’re getting back to the normal Delta between N two, how that impacts your regular past investor, who knows, but I don’t know.

I guess I’m interested in this stuff and looking for stuff to do with just sitting on our hands a little bit, waiting for the interest rates or the capital markets. To get on frozen. We actually were gonna sell some of these assets, which the bread was ready to take out the oven, but, unfortunately the buyer market dried up because nobody can really qualify for good lending options.

So it just froze everything and, just, it is what it is. I guess it’s good for people who are in deals and probably frustrating for people who are waiting on the sideline to deploy capital, especially now that they know they’re getting 9.1% of their money every year expense ratios basically like what are you running the assets at?

Normally normal rule of thumb that they always teach you is like 50% expense ratio with apartments. You can run that little bit leaner because it’s more economies a scale, this is showing how assets were performing. 2020 was a lower year than 2021, obviously, because I think like what we did a lot in 2020 is we didn’t have the staff running around.

It was just per appointment. If something broke we wouldn’t get in there and fix it. If it, unless it was absolutely needed because you just wanted to limitate the contact between your staff and your tenants. And it shows how drastically things have changed in two years. Whereas 2021 people are like, all right, fix my stuff.

I don’t care. Wear your mask. I don’t care if you wear your mask, get in there, fix my stuff. So things are went back to normal in 2021. And then, back to where we are in 2022 2020, I see it as a year was everybody was hibernating, like big fat sleeping bears.

And, that’s why the expense ratios were maybe 20% lower what it was in 2021, but all this is in hindsight. And it’s kind, as I looked through this, these big macro industry data, I can give you guys a little bit more insight on what actually drove things.

This is the discussion on loan to value ratios. So in 2020 2019, you had a high amount of debt given out, and this is typical, right? Like things get hot, which happened in, in a 2019. And then there was a, that natural thing called that pandemic happened and it cooled off the market.

And right now we’re in a bad part for capital lending too, where, it’s normally the banks will like to lend at a certain level, but they’ll give exceptions or this is how the commercial markets work. Thinking back on the whole single family home, you, I think what they’ll do is they’ll slowly, people will apply for loans and there may be some exceptions that change.

Something that I can think of is a member several years back, they required like a certain amount of cash reserves, like three months, six months. And at some point they, they loosened up restrictions and, these are the things that kind of play out over the years. For a lot of new investors, this is nowhere near where things were in 2008 where you just needed a heartbeat to get a loan.

Those ninja loans. And I think that’s a big, fundamental difference that it’s just not the same thing in 2008, as it is now. It’s actually hard for like responsible Americans who have a good job. So you even qualify for debt on even little rental properties top 10 metros for multifamily starts.

So this is where they’re building more stuff and you can look at it one or two ways first. So while there’s more supply coming online or which is, could be bad, if you’re there cuz more competition, but it can also be like why are they building more? Why are these smart institutions building more stuff there?

Because the freaking demand is there. So that can be good for you. But that’s Al there’s always kind of two sides. Multiple ways to look at data. Reading up from the top to the bottom New York city, Dallas, Washington, DC, Miami, Austin, Texas, Phoenix, Atlanta, Seattle, Los Angeles, Philadelphia, and you can see the percent changes and the overall total value from number one was New York city area up 20%, total value, 15.3 billion.

And number two, Dallas was 8.1 billion. So half that in New York city it just shows how expensive that real estate is up there. But Dallas went up 72% where New York only went up 20%. Phoenix is another one that people follow a lot of 53% and then total value 4.2 billion. So half that of Dallas and less than a third of New York.

Multi-housing news top 50 multi-family property management firms at 2022. So I just wanted to put this up here because we’ve jumped property management companies and, we started with a midsize small to midsize regional company. And lately we’ve jumped up to that next level of bigger property management companies, the match, better partner not equity partner, but partnership, like they need units and they wanna work with more of an institutional ownership group.

And so we wanna work with a company that is bigger, has more assets under management. One of ’em that we work with is Lincoln down there in Texas, which is number two, they’ve got 210,000 units, little property management companies, mom and paw in the residential world. I think they’re usually between a hundred or few hundred properties, but we’re talking 210,000 units is what Lincoln holds. From what I’ve seen, I’m impressed by a lot of their back office support. And, I think for a lot of us that work for big companies you can see the waste, especially if you work for the government.

There are a lot of things that I’ve seen that a larger property management company they’ll offer the back support. It’s not the they’ll do things and they’ll negotiate better contracts for like materials, or if you’ve gotta like procure, lawn share equipment, they just already have it in their own in-house CA catalog.

Where they’ll support the in the onsite management staff, cuz normally the manage, you would think the management staff is the one buying all this stuff and procuring and searching for the best prices from vendors. The nice thing when you have a larger company is the home office, does it.

And then the people who are boots on the ground at the property can focus on what they’re really there for, which is to help out tenants, customers, support and market.

All right, ya already matrix multi-family market outlook for July, 2022 rent growth, moderates as economy and demand soften remains lofty by historical standards. And I think that’s that kind of summarizes things. Things are slowing down a little bit, but they’re still growing folks. As they say remains lofty by historical a historical standards.

The average us asking rent rose 10, $10 to 1717 in July making the fifth consecutive month of deceleration and the loss increase since January year over year of growth. It’s so growth. Nevertheless Florida markets remain in the lead in rent gains, Orlando, Miami Tampa, San Francisco, Baltimore twin cities posted the lowest rent increases.

The overall trend is attributed to an return to the mean combined with the slowing economy. In addition to the slowing economy, consumer confidence in waning as the federal reserve has kept rising policy rates attempting to slow inflation. Now, again, that’s what I was saying earlier in this this video, but I always like to read it in multiple places.

And I’m sure you guys too, from, other, disruptable sources. Their next takeaways, occupancy remains at 96% for the third consecutive quarter. Now occupancy is, indicators, supply versus demand, and it is the second big thing you look at when you’re looking at the health and wellbeing of your asset.

San Jose, 1.7%, New York, Chicago, and San Francisco, all 1%. Those are your strongest occupancies.

Next, finding supply demand, imbalance sustains growth in the US currently has a shortage of 600,000 units. Another 3.7 million units are needed through 2035 to meet demand. I don’t know if that’s exactly what they said in the article we started out with in the beginning of the video, but still the same narrative, right?

That’s the important thing. The study took into consideration social factors, impacting demands, such as delayed marriage and childbearing, as well as the increased age of first time home buyers. And then the last finding here, single family rentals make the best of interest rate hikes. The asking rent for single family sector growth, 11.2% year over year 21 posted rent growth at 10% with Orlando national Miami in the occupancy degrees by 30 basis.

Point year over year in June, as the rate fell in 24 of the top 35 metros. The one thing I don’t like about when they report on this single family rental. I always question the validity of the data, because it’s so hard to get the data from like little mom and Paul homeowners, which is, who owns most of the little single family home rentals.

And it’s so much more spread in, in the, like in like rents went up. We all know that went up maybe 10% the last couple years across. If you pick any random Metro out there, but depending how sophisticated or how much C you had as a landlord, really determined if you really bump, rents up, Some people were just right on the ball and was able to get a hundred dollars, $150 under a thousand dollars a month.

Some landlords, a lot of these guys who, you know, they’re in, like our Facebook group and they’re just amateur landlords. They’re frozen, solid, they’re freaked out. And they’re like, they’re the ones calling their tenants asking, Hey, can we like pardon you on rent? Like completely doing the opposite, what they should be doing, which is raising rents.

But, I think that’s why single family home rentals are just all over the place due to the amateur status of the operators in that world. So whenever I see data like this, I’m always like questioning a lot. Wealth management.com reports at garden apartments remain favorite among multifamily buyers and garden apartments are, so there’s Highrise apartments, which I think mostly will think of, apartments, big skyscrapers or bigger, more than four or five stories. Those are typically your nicer buildings. But the garden apartments, a lot of these are more geared towards lower middle class families. And that’s what we like to focus in on. They’re typically more in a sub urban type of market and they’re a little bit more reasonable and, it’s, they’re great for pandemic, minded people who, it’s a little more spread out, you’re not on top of, all your tenants sharing, all the limited resources for like common areas and stuff like that.

Arbor reports, rental housing markets, exhibit cyclical, stability complaint contain structural questions. Yeah. So this is showing the implied possibilities of effective federal fund range. Target range by date Arbor is like a lender. So a lot of their articles are more geared towards more sophisticated operators, but I always put these on here. The passive investors we have are pretty smart.

At least you could, it challenges you guys intellectually. I think it least, maybe it challenges myself. So one, one thing that’s happening is declining spending power is having a tangible effect on the ability of consumers to afford data expenses. This is evident by taking fuel. Gasoline costs have gone up for your middle class, lower middle class people out there. Now that is a lot more impactful than the kind of wealthy people who probably don’t really care.

They may complain about it, but it sure isn’t changing people’s behavior. Very much. This is a graph of the relationship between rental vacancy, which is the dark green and the home ownership rate, which is the light green. And you can kinda see home ownership peak in 2020, not 20 2002 to 2006, which is part of the reason why that whole 2008 fiasco cause too many damn people who couldn’t afford houses were buying houses because I don’t, I think that was kind of George Bush’s thing was that they felt like everybody.

Owned their own house. So the home ownership rate went up to 70, 69%. Then in 2014, it fell to, in recent years, the low of 63 2020 was a time where interested were really low and people were able to save some money. So it jumped up to 68% temporarily, but it came back down to baseline, which is tied under 66%, which is about midrange right here, actually.

It’s funny, that spike in 2020, that’s probably, summer of 2020, that was when, a lot of our B plus a minus type of assets. A lot of those tenants who are, a little bit better off tenants, they, they used the opportunity to go buy a house and they moved out.

So we had some temporary vacancy hits during the summer of 2020 when this was actually happening. There I go with my little stories from the apartment world to bring some of this dry charts to life. So here’s another thing RA business online. Their prediction is institutions will own 40% of all single family rentals by the year 2030. I remember it happening in 2008 or 2010. And then what they figured out was it’s really hard for them to operate these single family homes, scattered all around the neighborhood, which is one of the main reasons I focus on apartments, cuz all your stuff is right there and your staff can really focus on a small geographic area.

That’s spending burning up most of their hours, traveling from one place to another. And looking for lost parts without all their stuff being there. But again, recently seeing a lot of institutions coming in, buying big chunks of single family homes and get into these built to rent projects. And it’s the, it’s pro yeah, probably are right.

I probably will agree that more institutions are gonna be gobbling up a bigger percentage of the single family home rental stock. Mom and pot owners still make up most of the single family rentals, but institutions are increasing market share with a heavy concentrate in the Sunbelt. So I don’t think it’s too late if you’re still buying rental properties, just know that the trend is coming.

Sad because maybe in a 50 years, a hundred year in the future, maybe, the doors are always closing and real estate is a nice way for the last, for the average person to become semi wealthy. Get above a few million dollars doing it. This opportunity called you know, being a landlord or a passive investor might be closing up as institutions are able to get more hands on using technology to operate these, semi cumbersome assets, but now use their institutional financing power to, just buy more and more of these things, pushing the small guy out.

We have a bunch of people on our investor group that, geek out on little mainframe computers, these days Amazon is just killing everybody, doing that stuff. You can’t really make it on as your little small mainframe operator.

Across the nation rising rent prices, increase interest rates, limit access to home ownership. I think that’s probably what you’re seeing. Some of the prices stagnant across the country, or maybe decrease a little bit. Certainly I don’t believe in any type of like housing crisis. Goodness gracious. But I guess that does do sell a lot of YouTube views.

Yahoo reports. Blackstone is preparing a record 50 billion vehicle to soup up real estate bargains during the downturn. Here’s how to lock it up in higher yields than the big money. So yeah, like we said, on the last slide, the big institutions are trying to get more and more into the game and this is the them taking up market share from the small mom and Paul, I.

But, I think take a page from these big smart companies like Blackstone. They’re not just sitting on the sideline, they’re in there actively buying stuff. And now they’re doing it a L and N reports and updated run down rent growth, rent growth kind of went up quite a bit. But it’s slowing a little bit stilling. The main factor impacting rank world since the start of last year has been a supply demand imbalance.

It is showing the the monthly Nett absorption and average rent change nationwide still, like big data nationwide, but it does tell the story a little bit. Of course, you always gotta dig into individual markets and more importantly, submarket. I think this is, these are the general trends.

Again, I’d suggest you guys check out the video on the slide, but don’t lose fact of in the last 17 months from March, 2021 to July, 2022 national average effective rent rose by 22%. Normally again, folks it’s supposed to go up like two to 3% every year. So I would say that’s almost like three or four times the average.

Re business online reports to Intel Brookfield to jointly invest 30 billion for the expenses of semiconductor manufacturing plants in Chandler, Arizona. These are the things as an investor you wanna invest in good stories like this, a new supply of good jobs in this case, semiconductors, which is a big deal.

I would check out some of the articles and YouTube videos on semiconductors and Arizona, but it’s exciting. And as an Intel is making a run to reclaim the semiconductor crown from TSMC and get us our independence from Taiwan and China. I. After you asked the question, wonder if the con continuation of interest rate rising will push out ineffective, inexperienced syndicators and operators.

So to answer that question, in my opinion, interest rates don’t really matter, right? Because if you’re already in deals, you’re you’re good, right? You don’t really have to worry about things cuz it’s not like your rate’s gonna really jump up. And if you’re doing any type of value, add strategy, surely in two years or three years, when your note comes due, you’ve created a whole bunch of value.

So it’s really an afterthought. What the interest rates are doing are impacting new in inexperience operators who don’t have much capital behind them because now they have to cough up more funds to close a deal. But I think what’s testing a lot of people, which really didn’t really talk about today in any of these news headlines, is that right now a lot of people are facing the backlash of a lot of the the rent moratoriums on folks.

Where previously in 2020 they froze all the evictions, right? Couldn’t evict people. Basic basically. There were still ways to evict people, but 20, 21, I believe, I might be butchering the timeline, but that was when they said, all right, you guys can, there’s no more moratoriums.

Somehow the CDC got involved with that. People can get evicted now, but it wasn’t, there’s always a slack in this stuff. How is the courts gonna interpret this? And so we really didn’t start to see it come out for six months to a year after. So talking 20, 22, maybe late 20, 20, 21, when you actually started to see these evictions go through the system, and now you’re starting to deal with the.

The bad debt where people just don’t pay and now you can enforce it. But in that meantime, you’ve got a couple months where you have a non-pay unit, then you have another two to two weeks, maybe even a month or more of rehabbing the unit, getting it back online and maybe another week or two to get it released up in the, and get somebody paying in there.

And of course, you’ve got another couple weeks or month of concessions you’ve made, varying levels of concessions, such as a hundred dollars off the first month or half months off the first month, the rest you have to count for. So that’s really what I think a lot of people ourselves included are challenged through now.

And it’s something that the, I think something like that will never get published in a regular type of publication, because it’s just complicated to, to keep track of. It’s it’s more complicated than your Monte Netflix special. For those people who are interested in a interesting story and wondering what was his girlfriend real?

I would suggest watching that video or it’s two hours long, but, getting back to the whole eviction moratorium thing, it is a little bit confusing. And, a lot of people just don’t understand how long it takes its way to actually to, for the problems that bring it’s ugly face and it’s right now.

I think a lot of that should be worked out maybe in the, in, throughout this year early into next. But I think that’s where a lot of the struggles with the industry which you get over, right? If you have enough capital reserves to get through it and your occupancy doesn’t drop too much should be no problem to get through.

Thanks Matt, for that. Wallet hub reports, 2022 is best real estate markets. So one through Tenco, Texas Allen, Texas McKinney, Texas, Austin, Texas Nashville, Tennessee, Carrie, North Carolina, Gilbert, Arizona, Denton, Texas Peria Arizona Richardson, Texas. I’m surprised Gilbert made it on the list. Cause Gilbert, I always said that Gilbert’s kind of on that that east side of Phoenix and it’s funny.

We fought like assets from like the north west corner all the way down to the north or south east corner. And it’s like a slash from upper left hand Northwest to the bottom. And we never picked up any assets. Gilbert. Yeah, but maybe the time might be coming up apparently, but this is just wallet hubs, another whimsical, top 10 less best places to buy a house.

Another one is this is their markets of seriously underwater mortgages. So they’re lowest ones are San Mateo, California daily city, California, Santa Clara, California, San Jose, California, Sunnyville, California, and their highest one. I guess these are the places where people are herding in terms of their mortgages per Illinois, S Shreveport, Los Louisiana, Columbus, Georgia, Bannon Rouge, and St.

Louis, Missouri median days on the market. So the lowest one, and that this is an indicator of how hot the market is. Once Mr. Colorado, Arva Colorado Renton, Washington, Gilbert, Arizona, Everett, Washington. So you have properties in those markets. It’ll go and it’s priced, right? It’ll probably go in like a day or a week.

The worst places where your property’s gonna sit there on the market is Patterson, New Jersey, New York, New Jersey, Miami beach, Florida, Yonkers, New York. So people just aren’t really buying properties out there or is not as much the best city to the worst city differences of differential, five X from Westminster, Colorado to New York.

But how occupancy percent is an indicator for kind of demand and filling vacancies for apartments or rentals. In the real estate transaction world, the retail world, where you’re buying and selling this days on market is the same barometer record setting rent growth in markets in the south and the west eight of the 10 markets with the highest rent growth.

In New York rents rose 20% year of year in the first quarter of 2022, a dramatic turnaround from the first quarter 2021, when rents fell 15% year of year. And in San Francisco, Boston, Los Angeles, Washington, Seattle, where rents fell at least 5% year over year in early 2021 rents were up 10% or more in 2022, which to me is a sign that things are bouncing back it wasn’t.

And this is like where the UTV is, are saying everybody’s moving outta California. Oh my God. Which they generally are, but you, I think it was definitely played up a little bit more and here’s a great chart. By Harvard university of the domestic migration. So the red states are the ones where people are moving out of the only three are New York, Illinois, and California, and the dark blue, the darker blue ones are the ones that people are moving into, which lot in the Southwest, Texas and Arizona.

This is more where international migration is coming in. And, I’m just not gonna really, I don’t know if I should really report on it because there, the numbers that are domestic migration versus international migration is I’m flip flopping between these two slides. It’s 10 X, the amount of domestic migration.

So as I read these states where there’s a. Net international migration, which they’re coming into. I think that’s New York. I think that’s New Jersey. I think that’s Massachusetts. And I think that’s New Jersey Virginia, or probably DC is what they’re talking about there. And then California are the places where you have a lot of international migration.

And then of course, Texas and Florida and New York are the big ones. But one thing that’s interesting that he says many more rural country counties gain migrants in 2021 compared to 2019. So normally you would say the gateway cities like your San Franciscos new Yorks would get a lot of the the bigger. International migrants, but it appears that the trend is moving more towards rural areas.

If you guys are interested in joining our group, first step is always signing up for our club at simple passive cash flow.com/club. We are primarily an accredited investor group these days. So if you guys would like to meet up in person, meet some of the investors, you have to get vetted first, again, going to simple passive casual.com/club.

And from there you can possibly apply to joining our inner circle mastermind at simple passive cash flow.com/journey. But I would say always educate yourself first, check out my book. The free audio version is on simple passive cash flow.com/book. Or I read it out aloud to you guys. And thanks for joining us and we will see you guys next time. Bye.

TAKE BACK THE GAME with Linda Flanagan

Transcription:

What’s up folks, we have a great podcast today, especially if you have kids ages, any range, cuz eventually they got to go to college and they’re probably doing a lot of extracurricular activities. I think a lot of the listeners type individuals , most of you guys make multiple six figures.

Majority of the people these days are accredited investors and we are moving to an accredited investor base. But more news on that in a future podcast. Now check out our, now I wanna invite you guys to one of our future events. We’ve got several of ’em coming up on October 1st.

We are going to be taking over in Napa valley. We’re gonna be putting everybody on a bus, going out to a few wineries. So if you’re interested in that event again, that’s October 1st. Go to simple passive cash flow.com/napa. Again, simple passive cash flow.com/napa. We are also gonna be doing an October six to seven Huntsville, Alabama property tour.

So if you guys are investing in apartments alongside us, and haven’t even visited these things as I would probably say maybe. Less than a third of you guys haven’t even checked out a classy apartment yet. Good time to visit ’em cuz we’ve got quite a few assets and we’re gonna be doing a little bit of a grand opening party.

Now that our Chase Creek apartments are done pretty much through construction and the clubhouse is all finished there and we might even have some people moving in when we’re there. But on October 6th we’re gonna be doing the party and we fight everybody to come out and especially stay the next day.

Come on the tour with us and visit some of these apartments and, really get some boots on the ground instead of just having some wine with us in Napa valley, even though not, that’s not that bad. And we always preach being a passive investor and being, and living like a passive investor, which is focusing on your network as opposed to a lot of these kinds of non-accredited investors running around with their heads chopped off trying BRRRR strategy.

Buy rent, rehab repair, just a lot of work and just doesn’t really make too much sense. I’ve got the dates also planned for our annual retreat in Hawaii, January 13th, through the 16th. That is going to be on the I of Oahu. If you want access to any of these events go to simple passive cash flow.com/events, the nap tour, and October 1st, the Huntsville tour, October six, seventh and January 13th, the 16th 2023 in Hawaii.

All those links are@simplepassivecashflow.com slash event. If you haven’t yet joined our club, go to simple passive cash flow.com/club. That’s the prerequisite first because at our events, if you notice, you don’t really pay to come right away. We gotta vet you. We gotta know who we are, because I think that’s what sets us apart from any other investor group out there, which is, we vet people coming and we know who people are, because if we have one random person out there, who’s just a little weird.

To me that reflects badly on our brand and our community. So we try our best to vet the people coming. And we need to get to know you first or refer you. So make sure you guys complete the format. Simple pass a casual.com/club. And if you guys have been lurking on our newsletter and our insider email, less book a call with me and let’s get to know each other before the schedule fills up with all these late summer travels.

Now we really wanna get to know you guys and after all, it’s all, this is a relationship game and enjoy the show.

Hey, simple passive cash to listeners. Today, we are going to be taking a break from the normal investor and taxes. We know most of the listeners out there, at least most of the investors, a lot of you guys have a million, $2 million or greater, and you typically have offspring and children.

and we get it. You’re busy. And you have ample resources to pour into those perfect children of yours. Maybe you guys are different, but today’s guest is Linda fan again, and she has a new book out called Take Back the Game, which you can get at Amazon. The tagline is how money and mania are ruining kids’ sports.

And why. Now I think a lot of listeners today will agree that grit is one of the very important things that a lot of us successful people can attribute to. And one of those that I hear a lot from our listeners, especially most of our listeners are male, is that our parents made us go to baseball and support team sports like that.

I thought about today’s Linda coming on the show would be very beneficial for a lot of folks who have younger children or at least hear a different perspective. But thanks for coming on, Linda. Appreciate it. My pleasure. Yeah. So maybe give a start off just a little bit of background on what you did prior to writing the book and yeah, we’ll get going there.

I had another life before becoming. Before writing this book, I started actually being involved in the national security field. I was the national security analyst at the Kennedy school at Harvard for a few years then, took a turn and had kids. And then when they were young, I started coaching because I’ve always been an interested and competitive runner and I coached for 17 or 18 years. And throughout that time, I also picked up various project writing projects and became very interested in youth sports, both as a coach and seeing what was happening, from my perspective with the parents I was dealing with, which were high school girls as a high school running coach, and also with my own kids who are now in their twenties.

When I began coaching, we were young and, so I was grappling with the same, with the same pressures, probably lesser pressures then than there are now on parents to get kids playing sports. And the world fascinated me. It was so different from the way I experienced sports growing up and what I got out of sports growing up.

And there’s a very big difference between at least when I grew up. It was the general. I have a fun league in soccer and a lot of baseball. There’s a lot of like dynasty teams and different leagues where you have to pay some big bucks to get into. And it starts being right.

Very serious. Yes. And, I stand firmly on this side of saying that’s those expensive leagues and teams, especially at young ages. Not only a waste of money, but in the long run, likely harmful to your kids or not to their advantage, to play in expensive teams and leave. When they’re young, you’re paying, you’re lining someone’s pocket.

Who’s convinced you that your kids need this, that they, if they’re gonna get to the next level or whatever, there’s always some kind of platitude. why they need to do more and more, but when they’re young, when they’re not adolescent, yet the expensive time consuming games and leagues often do more harm than good.

The one, another thing I can think of is your point. There’s a lot of kids that quite frankly, aren’t really good at the sports that they’re playing and they wouldn’t even be. Play the dang game because they aren’t able to make the team or make the cut. It reminds me that a lot of the folks out there will do this like a little tax trick to call their kids models so they can write off, I think six grand per kid. It’s some whimsical thing that a lot of investors will do, but I. I hate to break it to you. A lot of you guys, but your kids are ugly. They’re not models, right? Oh God. I didn’t realize people did that. Yeah. People do that. I’m just joking folks. Geez. Same thing with sports, right?

Yes. Yes. And I think I was thinking about this today, that when your kids are in high school and they’re participating on some of the club teams, advertise themselves as well. We had X, many recruits, go off to division one, the Ivy league or the top tier division three schools, I think it’s really important.

You’re at that level to ask them some serious questions, because it is true that some percentage of those kids on those teams will be recruited. Very few will get any scholarship money. It’s a very slim percentage. But some will get admitted to a better school because they played varsity sports.

But it’s important for parents to ask questions of those leagues because for every one child that goes all playing college, which may not be the Nirvana, everyone thinks it is who knows how many more have been gone through all of this these years and years. Club play leagues play expensive travel teams that end up with nothing.

Most kids do not get recruited. So those clubs and clubs and leagues that promise it, you should ask for data on it because you’re not on a team chances. Aren’t good that you’re gonna go to play in college and you’re still paying the same fees and sacrificing all that time. But for those. So to catch some people up, cuz I wasn’t super familiar before doing this interview, like when does the club league start?

Some kids will start to play baseball and soccer and they’re like five years old. Do the club leagues start at that point or are there other major entry points that people will come to? It’s really entirely dependent on where you live and what’s being offered in your community.

What’s the culture where I live in New Jersey? It’s very competitive. It’s a very densely populated state. There’s a ton of people and a ton of ambitious people with money who want their kids to play sports. As a result, there are clubs. There are club teams available for second and third graders. And some of these kids travel.

So depending on where you live and who is like how saturated the market is with these private teams, they’ll offer programs for kids at younger and younger ages. In fact, in my town, I recently looked up one of our soccer programs and they offer soccer for U five, which is four year olds.

So I presume those aren’t travel teams, but I think starting in second grade, they’re travel. At least in my area. And again, it’s, I don’t know where you are. I can’t say for sure. It’s dependent on the area and sports tend to dominate in certain regions across as big in New Jersey, track and field is big.

Baseball is big elsewhere, so it’s somewhat region dependent and what are the kinds of the ranges, just again, a lot of people are just unaware of this, right? A lot of our investors. They grew up in semi lower middle class families. They just, they, they are like me and just go to the $200 a year league.

Like what do these club sports know? What are the ranges? It’s there’s different numbers that are thrown around, but the Aspen Institute, project play, Estimated that the average family that has children playing sports spends $693 per child per season per sport.

However, another study conducted by Harris poll. It was somewhat limited study. It was of 1,001 adults with at least one child playing competitive sports. and what’s key here is that they had to have $25,000 of investable assets. So they weren’t impoverished, some spent $500 a month per child. Some spent 8% spent $12,000 per child a year. It’s all over the map, depending on the sport. Some sports are more expensive than other sports. Nationally ice hockey is the most expensive sport. Yeah. And followed by, oh, I think field hockey and gymnastics are right up there too.

There’s a, there’s, it’s the predictable, the usual suspects are, would be the most expensive. Yeah. So I know you have a lot of the downsides, which we’ll get into in a bit, but before we do. Something that kind of comes up to my head. And I think I echo like a lot of our audience who are other type of parents is, like I don’t want my kid to go to the leisure league where they hand out participation trophies.

I would like them to grind and be up against some serious talent. Is. And develop grit. Cause if not, . If, and not for sports, sometimes the only point where they get to make it and, or break it is when they interview for a job. And that’s sometimes too late to figure it out at that point too, to step up and do their craft, and perform their pressure.

But what, what’s the, I bet you meet a lot of folks like myself and our audience. , what’s kind, maybe walk through some of them. The cons of that mentality. The cons of that mentality. I guess I totally understand and sympathize with that point of view.

And I think many parents have that perspective, that sports are there to toughen kids up a little bit, teach ’em some, to pull up their socks and get to work and stop moaning and, yeah. No blood, no foul, yeah, exactly. And I appreciate that. And I understand that way of thinking.

And I, although everyone moans about participation trophies, my kids never got one. That’s all I can say. I think, and maybe yours have, and maybe they’re more of a thing in the last 10 years that everyone bemoans participation trophies. I think what a really important consideration is, what age are you talking about?

If they’re little kids, if they are like in elementary school, The idea that they need to be around tough competitive players. And so they can, suck it up and belly up to the bar and hit the ball when they’re two strikes. I think that’s not a helpful way of thinking about kids and sports.

I think there is a time for that as they get older, as they’re in high school, when they’re more able to handle it emotionally and intellectually and physically, because they’re certainly not developed when they’re young, when they’re in elementary school. But it is also that if I think when parents have that kind of mentality that, here, your sports are, you gotta toughen up here that, you’re gonna play to become.

To build your character to develop your kind of warrior virtues, younger kids more often than not are gonna flee from that because the main reason they wanna play sports is because they wanna be with their friends and they wanna have fun. We parents come into it with another outlook, but when their kids it’s gotta be fun.

Part of the fun is when they’re good and they’re playing well, and they’re playing with other good kids. I get that. And you wanna give, you don’t wanna hold them back. The idea that this is gonna somehow Rob them of a future of being able to handle themselves in a job interview. I think that’s pushing it.

I would also argue, and that, the whole notion of grit has been such a celebrated concept now for years. And, I think it was Angela Duckworth who promoted it. And this is the new magic. Quality that kids need to be successful. And of course, we parents all want our kids to be able to hack it, to be able to manage and have resilience and stand back up after they have some kind of hardship.

But grit also can be an overrated virtue. There’s something to be said for. Not doing something you’re terrible at, after you’ve given it a go, as you were talking about with the team sports, like some of these kids they’re not great. Maybe they would be wiser to do something other than whatever that sport is.

Try a different sport, try a different activity entirely. That’s not athletic. Grit is I think kids. This generation of kids has been so indoctrinated about grit that they’ve lost sight of and parents do to some extent of what is it you’re going to be gritty about? Shouldn’t just grit for the sake of grit is not a virtue.

It needs to be attached to some valuable thing that matters to you. So I think it can be really overstated the value of it, particularly for young kids. They’ve got time to grow into, Those wonderful qualities that sports can deliver to kids. Very similar, like adults, like I’ll have a lot of calls.

Not many these days, but with like broke guys who are like, didn’t go to college, they don’t have that much money and they have this, they buy into this like hustle culture, which is the same thing. In my opinion. I tell these guys, yeah, you gotta get to, you gotta do something. I still have some value in the world, dude. Yeah. But like many of our listeners, they grind it through decades of school and work and savings and it’s something that I’m personally working on is getting away from the hustle culture and more finding spirituality and, but I dunno, that’s, I’m just aware of the terms.

I don’t know if it’s best for kids, it is for me. This, I don’t know if I agree with this, but to me, a byproduct of letting your kids search for themselves in the world. I don’t know why I say it like that, like you, but they’re gonna find, they’re gonna find themselves. I look back at myself. I was a fat kid who liked to play video games. If I wasn’t told what to do, go play baseball. I would just sit there and play Siana chrono tri for like hours on. Obviously, as a parent, you need to, sometimes you need to nudge your kids and get ’em out of the basement and off the TV, get outside or, go meet your friends at the park.

I, by, by, I’m a big believer in having kids that they should be the ones calling the shots about what they play because to the greater, the extent, the greater the decision to play is the parents, the less interested they’re gonna be. And at the same time, while wanting them to be the ones that lead the way, where are they?

Where are they gonna, what are they gonna play? How often. They also need to be nudged sometimes, they need to be yanked out of the basement and say, okay, what do you wanna try? Pick something. You need to pick something. Yeah. So there’s a balance between, giving them total freedom and, being the one, making the decision for them.

There is some nice middle ground there. And that’s what my current belief is, and I got like another couple of decades with. My child, cause you gotta search for finding that like thing that they have somewhat of an affinity towards and then having them grind a little bit at that.

But I mean that, that kind of goes into your first, your, one of your topics in your book. Do you specialize in one year round sport or you dabble and find that what’s your thought process there. The trend now is, as most people are aware, if you have kids and they’re playing in e-sports, everyone knows that there’s this emphasis on picking one and specializing picking one sport and specializing, and even in some sports picking one position in that sport and specializing it, specializing in it.

Now every medical professional psychologist. Anyone, any student of sports will tell you, this is a crazy idea that is not in the kid’s interest because for all kinds of reasons, it shrinks their interest to such a tiny thing for one. Yeah. And it’s also physical, the more you specialize, the more you play, one thing all the time.

The more likely you are to get hurt. And then what do you have? It’s like putting all your eggs in one basket. The specialization, certainly before high school, is almost universally condemned, except by the people who are selling it to you as something you need to do to advance your child’s athletics.

Yeah. And I’m glad you said that you there’s somewhat of a timeline here, right? Because if you just let a kid dabble all the way through high school, College there’ll be that Jack of all trades who has 15 minor degrees and no major. And then who knows what they’re gonna do after college at that point?

You and I may disagree on this. I’m a big believer in the generalists. I think generalists are what the world needs. People who have some knowledge on a lot of things that’s what you need to be successful rather than, obviously there’s some mix, but I think. Playing three sports. The three sport athlete is gone, a Relic at this point because yeah, kids are specializing, but they would be better off. If they could play multiple sports, be better for their bodies, it would be better for their mental health, for their ability to work with people and have different coaches, but that’s not what they’re gonna sell you.

Yeah. And I think I, I acknowledge both sides of what you’re saying, the specialize and then be the generalist. It’s just like how, like in the investment world, they say you should have a diversified portfolio. I don’t know why to say it like that either, but then you have the pros being like diversification is for idiots that don’t know what they’re doing.

So they need to generalize. So it’s the same thing, right? Each and I guess maybe let’s, if I were to you. Have two sides of this. You have the kids who are actually good at what they do and may be able to play in high school. D one D two D three 80% of the kids.

Would you say 80% of kids are just average, right? And well, 6% of high school kids end up playing in college. So it’s a pretty small number of kids who play at any level in the college division. One’s the most competitive and then two and three. It’s, we’re talking about quite a small number who go on to the next level anyway. Yeah. So let’s stick with the masses, right? The kids that barely can get on a JV team, maybe. Maybe a bench warmer in high school, right? Those are, I think those are the parents that are listening. That’s the masses. How should they go about, from, I guess from hearing you like, correct me if I’m wrong, but take ’em through elementary time, multiple sports, see what they’re good at and then specialize or, the core principle in my view is let them take the.

All of the sports experts will tell you, ask your kid what he or she wants and let them take lead. Introduce them to a lot of stuff. If you’re in, you have the luxury of doing that, you’re in an area where there are many different options. Give them lots of options again, not so that they pick one and like to narrow into it, but that’s so that they have a diversity of experiences.

If those, if that child wants to keep. Keep playing, have ’em keep playing, keep trying more things and very likely they’ll decide for themselves. I really prefer baseball to soccer or tennis versus, I don’t know, lacrosse, and they’ll narrow their own path and the more they make that decision, the more app they will be to stick with it.

Now in the middle school years They’re often school teams. It also depends on the area in my area. There are middle school teams and they can play for their school team. There will be a lot of pressure to join a club team. Then I would say even younger, depending on your child’s interest, if they are absolutely crazy for a sport and they are desperate to play, I think it’s fair to consider joining a club team in middle school.

But recognizing that once you’re on that team, you’re not getting off that train until they graduate from high school or the train crashes and they quit and they get hurt. So there has to be some caution. I would also advise any parent who’s thinking about whether or not my kid really wants to join this tra club and they love it.

And do this. There should be some awareness or thought on the part of the parent about what’s being given up doing this, because if we do this, there is another cost. It’s not just the, it’s not just the price of the league and time and all that. It’s what you are not doing with your, if you’re married, you have a partner.

You’re not doing it with your other kids. There’s a cost associated with joining one of these teams. So they should be done with a lot of thought in advance by high school. I’m a big believer in high school sports. I think they’re the best. That’s where kids have the most fun. It’s always said it’s the high school sports they enjoy the most.

When they’re in college, you talk about how high school was a fun time. That’s to me where parents ought to be the most enthusiastic and encouraging. And your opinion on team versus individual sports. I think from an application to real life, most people are employees, especially listening to this show.

And yeah you’ve gotta band up, play on a team and feel the celebrations of a team. Cuz if not, you’re not building your own damage stream. It’s building the team, some people like to get off on the team succeeding like the military, but yes, some of the minority of our group are entrepreneurs myself.

And it’s the idea is to gimme the damn ball, get out the way and let me score the, carry the team to victory and those. Those are sports like tennis or maybe track and field, but yes. Track and any general thoughts. Yeah. General thoughts on that? Yeah. See, when I, when you were talking about, oh, get out of the way, give the ball and let me score reminded me of Michael Jordan and that documentary a couple of years ago, about how he, rallied the way he rallied his team was to yeah he wasn’t as bad as Colby, right? Jordan is empowering. He was the man. But he made other people around him better. Bullying them into it a little bit, but, yeah. Yeah. I, I see, I guess I think that in terms of which is better, I think, or if it depends entirely on the kid and what they’re good at and what their inclination is. Some of these individual sports, they have a, like a little gloss of a team aspect because, even in tennis, there’s five matches. And the team wins if three of the, three of the individual, those players and the doubles teams, three of those, so there is a team quality to most of this stuff.

I just think it’s gotta be from, come from the kid, yeah. They may be inclined to do this individual stuff and push themselves. I’m a runner. Runners are often self congratulatory to say, but cerebral and independent and disciplined. And but that’s it, it has some qualities of a team sport when you’re on a cross country team. Then there are other things where you’re, if you have a shared goal a basketball team where everyone is working together, I think that has gotta build stronger team bonds than these individual sports do. And how that translates into the work world or real life. I don’t know. It’s probably really dependent on the personality of the person.

I imagine you could. Ask open ended questions like, how’d you do and how, how and see what they say. Do they reflect from the team side? I know if I asked my younger bone head self I’d probably if, if we lost, I’d probably claim it on the team, I went three for four with a triple and walk ,single, it’s more on me. I can’t remember what I was. I didn’t enjoy it. Sticking around with the teammates, eating after the game, we had a pot log. That’s all I remember. See, that was fun. Okay. That’s what you remember. Most kids remember the fun stuff. They remember going out for ice cream and that’s what they remember and that’s the fun stuff.

And there’s something to be, there’s a lot to be said for that mainly because, they’ll be more inclined to stay with it. If it’s fun, if it’s not a grind, Constantly. I would also caution some of your listeners if, if you are, if your podcast listeners are generally like have gotten by, on grit and, grinding it out as you put it and it’s very respectable. I think it can often be really hard to see the next generation lazing around and thinking I had so tough and, I was working so hard and it, there can, it’s easy to just make two. I think, to punish kids to some extent and toughen them up through sports to think that sports will be the way to toughen them up and ’em up and, I just would caution against that. I think sports when they’re little, should really be fun, cuz you want ’em to keep playing. So they have all the benefits of sports as they age and you stay active.

Yeah. Yeah. I probably think the same way, right? Like the son of a gun, right? Like I gave you this $400 carbon fiber bat, what do you mean? Gotta walk, even use the damn thing, right? exactly. Exactly. And it’s just, that’s the other point I wanted to raise. There’s a lab at Utah state.
Travis DORS runs the families in a sports lab that found that the more parents spend on their kids’ sports, the less kids like it. And the more pressure they felt. You go and buy a $400 bat or $200 goalie gloves. And, at least in our house, those goalie gloves became a dog toy and it’s it’s not helpful to them. It’s not, it’s getting too much parental, like per baggage, parental baggage gets involved there. Yeah. Just because we live in the best neighborhood and you didn’t grow up in the kind of the fringier area that we did back then doesn’t mean that I have to. Give it to you in the sparks world, but it’s hard to resist.

Yeah. Something that comes to mind, like have a lot of informal mentors that are like maybe 20 years older than myself, but , you know what, in general, these guys are like, 20, 30 million network plus and their opinion is like, look, we buy our kids, whatever they want, we totally spoil them.

They’re gonna come out how they came out. Cuz we came out. We did okay with what we had and we didn’t have much. So there’s no sense trying to control destiny or control face kind of their way. Mm-hmm I thought that was very refreshing. Especially coming from somebody who was a self made multimillionaire, they didn’t come through with. That is refreshing and it’s very counter to what you, I was expecting you to say. Yeah. And what I think you often hear. And I agree. I do think kids are pre, they’re gonna turn out, they’re gonna, they are who they are, you can shape it on margins, but it’s grandiose to think that it’s gonna, your influence is gonna be that much greater than that.

Let’s end here on a, kind of a fun topic. Everybody likes to, to talk about, which is. The bad coaches and the friends’ behavior for those people. Maybe people are aware, but maybe summarize these, these few issues that kind of come up and all you have to do is watch the local news or get on Twitter or something. And you can see these horrible stories of parents yelling and screaming at referees. Going ballistic at coaches. And unfortunately this problem, since the pandemic, since we’ve begun to come outta the pandemic has actually gotten worse. Cuz people are so enraged about everything these days.

And that to the point where there’s now like a referee shortage, it’s harder and harder for leagues to get officials. Also on the one hand, this is a real struggle for me in writing my book. Issues that on the one hand you have parents that can be out of control and just belligerent and determined that the coach is gonna do exactly what you want.

The parent wants. And on this, by the same token, as we’ve seen with the Larry Nasser scandal and pick your poison There are so many coaching abuses as well. So the parents have to keep their eyes on coaches, that’s the, there is the friction in youth sports is this adversarial quality between or adversarial nature of coaches and parents.

And, I certainly encourage parents to give the coach the benefit of the doubt and say, thank you, unless you’re the coach. And provided you’ve done your due diligence and you know that they’re not predators or malefactors of some kind, if the coach benefited from it and say, thank you or volunteered when they’re little or just accept the fact that your kid sucks you. Know no good. Yeah. Yeah. And grit, no amount of grit. They’ll get better. Grit will make your child get better. If they have it, but it’s not gonna make ’em great if they’re not inclined that way to begin with. And if they don’t have any natural interest in it, maybe because they’re not good at it, you don’t tend to like things you’re not good at.

So be real about that. Yeah. Yeah. It’s sad when kids are good at a certain sport, but they don’t like it and then they get pushed. Probably all the doc, probably the doctors are crying inside now doing it. Just kidding guys. We’re all the same, right? Included, happens to be good at math.

So their parents make, become, all do it. But yeah. Anything else that kind of closes us out that you think might be beneficial to them. Yes. Okay. You call our group out there. A simple passive, casual flow tribe, I guess doesn’t seem so passive. Yes. An interest, right? The recovering active, trying to be passive people. Yes. I was trying to make sense of your podcast clientele. I would say yes, I was thinking about it a little bit today when I was out running. And I thought that, if you’re like a conscientious parent and. You’re like, should I buy the $400 bat and this, $200 gloves I think, or spend $5,000 for summer camp at summer tennis camp?

I think it’s, you can always use sports as an opportunity to teach your kids about money also, to say. If you’re the kind of parent that is comfortable, talking about money and how you value it or how you wanna spend it, how it reflects your values. You can say, if you have, if you can’t afford it, if money’s not an object, you shouldn’t be spending all this money if you can’t afford it anyway, but say money is no object and you can pay for the $5,000 tennis camp.

You could say. I want you to understand that We can afford this. And it’s important to us. We wanna support your interest at the same time. We’re not gonna buy a whole new set of clothes or a whole new set of rackets for you, because that would be just because we can’t afford it. Doesn’t mean it’s wise.

I guess that’s the bottom line that you can use sports as a way to. Yes, we can’t afford it, but it doesn’t make it smart. And here’s why, because the more parents pay for sports, the more they invest in their kids’ sports, the less the kid enjoys it. And I want you to love tennis.

So while I’ll send you to this camp, we’re not gonna buy you four new racks. That there are a way to use sports to express your values. You can also say. You know what, I’m gonna send you to that camp, but I also want you to realize if you’re the kind of person who’s, philanthropist say that, we can afford this, but there are lower income families in our community who can’t.

And I think I want you to know that. If I, you, if we pay for this camp, I’m then gonna give a donation to a youth sports organization that helps underprivileged kids in our community. So they can play too, because I don’t feel good about the fact that by virtue of our wealth, you get to play and they don’t. So that’s another example. Again, I don’t know if your clientele, some probably are inclined that way, but it is useful, you can use sports as a way to express your values and how much you’re spending on the sports. If money is no object, there’s still plenty of opportunities to talk about how you want you, your money to be spent and why you’re spending it this way.

Thanks for jumping on and folks if you’re like me, your spouse says you can’t read any more entrepreneur or real estate or investing books, and you’re like, you hate nonfiction books. I would say this would be a good in between something a little bit different.

So again, the book is Take Back the Game, how money and mania ruined kids’ sports and why it matters by Linda FLANAGAN. It should be out by late August, early September. So check it out on Amazon. But thanks for jumping on guys. Thank you for having me. It was my pleasure to be here. And that’s the chill folks. I would like to share a couple stories from my childhood and as just offer as a data point, I’m not passing any judgment or, I’m not giving advice because that’s one of the tenants that we talk about in our family office, Ohana, I have a policy. We don’t give each other advice because.

That’s what lane parents do. And, here we are, we wanna add value to each other. So we speak from experience. So here’s my experience, when I, my sport, when I was a child was baseball and I, yeah, I think my parents really not, never really got on the bandwagon of sending the kids to all this stuff that we do today.

I got started, I think like when I was 10 or 11 playing baseball. So I couldn’t even really throw the ball when other kids had been doing the dang sport for three, four years looking back. I wish I would’ve, I wish they would’ve maybe signed up a little earlier, so I could develop as opposed to being like years behind the other kids. I eventually caught up, by then, you gotta do high school and that’s more important, right? Doing high school to get a GPA to go to college. At least that was at the time

And kind of the second thing again, like me, I think I wasn’t that great of an athlete. So I was probably like the 80% of the other kids who picked brass in the outfield and just wished the game was over. So we could hang out and eat a potluck. But that was really the only thing I remember. I remember there was one kid who had a hundred dollars bat at the time, which was like a fortune, which was the equivalent of a $400 carbon fiber bat. And I remember the kids around me and I think maybe messaging for my parents was like, why would somebody spend so much money on a bat and looking back on it, you.

Maybe that wasn’t the best thing that they could have said, right? Like maybe we should acknowledge that a kid’s parents are putting money where their mouth was, an advantage just saying, oh, that kid’s spoiled or that parent is spoiling their kid. Now I’m not saying that’s the best way, but I’m just looking back on the vivid childhood that I had. I can’t really remember too much of it. That was something I definitely remember. And I’m definitely conscious of these ways we view wealth, right? Like I think a very unhappy wealth mindset is, people look at very rich people and they look down on them saying oh, they’re greedy.

They take from other people. I definitely think today, the people who are affluent, especially entrepreneurs or business owners, they’re the ones that create jobs for everybody else. Sure. I think, in a way Michael Jordan beat up on people, but at the end of the day, he brought people up and, when people got on board, he was probably one of the best teammates that’s to, to me, a good business leader is, or even, even if in a company you’re a middle management or senior management are greater. And then the last thing to leave off with really the other memories I had was just hanging out with the other people. So after it’s all said and done, that’s really auto. Remember, maybe if you’re a parent out there, maybe you just take that for food for thought and we’ll see you guys next time. Bye.

Coaching Call: 1.5M Net Worth But Playing It Too Safe With Triple Net

What’s up investors? We are gonna be having a coaching call with an investor whose net worth is about 1.5 million and I would probably say this is probably one of the most typical people that we work with. These days people are asking me you know what’s the average person that comes right through these doors and that I like to have, get to know better.

You guys book those free complimentary onboarding calls by signing up for the club@simplepassitcashflow.com slash club and get to know each other and let’s meet on zoom. And. So yeah, $1.5 million net worth. A lot of you guys are just like myself who used to work a day job.

At least one of the spouses, if not both spouses make six figures and you’re in the grind, right? Where all that sandwich generation you’ve got older parents and you’ve got the younger kids that you gotta take care of. I’ve got a young child now. So I understand, like when you’re in your late twenties, early thirties, you’re screwed you can’t get nothing done. All you can do is just hold down the, for at work and, you and your spouse, if you’re lucky enough to have a spouse, just keeping things together.

So it makes it more important to invest the right way, for the average person. I see, who maybe played around with rental properties yet does syndication deals. And, they normally jump into a few deals and with no more than like maybe 10, 20% of their net worth to try it out. I think that’s a prudent thing to do. Now. Some people have joined our family office ohana mastermind, which is our inner circle, gotten access to the right people and jumped in more quickly and hit that nice financial independence, cash flow stream number that they’re looking for a lot quicker than others.

Again, most people, 1.5 million net worth they wanna play around with maybe 10, 20% of their net worth. Cuz they, they look up now they’re in their thirties, forties or early fifties and they’re like, geez, I have some decent amount of net worth and some disposable liquidity.

But still, like after people go into maybe a few deals at the minimum. It’s not much, right? That’s not gonna get you to financial independence, no way Jose. That’s not gonna happen. This stuff. Isn’t like venture capital. And when it’s why we, I like it. It’s not like crypto that just nose dies off some random incidents that happened.

By the way, if you guys also wanna hear my synopsis on crypto winter, that’s coming check out the YouTube channel rich uncle, check that on our website or YouTube and. I think I did a 15 to 20 minute video on just that topic alone. But the rich uncle channel is a little bit more geared up for the younger investors out there where a lot of you guys are more of the accredited investors.

But going back to that typical profile $1.5 million net worth you’ve got maybe four to $500,000 of dead lazy equity in your home because you were brainwashed as a child to pay down your mortgage and be debt averse. That’s exactly what the banks wanna do. Want you to do by the way you maybe have two to $500,000 in your 401k locked in there, which, there’s a lot of content we have on our website of, jail, breaking that stuff out to minimize the overall effective taxes.

You still gotta pay that 10%, little penalty, but no big deal. That’s why you gotta surround yourself. Other accredited investors who think this way. Because it definitely is a lonely world out there, which is why we do these events coming up on October 1st, we are going to be going out to Napa valley.

So make sure you guys are signed up and check that out. We’re gonna be slowly working on the info page for this to get on the email list to get first access to this, but check it out at simplepassivecashflow.com/napa and enjoy the podcast.

All right. We can make up a fake name if you want, but once you give people a little bit of context of where you’re at, I guess the people and again, jump into the story as we dive down these webs of questions. So my name’s Ron. I’m in Dallas, Texas. I have my own law practice and married two small kids.

My wife works, now we have probably about a million dollars in direct industrial assets that we own. No syndications My background is, obviously as a commercial lawyer, commercial real estate lawyer did the SFR thing, at the peak I had about five SFR. I had a partner and I split one with my brother and we had an Airbnb as well, but it was just too many doors to handle.

So this was about four years ago. I sold everything, which I thought was the peak of the Dallas market. Made a ton of money. But it’s just stupid, we had some free and clear houses and just sold those, dumped everything into mostly single tenant, triple net industrial and I’ve been just collecting triple net rents for the past couple of years.

And it’s really great, it’s all hands off and I just, I don’t even check the bank account which works. So I always have to press it for the dude listening on the podcast. You hear infinite banking. He puts all his money on that. Guys out there you need money to do this, dude. You can’t just have a million or a couple million dollars to dump your money into a triple net.

Triple net is seen as an end game strategy when you get to end game four or 5 million plus net worth. But before we go there, a lot of people are still in the, should I do some single family home? Should I, Talk to the guy who is about a million, $2 million network, any hindsight lessons learned, if you were to talk to your.

So I definitely hear that concern a lot that this triple net is the end game. And it’s what people dump their money into, a target or some type of large retail or freestanding, whatever. Starbucks, that’s seen as a holy grail with super low super low cap rates. No leverage, just pure cash.

And really that’s just one slice of the pie. Triple-net only just refers to a type of lease structure, but the deals that I’m doing and that I got started with are much grittier. They’re dirty industrial buildings, but the tenants are on a form of net leasing. And if you can get them onto even a triple.

You have a same triple net structure. You may not have an absolute triple net, which is, I think a lot of people assume the Starbucks, the CVS, the Walgreens, those are absolute leases. The, you as an investor, you don’t even have to pay property taxes. The property tax notice gets sent to the tenant. The tenant will dispute it.

The tenant will pay as an investor. That’s really hands-off and that’s to the extreme that I wanted to be for my triple net. But yeah, I don’t need to come up with, to buy one of these types of 200, 2 50. And even within that, though, I would say the best way is to partner with a partner because then, 250 each, you guys are putting in 500.

That is a lot more palatable. Plus you have another person to bounce ideas off of. You can talk to somebody and it also helps split the legwork because underwriting finding deals, closing them. That’s a lot of responsibility. And so if you’re only one person. Finding one partner to also put up 250 is probably what I would recommend.

You’re going to get a good size building that has enough cash flow to pay for property management and has enough surplus cash flow to pay for repairs, because you are going to be most likely responsible for the exterior of the building. You’re going to have to pay for the roof. You’re going to have to pay for a driveway parking lot gate. Those will be part of your leasehold responsibilities and you’ll need some cash flow to pay property taxes, which on my buildings are between 30 to 50,000 a year. So you front those expenses and then the tenant reimburses you throughout the year on a monthly basis.

So you are talking about a purchase price of 5 million bucks or 2-3million? Yeah, I would say under, because you want a little bit of reserves. And you want to make sure, yeah. You have a little bit of cash for repairs. God forbid. Yeah. You got, you guys have 500,000 and you guys are making, what about a year’s cash flow? So on these triple nets, I would say you should really expect at least nine to 10, maybe 11% cash on cash.

If it’s a single tenant, bought it like a six and a half or a seven cap, then you put leverage on it. We’re still getting private banking stuff in below four. So like you could leverage it up with a 75% or 70% LTV. So that’s going to juice your returns to that 9%, 10% threshold.

And then again, if you have rent, escalators your rents go up, your expenses, don’t go up. It produces an exit that puts you in that 20, 25% IRR, depending on when you want to sell. And if you want to take the risk of a tenant renewals or not, and that’s where instead of. Property manager that in a way the property manager is the broker, right?

That’s your friend in this business. Yeah. And a leasing broker. That there’s a difference between the investment sales guy who brings you the deal. And they do the transaction. They’re usually not the same broker that does your leasing. Those are two different worlds. It’s two different skillsets.

So yeah. You want a leasing broker that can tell you what the market is for your property, what the rents are going to be. And they’re the ones that are going to bring you tenants as well. Isn’t that going to be also the guy who takes care of, like maintenance, that type of stuff, physical maintenance.

You typically don’t have much physical maintenance. Maybe if you’re in charge of like snow removal. But again so for our properties, we all just self-manage. Yes, we have some people helping us, but for most triple nets, if they’re single tenants and other things, you don’t need to pay a property manager.

So again, maybe the broker exactly. Ticky tack stuff, the tenants take care of themselves. And the bigger things it’s infrequent enough where a guy like yourself who can use Yelp and we’ll find a contractor on your get a couple bids, knock it out. Drink your peanut Collado for another few months. Wait for the next issue fella.

Let’s dig into some of your questions that you got here. Sure. I think my questions are how to plan and grow for the next phase. I have a good idea of what I want my life to be. In other words, I’m already living my life.

I don’t work that much and put in like 35 to 40 hours a week. The, from my daily cash, just runs pretty consistently. But I just want to grow. Rental income to a portfolio size so that I can exit on a group rate and really get that cap rate compression and sell $35 million worth of property for 40 million and just collect the Delta for the privilege.

Let’s get digging to the hard numbers here. What should net worth adjusted gross income? Yeah, we’re born yet with those kind of two key stats. So depending on how you value the real estate it’s probably 75% of net worth net worth is like right over a million.

That’s not including primary. I don’t know how you guys typically do that. I don’t know. We include primary. That’s your net. So your net worth is defined as all your assets minus all of your liabilities, like your debts or mortgages. So people, essentially if somebody, yeah. Yeah, somebody stole your kids and they wanted as much money.

How much could you like liquidate everything? And about a few weeks you get essentially. Yeah. So we’re probably closer to 1.5. Then I would say 1.5 because we’re super low leverage on our on our primary, but Yeah. So one five, and again, half of that’s in, in commercial real estate, I have no, no SFR rentals anymore.

It’s all the industrial stuff. A lot of people don’t believe me that once it become an accredited investor, Can you tell me any good foods and reasons why you’d want to own little rental properties, right? Like liability, headache. If not, a lot of us would love to sell ours, we’ve got the whole mastermind looking to sell their remaining rentals.

I think this is a good time to sell you. You have the same problem. And we face that too, which is if you sell, what do you do with the money? Because that is a existential problem at every single price point, whether you’re looking to sell like a hundred thousand dollar rental, you’re looking to sell a $10 million triple-net or you’re looking to sell a hundred million dollar REIT portfolio.

What do you do with the money that generates a higher return than you’re currently getting? Because if we’re getting that 10% cash on cash right now, we bought it at a good price. Our mortgage is quite low. We just cashflow on it. I don’t know necessarily what I would buy right now. If you put a gun to my head and said, here’s an extra million dollars.

It’s a challenge, right? It’s deal flow is the hardest part. But yeah, I would say sell SFR as soon as you can. Because at least for us and for our family, I make about 400 to 500 a year, depending on the business, but we save or invest about a hundred or 200 a year. And so that reloads the kitty for us to buy new buildings every year.

And we’re also the dude, we thought that Dallas 2017, wasn’t going to go up. Yeah not to say it didn’t go more. I wanted to simplify my rental portfolio at that time because I was six with six roofs. I was even with a property manager. I was always having emails like a water heater. Went out. Oh, the dishwasher broke here.

Oh, this oh, this happened. Oh, that happened. Oh, the tenants complained about it. It was just annoying. And so I felt like it was still an incredible investment. If you think about, I was cashflowing on a rental, I had property managers, so I wasn’t doing a whole lot. And then when I sold for a pretty good appreciation, I was like, Hey man, I’m super happy with it.

It was like banking profits. I love I say this quote, you’ll never go broke banking, a profit. And so there’s nothing, I think there’s nothing wrong with that. But yeah, for sure. And even in, in 2017 or 2018, I thought a lot of multifamily syndications were overpaying for properties in my area because I got a lot of friends that are syndicators and they wanted me to throw in money, but they were just over buying what I thought over buying over, paying for some really crappy apartments.

And they’re laughing all the way to the bank when they make, 300% return in two years. Yeah. And larger. High net worth families like over your 10 20 fives, they’re always going to ask to allocate to, they’re always going to have a portion of your portfolio, whether that portion is 5%, 50% in asymmetric return.

So they’re always going to have that play, which you don’t. In terms of net worth, you got some movement to go, man, you got to get up to four or 5 million before you can start to play defense. The way I look at so I’ve, I’m coming at it from a different perspective, right? Like I also taught in 2016, 17, I was at a different coffee shop and I thought things were a little overheated myself, but I had also seen this same thing.

I started investing in oh nine, 2012. I’m like, wow, this is getting really expensive. Then in 2014, oh, this is getting really excited. Once you go through three of these spaces in your own head, you start to realize that it’s just you. And I think what you start to see in a lot of people, they’re still in that first, second go around in their head and they think it’s going to go up.

And then they start to see that role internet form or random YouTube channel. That’s just trying to sell views and they get all freaked out. You never have a crystal ball. So my thing. The buy box is goal. What do you do right with the money. If you were to sell those rental properties, you buy stuff that it’s a 1.2, five debt service coverage ratio.

Why? Because that’s what the professional banks do for goodness sakes. Copy what the pros do instead of us amateurs write copy with the pros. Do they go into stuff that cash flows? It has some value add. Awesome. But the. The metaphor that I use is let’s say we’re trying to climb a mountain.

And that’s what we are. And if you’re at 1.25, 1.5 million, if you’re under 3 million, you still gotta be climbing this mountain where you’re at is it’s so windy and stormy 1.58, Jack, right? You’re we have a couple of kids they’re going to blow that stuff easily. The reason why we say four or 5 million net worth is you can get.

A couple of kids do that, and it’s kinda hard for them to screw up. You can take 5 million divided, right? 3 million at 10% is, two few hundred thousand dollars passive cash flow a year. It’s hard to screw that up, but kids are amazing, right? They can probably screw up really hard.

Now you’re seeing that 1.25, 3, 4 million is not enough. So we’re trying to climb this mountain s o if we can, and if you’ve ever done like Patagonia type of stuff, I’ve never had them like the code. But the way I watched the videos on YouTube is they tie off, right? They go up, they tie off because what if the rock breaks or the market collapses, or there’s a reset, like a pandemic they fall, but they don’t die.

They just fall that 10 feet from. And in a way, that’s what the cashflow deals 1.25 that’s what’s coverage ratio is, and then they aggressively climb. So you could think of that as they’re still going into more asymmetric types of deals. And for you, that might mean stabilizing assets with a little bit of value add. For me, it might mean putting into venture capital, right? Like I think that’s where personally we might be different or, people range.

Everybody has their own risk tolerance. And I think, but the reason I like your opinion or respect your opinion is because we’re at least more risk friendly, risk loving in that we’re in real estate at all. I go to these conferences for family office and Private equity stuff and commercial real estate is still an alternative investment. They’re so focused on just stocks and bonds and fixed income and different types of financial products that are their bread and butter. All they just talked about is equities, and O owning commercial real estate, or reads like, oh that’s an alternative asset class.

And that’s something that we have embraced and uncomfortable with that risk. The lack of liquidity, all this stuff, property tax. I think that makes sense we were aligned on, but I agree with what they do. I think, I see, I want to know your thoughts on this. The reason why they think that is like with real estate, it’s predicated on the operator and the people, and that’s where you can go wrong with this.

If you work with dishonest people who are in competent people, then yeah, it’s going to go bad. And that’s what they describe as counterparty risks. Things go wrong in big companies, but it kinda works its way out internally. You don’t really have that too much. Whereas real estate, these alternate, they see as alternative in that investments.

It is a risk in their eyes. It’s based on people, but if you can mitigate that by building community, around you with people, who’ve worked with people in the past. I think that’s an appropriate way of mitigating the risks, but, I get it from their point of view. It’s and part of me too, you think about the number and everybody has their number.

It’s like what I take that money. If you told me the choice of selling the next, whatever, a couple of years of my life and said, I’ll just hand it to you in cash do I just put it into, the VT max VTI and just let it ride on just straight dividend. I don’t think so, because to me that’s not fun.

Like real estate is fun buying it and working the property and working with the tenants. So that’s where one thing that you might, or the listeners might want to, if they don’t really like real estate is like a huge part of the portfolio, 50%, a hundred. Some of the people in our family office mastermind group, which people can check out at simplepassivecashflow.com/journey

I don’t really pay attention to it cause I’m big on a real estate. Maybe I’m not super old. I don’t want to interact with anybody. I’ll do it, but they call it the quadfecta strategy. If you go on YouTube, you can find a strategy. It’s a way of hedging yourself, but that might be. To be in there and people might want to try it yourself.

Might want to try if you do like your paper assets, I just don’t like them. Cause I think it’s, it’s kinda all, some people don’t like coffee source from conflict areas, they just don’t want to drink that stuff. Just like I don’t like paper assets, but that might be something to think about.

But. And I think everybody needs to as you’re ascending to four or $5 million net worth, you need to change your asset allocation mix appropriately. I think where you’re at, you asked for some advice, so I would still be pushing pretty hard, 80- 20. It would be in value. Add you got to get going.

You’re not going to get anywhere with nine, 10%. And when something inevitably messes up, a very small portion of the time, right? And you go down to six, 7% that year inflation just kicked your butt. This is a game of inches. You got to get that 14, 15, 16% to beat inflation.

So high now, somebody else told me the other day that they’re ditching their triplenets because a lot of their tenants are a lot more sophisticated, bigger guys, and they’re more they can get, they can bully them because they know interests inflation is going up and they just dropped the lease and said, screw you, what are you going to Sue us?

You can Sue Walgreens. So that’s why, like he said, like the industry in general is not getting as strong for the triple net crowd. And I took that as well right now. This is a bull freaking market right now. If people don’t realize it, you are blind to the fact that rents are going up six, 10% somebody markets in all markets.
I have a call with everybody, like three times a day. They’re like, yeah, I’m from XYZ. My rockets are going crazy. I’m like yeah, buddy is going crazy. That’s the market. But like the triple nets is a defense strategy that. Can’t hurt you in this type of environment where your upside is limited in inflation because you can’t market your rents as fast.

So your asset value is decreasing until you can market and either renew the tenant or sign a new tenant at market rates. Yeah. And you locked yourself in along it’s the lock-in three years, at least, three to seven years, at least. Yeah. So you can right now that your tenants feel like they’re getting a freaking steal now, right?

Like for three years, they’d lock in. Their property taxes are going to go up, their insurance premiums are going up, so how good of a deal they feel that’s part of it, but yeah, for sure, the base rent is the biggest component and they do. They, but hopefully they carry that mentality into the lease renewal.

When I want to mark it, it increases by 50% increase. That’s not how they think, man. They are just going off of what they were, the price they paid back in 2022. That’s true. Yeah. I dunno. Hey, Lane, I appreciate it. I probably have to hop off soon, but yeah any last thoughts?

I think you got to, this is a wave, right. You Might have to get out of your comfort zone, but not saying you gotta go 80, 20, maybe just go like 25% of your portfolio just as it comes available, put it into more, maybe not the stabilized value, add stuff, but maybe go on the other end, which is development. We’re doing a webinar for club members.

You only, you guys get it. If you join the clubs simplepassivecashflow.com/club, but we’re seeing a pivot. We bought a property for 87 in Houston. Now the damn thing is worth 1 21 w two quarters later. It doesn’t make any sense. So in this with the tide rising, it makes more sense to develop.

Yeah and that really protects you against downside scenarios too, because new products on the market will always get the best rents. Even if the rents have cratered, people want to live in the new building. So you’ll have demand as long as you can build it. As long as you can see it to completion and create construction contracts, plans, and specs, mitigate change orders, and be a competent project manager. Yeah. That’s the case, right? Like I think of it as a helicopter, whereas like these stabilized value add deals are Jeeps going through the jungle. At any point hit an obstacle or the similar as owning a single family home.

Like any little things can go wrong and get a flat tire. But you got more of a cushion, you got more of a cushion if you’re not relying on that cash flow. Yeah. Just like the guys getting started was his house paid off? I’m always like, just do baby steps man just get up, HELOC, you might know you could get $500,000 HELOC on your whole house. Just take a hundred grand of that, in the next quarter. And I think you’re more conscious of this. But yeah, just baby steps, right? I think that’s the thing. And then when you get the four or 5 million, then I think you can play this game that they’re playing.

But maybe part of that is just surrounding yourself with more high net worth people in the three to 5 million range too. Cool. Hey, I appreciate it. I appreciate the time I got to hop off, but yeah.

 

 

Coaching Call: High Income + 500k Net Worth

What’s up folks. Now, you guys are in for another treat here. It’s another one of those coaching calls, in which you guys get to spy on somebody and secretly critique them on your way to work. Or maybe you pull this up on your iPad as you’re driving and looking at their personal financial sheet. You can do that on YouTube.

We’ve also put this on YouTube, so you can see the spreadsheet and the numbers, how much they’re making this particular person. We’re talking about a net worth of half a million. They make a pretty good salary, $20,000 of income. And all the other specifics you can see on the YouTube channel.

If you guys like. And you guys don’t want to join our exclusive family office ohana mastermind group, which I don’t know why you wouldn’t. If you’re investing more than a quarter million, half a million dollars. I think it’s a no brainer. I think it’s freaking insurance for going out there and walking off the beaten path of getting out of traditional investments into alternative investments with.

Okay some of you guys invest with random strangers out there crazy that just have a good website. But if you guys like these types of coaching calls you guys can volunteer, send us an email at team@simplepassivecashflow.com. We’ll get you guys set up with them. We can change your name.

We can even create a. But a face on you, apparently zoom can put faces on people and hide your identity pretty well. We also put all these coaching calls in the members portal, which you guys can get access to by signing up at simplepassivecasual.com/club. If you sign up there, you get access to the member’s portal and we have a page where we arrange home.

It must be like over a few dozen of these coaching calls, all nicely arranged by net worth. You can go by your net worth and find. Start listening to this stuff and see your financial life unfold, because as I’ve learned, people think they’re special snowflakes, but in terms of money, it’s the two big ones, what’s your net worth and where’s your monthly income coming in and what’s your net, everybody’s on the same path and journey to financial freedom and it’s nothing special getting there. To me, I’ve figured out the quickest and the safest way to get there. It’s a way of smartly using it that some people are a little spooked out about using. Check out my article at Forbes, I wrote about debt, I think simplepassivecashflow.com/forbes.

I have all my articles in there too. Enjoy the show folks. Check out all these other coaching calls at simplepassivecashflow.com/club, and then you’ll get access to that. Reach out if you guys want to do one of these on your own.

Hey, simple passive cashflow listeners. Today, we are going to do a free coaching call for our buddy Nate here, who is also a pipeline club member. And probably in the next 30 minutes, we’re going to go through his personal financial sheet and get them on a good action plan. And maybe this might be a good model for you to follow.

Maybe it won’t, but hopefully it helps one person along the way. So thanks for jumping on Nate. No problem. Give us a little overview . So I’m a dev ops engineer, which is essentially a system engineer and I work on website Make, with my bonus and make 150,000, my wife has a good job as well. So two of us make pretty decent money for the bay area, and then we have, we had two houses in California. One was our primary residence. So we sold that last year and the other one was our old primary residence, which we are about to sell. I don’t know what else you need to know. Some people are watching this on the YouTube channel, which I would recommend, but for the podcast folks, we just tell them how generally, how old you are.

That’s it. So where you’re at in life. And, let’s see, I’ve been married. I have a three-year-old son. We live in Berkeley, California. Basically I’ve been doing what I do for computers for about 10 years. I worked in biotech after that, before that for about seven years. Pretty simple.

And actually people don’t know what parts of this are fake. They were trying to protect the identity of the real person, if your real name is Nate, but if we just made that up, this is a very typical sample of a bay area investor. So I think this will help out a lot of people.

Moving forward. So right now I have displayed on the screen, the personal financial sheet summary, a good overview, a lot of the other tabs feed into this one, a good overview of what’s happening. Where are you at right now? Because different strategies work for different folks. No part of the simple passive cash flow is, it’s very simple.

If you’re hiring high net worth high paid professionals start with some turnkeys and go on to syndications, but there’s all a lot of little different nuances along the way, a lot of different wealth hacks. And hopefully, you can, we can get a good conversation going, but let’s just figure out where you’re at right now.

So the upper left corner here is the. So you’ve got some, you’ve got some, a little bit of cash savings, hundred, a little over a hundred grand. And you got some real estate holding $600,000 properties that the primary residence or we rent. So that’s our current rental that we have. Okay. Good for you.

I definitely recommend people rent and primary markets. Yeah, we took that advice from you. Yeah. You guys want to read that article that I paid someone 500 bucks to write from its simplepassivecashflow.com/home. Cause I really need to get that message out. We like it. We actually have a, it’s a nicer house that we live in now and yeah.

I don’t know if I told you to do that, usually. And here’s the issue with buying a big primary residence. You’re taking that in the a hundred and maybe in $200,000, a down payment, you could have bought five to 10 rental properties, each cash flow and a couple hundred bucks at least. A lot of spouses don’t care about that.

They’re like they wanna own their home, but then when you show them our market would have been 3000. Let me up the ante and let me, let’s go around and place that’s four or $5,000. Because financially, that makes more sense when you look at the numbers. So that, that usually gets them. My wife’s completely on board.

She’s pretty savvy with this. Or at least more subtle than I have to, you will be successful in life. I, so here, liabilities, and it stacks up with that. The 600,000 rental with it’s always paired mostly. This a $312,000 mortgage, I’m assuming that’s connected. So you’re about 50% loan to value on that.

Then you have a HELOC on that thing. Are you tapping at equity or? I know, so that’s some low hanging fruit and we can talk about that. Sources of cash. Here’s like your cash flow what’s happening on a monthly basis. So you got about 20 grand coming in every month. Which a lot of people would save is very high, but for the area that’s pretty much average.

It’s crazy. Yeah. It’s crazy. And I’m just curious. How much you’re paying for rent? Rent is 4,000. Okay. Okay. Not the nine. How are you getting the 9,000 in there? That is also schooling for my son okay. Okay. So between those two, it’s about 65 or about 6,000. Okay. So this, the private school is what like 30 grand a year, 40 grand a year.

Let’s see. It’s about 2 18 52. We changed it. So it’s a little less than 2000 a month. So that’s 25,000. Yeah. Yeah. I know. That’s a lot of people in Hawaii. You have to do that because public schools are not the greatest. Here in Hawaii, but, yeah, but yeah, you add it right on there.

I was like, whoa, man, you really live in, imagine there, but it looks like that, but that makes total sense. And that’s a decision you guys make and it’s not a bad one. Yeah. So you’re running what I asked a lot of people a lot of time. I don’t want to care how much you make. It’s more, this, the cell. Q 53, that Delta between how much money you’re making and how much money you’re spending. And this is a very healthy number here. You say that you’re able to save about 50 grand a year from average people. You’re like the top  1%. But I would say that from most of my investors.

That’s probably what most people have to say, but I’d say like the 50% of people who got their stuff going the right way. They’re upwards to that. It’s very good, and I would say when you’re above the $50,000 level, depending how much net worth you already have. And if you’ve already been doing this a little bit, you’re likely to be financially free in three to five years. So that’s a great win right there. That’s what we’re shooting for.

But you got, you had some vacations here. Is that kind of taken out of that? And big expenses, I think that’s it. That’s what gets me personally. I don’t have a budget. We don’t go on vacation, so we, yeah. Yeah. We actually like our house. That’s one of this, why we spend money on houses because we like to be home, yeah. Yeah. Okay. Okay. What about other big ticket stuff that might sneak in and knock that five 50 grand down to 35? That’s pretty conservative. I think that’s like we’re not really doing much. I just came home. Cook, eat, enjoy, have friends over.

So it’s nothing really cars paid for. I walk everywhere kind of big ticket items. Are you thinking that maybe I’m missing something so well, sometimes, a lot of times for this is, I’m just speaking for myself. My own personal thing is I have a big net cash flow, like how you do, but sometimes, big expenses can come in.

Especially if I go pay for something like a mastermind or something like that. And at the end of the year, I’m like I should have had a lot more than this. Like the animals are cash flowing and everything, but I didn’t even end up with how much I thought I would. There’s holes in my pocket, but I just, I don’t budget.

I don’t like that stuff. Okay. I think we kind of budget, but it’s just I think the biggest savings we have right now is we went from a nanny to putting our son in school. Probably 15,000 right there. Cool. So let’s dig in here a little bit. You’ve got a hundred thousand dollars in cash, so that would probably be the low-hanging fruit there, but I know you probably want to keep some of that in liquid cash, maybe about 20 to 40 grand.

Yeah. Yeah. We’re thinking of 40, but yeah. Yeah, but there’s definitely 50 and here that should be going out to something right away. Wholly, see, here’s your, here’s a rental property. And here is also some low-hanging for, you’ve got about 50% LTV. Have you looked into doing a HELOC on this thing and tapping the equity and the, so we could certainly do a HELOC on this, but we were thinking of selling it. That’s actually a conversation.

You’re interested in that because I don’t know. I feel like selling it at this point is probably the best idea, but yeah, this is like a war zone property. The $600,000 property in Oakland. It’s in the foothills of Oakland. So it actually has a nice property. You could see the San Francisco golden gate bridge. That’s pretty nice. It’s just a, it’s in a transitional area. It’s not a dangerous area. And how much rental income is it bringing in every asset? That’s the point because we rent it out to somebody we know, so we just have them cover the mortgage originally. And that was a big mistake on my part.

And I don’t want to use it right now because I like the guy, but. We’ve talked to him about it a bit. And at first he was like I’ll just, I’ll pay more in rent because the rent prices are ridiculous and he’s getting a good deal. But then we thought about selling it and he’s interested in buying it.

So we’re having that conversation right now. So yeah, they always say that. Okay. Let’s see, I’ll go. But here’s what I. Right now it’s like April or May you probably want to be selling this on the market in the summertime. That’s when you’re going to get a peak price. California, it’s like Hawaii.

There’s not really a season, but you definitely don’t want to, summertime when everyone’s transit kids are transitioning. I would, especially when you want to be political about this and get your friend out in a cordial way. The conversations just started yesterday. We started this conversation a little already about a month ago.

So yeah, I would just, I know, just from a manners perspective, third party, I would say Hey man, go look for it. Just start looking for a place I’m going to check in two weeks, what you’ve been seeing and we need to make a transition plan. I need you out in 45 days or whatever.

Okay. Yeah. Cause it. You can tap this. And I know the Oakland, the California market is getting a little soft right last year. The mistake I think most people would make is you mentioned it. This is you’re probably buying on the line where you’re in a transitional area and people say it’s going to go up.

We can do the numbers later. And I don’t think we’re going to do it today. But if you were to take that $300,000. And go put it on something else. You’re going to five X that whatever. And even if they build something cool, right next door. Yeah. I’m not planning on appreciating this anymore.

I think it has gone up a lot since we got it. So we’re comfortable and happy with where it’s at. Yeah. So you guys always had this as a rental. I guess you don’t have to say. Like deducting the depreciation, all that stuff. So this is actually our original primary residence. And then we lived there, so I made a mistake when I sold it.

I didn’t realize this. I made a mistake when I sold them. I should’ve sold them in a different order and waited about a year. Cause I think we could have done Mr. Capital gains tax, but when did you move out? We moved out about 2016. He bought it in 2012. You lived there for four years? Yeah. I think the rule is, as long as you live in it for the last three to five years.

You can qualify, but talk to a CPA. I think the problem is that you can’t take capital gains tax two years in a row. And I took you on last year when we sold the other house. I don’t know if you can take another capital gains tax and you have to wait. I think you have to wait every other year, but it could be wrong.

Not following. Maybe I’ll know what I’m talking about, but we paid, we instead of paying capital gains on the last house we did or that we, I don’t know what the term is, but we didn’t have to pay capital gains last year when we start our primary residence, the old house, we just moved out. And then if we were selling this house now, Even if we, because we lived there, I don’t know if we could do that twice in a row, pick up the weight every other year.

Oh, I don’t think it matters. Okay. That’s good. That’s great to know, but I’m actually unsure about this cause I own the property and I rent it out for a couple of years. Okay. And I think I made a mistake there. I should have moved in for a year and they wouldn’t have to pay taxes on the gain or I don’t know if you would have appropriated it.

If that were the case. Okay. Yeah. I was trying to read about this too. Was one of the questions I was going to ask you about, but yeah, just talk to, just talk to a CPA who does this all the time. Okay. You don’t talk to a 1031 guy, they’re just necessarily on a tender one. That’s what they did to me. I’m not interested in that either, so yeah. Yeah. It might be. I’m not suggesting that I don’t call this tax evasion, but if you’re renting out to a family friend, in a way you’re living there. I don’t know. This might be a little borderline. Maybe we shouldn’t talk about this.

You know what I mean? Technically you’re living there, especially if you’re doing this as a charity and it’s a friend, maybe just you guys move in for a year. If they hit this three out of five, Your role? What did you buy this thing for? See the original purchase price. I probably should have. I probably should have started there. See, I took 10. Yeah. See, there’s a lot of capital gains there. You have $400,000 of capital gains. Have you guys been depreciating it every year on taxes? I don’t know for sure. To be honest with you, her mom does Texas, oh it sounds like if you had a new CPA, that’s the difference?

I think that if you’re depreciating it you’re definitely doing it the, on the up and up way. And I don’t think you can play these games where you have a family friend there and you’re technically still living there. But I would like to be on the up and up for sure. Yeah. Yeah.

And this is a, but this is a big gain, right? 400 grand, 50%. I don’t think 1031 is your answer. I don’t like those at all. Okay. But it’s not big enough to do like a delayed sale trust thing on it that you just might have to take it on the chin and just pay the taxes, but spend the hour talking to the right person about this strategy and Hey, can I move in one to hit this one year to get this three out of five year rule?

Could you’re really close to being. When did you say you moved out? 2016. Yeah. Yeah. There might be something there. So look into that. Maybe shoot me an email later. I can connect you with my guy and he can ask him straight up. So I’m saying you have 50 grand from your liquidity and then potentially another after commission. You’re going to have maybe another 200 there comfortably. So two 50 at very least you have to deploy.

And then this is the same one, right? Yeah. See, it’s just an auto fallback. So that’s your war chest. But. I think where you’re at Eden, do you have any experience with any kind of out-of-state rentals or anything like that? No. That’s one of the reasons why I was originally looking for one-on-one coaching and the mastermind group. Yes. So I think you’re looking at your net worth and yeah, I think actually, David looks at your net worth, but now that it makes sense.

You’re in this limbo land. I don’t know if, eventually your guys’ salary is high enough and your, private places are going to be yours, and you’re obviously very busy, but I would, I think your next pass would be to pick up a turnkey rental and just get some experience under your belt. Okay. That’s what I was thinking. Yeah. I was gonna talk to you about that. Yeah. Yeah. So let’s talk about that. We’ve got some bullets and now we need to figure out how we’re going to go fire these things and go acquire some properties. So what is, what have some things you’ve done so far, and then what’s your tentative action.

What about us so far has joined the mastermind group. I’ve been reading different things with your website? Yeah, there’s a, I’m at a point where I need some guidance. I don’t, I’m not exactly sure where to start, so that’s why I’m here. That’s why I’m talking to you right now. Okay. Okay. No, that makes total sense.

Because most times people they’ll come into the mastermind after. They’ll listen to the podcast for sure. But then they’ll, there’ll be con there’ll be doing some books and podcasts for about a few months to six months. And they’ve already got a formulated plan in their head.

They’re gonna learn about turnkey rentals. They are, they, and they already have that realization. I am sure you have already done this where you live in the bay area. You’re not going to find anything in the state. That’s going to cash flow. That’s not a D class. For sure. Yeah.

So the next logical step is all right, where do we buy? Are there any markets in your head that you’re eyeing? So I know the markets that people say to they’re interesting, or you should look at, but I don’t know how those decisions are made. That’s one of the ones, one of the main questions I was trying to figure out right off the bat was like, how are people finding markets?

And. What markets do. And why are they finding the why? Why is that a particular market? Like Kansas city, Indianapolis? I know I’ve read some of the stuff that people say, but I wouldn’t know. If you give me a map, like where do I begin looking at it? And then finding a good parking spot? Yeah the simplistic way I put it is you’re trying to find properties and secondary markets with robust economies.

So secondary markets or, places like Kansas city, Memphis, Indianapolis, Atlanta. You can categorize it by population size. Do you know? Not like the mega cities, but like at least a hundred thousand people good size. And then of course pair that with the robust economy. So Detroit’s the secondary market, but it’s not a very robust economy.

So that part I understand. How would you find how to prove yourself that this economy is robust? Like, for instance, Kansas city. Indianapolis. What are you looking at to prove to yourself? Oh, this is a real positive. I know why you would probably say to choose not. Oh you just look at one thing I look at is like fortune 500 companies in that area.

What kind of industries is it like? Las Vegas is not very economically diverse. City, it’s a lot different from tourism. There was a cool try. I had in the last investor quarter letter, video and site civil, passive cashflow.com/investor. Quarterly. I can display that real quick. Is that the one from last night or? Yeah. One from last night, but I don’t have, I don’t have a list for you, but.

But my thing is There’s already a list out there, it’s on a spoken list that people are like, oh, we just like to stay in these types of areas. Yeah. And the nice thing about that is that there’s already, if you follow the footsteps with other people have done. You don’t really have to recreate the wheel. There’s already property managers, brokers. And that was one of them. That’s one of the questions I had too, is if you’re investing out of state, how are you finding contractors? And this is through your network. Here’s that, that image. The green ones are supposedly more diversified job markets. The red ones are not, I don’t really agree with salt lake being a diversified market.

And I also don’t agree with Atlanta. Atlanta has got it all. It’s got like class C. Worker blue collar workers working in industries, manufacturing, like the Mercedes plants and stuff like that. And it’s got a lot of white collar workers to a very diversified market, that’s why you think Bloomberg made this thing.

I just took a lot of data points and we see the same things popping up again and again. But then you’re also looking for tertiary markets too, because even the secondary markets, everybody’s flocking to now. So Chris, on this one, for instance, they say Buffalo is a good bar, to provide market, but then isn’t that the one where the population went from 500,000 down to 250,000 for the last 15, 20 years or something like that, you might be right, but already am not even looking at it because it’s a primary market.

Brilliant. Okay. And in Baltimore is DC, right? Buffalo. Yeah, primary market. Okay. That’s not to say you can’t, it’s not going to be appreciated, but that’s just not the game I play or what I recommend. Yeah. I’ll just stick it out, looking at this map that stuck out to me when I saw it the first time. Yeah, so that’s my recommendation. And then, just taking this map, right? Kentucky, Memphis, Oklahoma city, New Orleans, Atlanta, Jacksonville. What you’re trying to do is you’re trying to narrow it down to a couple or at least one that you’re going to go in there and build relationships with brokers, property managers, you can’t do multiple, you can’t do three or more.

I don’t have time for that yet. So you’re being a typical engineer and this is what I do. You’re like, all right, I’m going to start with this big funnel. I’m going to start with 30 markets. And I’m going to pick the best, like that’s gonna surely take you a long time and you’re likely to arrive at the same answer where you’re like you know what, screw it.

Everybody talks about these five. I’m going to pick from those five and just whittle it down to one or two. Okay. I think that’s the better approach. Okay. But engineers, we like to get all this data and, in the, who we share drivers, all kinds of data from way back when you can, kinds of power rankings and whatnot. But I don’t know why I even put that in there. Just confuses you guys even more. Okay. But that the time and energy should be spent on connecting with brokers and property managers. Okay. How do you find, let’s say in Kansas city or something like that, how would you go ahead and find a broker and property insurance and to throw your network against yeah. People, referrals and this is why I always say the most important thing is to network with other passive investors. People like you and me. Because those are the people who are gonna, have the past pay for you. But here, the problem is you can’t just hand these guys, like there’s a, we have that free Facebook group.

As you pay for what you get for something, some of these guys, they just asked for what brokers you are working with? Man, I’m not going to help you out. You’re just like a taker, but it’s hard in the beginning because you don’t know very much. So you need to get educated. You need to put in some work. See there’s an even value exchange. So you can go to a little bit more of a student investor who potentially has a big vendor list. And become friends and how do you do that? There’s no tricks to it. You just become, build a relationship, a genuine relationship, go freaking figure.

Makes sense. Yeah, there’s a lot of tricks and hacks to get this from people or get it on your own, but I don’t think it’s sustainable because what you want to do is you want to try and build a mini micro tribe of a few. All investing. For me, it was like Birmingham. There were like a few people that were all messing around in Birmingham. We all knew who the property managers were. And then if something went wrong, someone wasn’t performing, we’d all move like a mini flock to a different one, or we didn’t know who to tell. So that’s the more sustainable model. And hopefully when these guys get tired of turnkey rentals and go to bigger stuff, you’ve had.

That’s a solid relationship to move forward with them. Okay. But any other tangible, more granular stuff I left out there. I know that’s a high level, right? That’s more esoteric. Yeah. I don’t know. I just like the process of just getting started, it’s to start looking at some of these properties that they have called them up, yeah, I guess that’s the process. That’s what I’m asking is, find someone there in the network and NASA like maybe, Hey, who do I contact in Kansas city per se or Indianapolis, and then discount. Started to talk. There’s people who are more than happy, I’m sure to sell it.

But what I understand is that these things go pretty quick. That’s what I’m seeing on the mastermind, like their properties come up and then they go for it. So you have to know what you’re looking for and, in a mastermind I’ll help you out for sure. I’ve got my vendor list. I keep it close to the chest. And people like, I like talking with people and doing those free intro calls just to get to know people. But I don’t know, like lately I’ve been a little worried of just alright, I, use these guys in Birmingham, use these guys and, wherever.

Because these are my relationships. I don’t want to be a jerk over who just is going to call up eight different Turkey providers and waste them. Guys time. Yeah. So that’s what I’m thinking, you’re the mastermind, I’ll help you out. I’m always working to build new relationships. I’m actually working on a new one in Pennsylvania, rural Pennsylvania. So where do you have your first one? Yeah. I think you had a property in Pennsylvania. Yeah. So that’s where that relation came from. We worked on some deals out there and then they’re pretty helpful. So I trust them and that’s what’s more.

Yeah. And if I can build like a long-term relationship where they know that a lot of you guys will come back, then that’s a good, solid relationship that, it’s more of a long-term thing, but I don’t, I want you guys to struggle a little bit, because this is how you learn how to do it, but. I also want you guys to hit success, right? So there’s a balance between how much I help you guys. If you want me to do everything, yeah, I can do, I guess I can do everything, but maybe that might change in the near future as my bandwidth fills up. But, the more you struggle, the more you learn and the more you learn, the more you progress 5, 10, 15, 20 years from now.

But I think what I try to do is so I’ll set you up with some good reputable people. So you don’t have to go through the whole list of turnkey providers. At least, you’re working with people who are decent, right? They’re honest people. Men, what I suggest is like you just get their inventory lists and then you just see where the water line is.

All right. Cause when I was buying, I was, $90,000 properties they’re renting for nine 50. I knew I had it all on a scatter chart and I knew 1.1 rent evaluation. That’s my number. I don’t know where that is today. And I know where it is. Cause he sees where, I have you guys do the spreadsheet. And this is where the water line is, what a good deal is. You’re not going to find an amazing deal. It’s tricky rentals, but you don’t want to get a sucker deal. So when a good deal comes up, you’ve got to act pretty quickly, which may be in a matter of a few hours or a few days, depending on what kind of relationships you build with them again.

And then you pull the trigger. But I think No more times than not a newer investor thinks that they need to close on the property. But for me, it’s more there’s a good chance. Maybe 30% chance. You probably there’s something that comes up and due diligence that you can’t work, negotiate your way through. So I’m probably a lot quicker to put a contract under. I’m more certain I’m more. All right, lock it up. Let’s put in going to contract and let’s get that inspector in there and let’s see what’s under the hood so I can act quickly. And that’s how you should be able to get. Okay, fair enough.

It’s dating, right? Like it’s been awhile. The strategy goes, you don’t get married after the, before asking them on a date, on a lot of dates, same thought here. I gotcha. Just cause you go on a date and ask doesn’t mean you’re going to get married for sure. Any other questions on just picking prop properties up in that kind of way? Yeah. So I think the other question I had was if you’re, the recommendation is always to get from you is to get a turnkey to start, but then like a high level, what do you, what’s the progression there? So you get a Twinkie, you get, get comfortable working out of state.

And then I don’t want to keep buying turnkeys as they’re applied at the. Yeah, like we’re talking about right there. Not that they’re not the best, right? Yeah. Yeah. And, but the beauty of this is once you get one turnkey and you get it going. Yeah. Sometimes they don’t work out. I would say like one out of three times you might buy a dud. It just gives you some problems, but overall you’re hitting that nice returns on average. Okay. Definitely way better than the stock market. That’s what. You’re talking. But then here’s the path. And a lot of the investors that I started working alongside when I started there’s this path of you do the whole burst strategy by rent rehab refinance, which I’m not a fan of at all for high net worth individuals to be buying like 50,000 pieces of junk because the exit strategy isn’t there.

Like you can have a portfolio of 40 properties of 600 or $60,000 each, but that’s cash flowing, but there’s a cap ex, that’s going to hit you on this stuff somewhere between year five and 15, and now you’re going to pay back all these returns. It’s just not a sustainable way of investing, but it’s a way of doing it. And I guess nothing is wrong with you. If you can prove me wrong with the numbers, but you’re going to go down this path of burning and creating value that way, because maybe you like doing that. And this is where you’re starting to do it and you start to figure out if you like it. And if you’re good at it, me personally, I don’t like it.

And because I don’t like it, I don’t spend the time doing it and I never got really good at it. Okay. So that’s why I went to be more passive in a bigger deal. And that’s the progression. But we don’t know until you do this prerequisite, this is the pre-calc to ease and calculus. So I’m not, so I’m not going to let you go by Hey lane, they want to sell me. And I have a quarter million dollars. That means I can buy 1, 2, 3, 4, 8. I can buy 12 rentals for probably 1200. Pretty solid ones tomorrow. I would probably be like, no, don’t do that.

At most maybe by four and let’s pause and think, and let’s come back and talk six months to a year from now where you w where do you want to go? What’s your thoughts and feelings and how things are progressing. Okay. So that’s, you know what that said? I don’t think you’re going to be able to invest that quarter million dollars in the next six months.

Maybe, probably even a year. Okay. So what’s a good recommendation for parking, nothing instead of just having sit and savings like AHP is a good one, simple, passive cashflow.com/hp. They don’t sponsor me anymore, unfortunately, but, yeah, I still think it’s a good place to store some cash.

For you, I wouldn’t stick more than a hundred grand in there. Okay. I think let’s just say, let’s just assume now I’m getting more high-level strategy where the money comes from. I would take the money out from your liquidity and invest as soon as possible. What is that?

The 80 grand. And in the back of your head, you can pull a HELOC Okay. You need from that rental property, right? Yeah. So I would totally be fine with you running your liquidity for me. Your cash reserves are pretty low, maybe even 10 grand. You see what I’m saying? Yeah, for sure. It was still saving a decent month or month and the house sale, maybe you delay that a little bit to next year. I know that one’s a tough one. It’s not like I see a lot of guys with big 401ks and you don’t have that. Where is that? But she’s still at the employer, right? That’s she’s out of that one. Oh, okay. Where did that one go? If you go to the summary. A little bit right there it’s like 24. So she has left her employer, whatever you don’t roll it over into a new TSP or 403 B or 401k. Yeah, she’s just sitting there. I would take that out. If you had more than 150, $200,000, I’ll be very strategic on how you take that out. Like tickets slowly, you have to look at your whole taxes.

There’s brackets, right? They’re like full brackets. You’re probably in the second to highest one. Now. I don’t know how they exactly fall. Yeah. I don’t know. I think, yeah, probably close. Yeah. So if you take this thing out this year, you’re probably going to the highest one or maybe even the second highest one. We want to keep you just from going to the next one. So see what I’m saying. You got to be strategic on how much you take out of that thing this year. So say I don’t know what AGI is. Are they changed all the time? And I don’t know what it is for married couples. It’s AGI adjusted gross income.

So let’s just say the highest one starts at two 50 and right now you’re at 200. Okay. As your AGI, I would maybe take this 91,000. I would take 50 grand. So you just stayed below that. And then the next, the plan for next year is to take the other 40. So you’re always slip it under the radar that the red, so we’re over two 50.

So why don’t, I don’t know. You got to look at the tax. A CPA should be able to help you out with. Okay, but they’re not, CPAs are not strategy guys. That’s where you got me, but I don’t know the exact brackets, but you get the gist of what you’re talking about.

You’re smart. You can figure it out. So that would be a way to play that, to take it out slowly. ‘ cause you’re looking, you’re not going to, we’re already halfway through the year. You’re not going to be able to deploy something. You’re not going to be able to deploy it. You’re not going to, I don’t see you buying more than three houses in the next six months. So this is probably a 2020 plan. Okay. But then also remember you also have to have been thinking about this in the back of your head. Like I do think you should sell that house right away. Yeah. So that 300,000 or $200,000 of gains comes right on your income. So if you’re going to do that, it’s going to blow up your AGI. Yeah.

So I wouldn’t touch, I wouldn’t take out that 4 0 3 B money. You know what I’m saying? Yeah, for sure. Unfortunately, with that house sale, you can’t be strategic. And how you take it out, you got to take all that. Yeah, that was a, I think I could’ve done that differently, but that’s how you pay to learn, yeah. Yeah. Am I clear here? You get the fundamentals right when I’m trying to, yeah. I guess the question on the 4 0 3 B is, do you get penalized when you pull it out? I don’t know how that works. Yeah. Number one, you finally get to assess the taxable income, right?

Because this is all post tax. You don’t pay taxes on the loan. But yeah, there is a 10% penalty, but I wouldn’t call it a penalty. We’ve had this conversation with my wife and I have had it before. So yeah, it is a very emotional conversation because people think it’s like a sin to take money out and they call it a penalty.

Now I’m not allowed to do that, but the numbers don’t lie. If you can make money, if you can make 20 to 30% in a Turkey rental, Who cares about the 10%. You’ll make that back in 12 months and the rest is all gravy. Yeah. Good point. So follow up, do the numbers yourself, the numbers tell you what to do.

But if you’re going to be selling the house, maybe I would hold off on it because you don’t need that money anyway. So right away, for sure. Yeah. Yeah. I would, you have a lot of liquidity and you don’t that you’re not going to be able to allocate. I don’t know. So for folks like yourself, I would look into doing infinite banking.

Yeah. Looking forward to that part of the we’ll get there. I think your net worth isn’t. It’s there, but the fact that you have a hundred grand or more ready to go, but you’re not going to be able to allocate it right away. I don’t see you allocating more. 50 grand this year.

I don’t, you’re not going to buy more than two houses. Okay. I think we can both agree to that. 2020. I don’t really see you allocating more than 150. Okay. See what I’m saying? So if we plan 2019 and 2020, that you’re going to go on with a quarter million dollars, you’re going to have some excess. What I’m recommending is taking a look at that excess and putting a fraction of that into life insurance where this stuff, where you have to put it in one out of six years. You have to commit, right? So I’m not a life insurance originator. You’re like, but I know the strategy. Yeah. Listen to that podcast you had. I think there was a podcast on that. Listen to you. Not too. I think he, maybe he didn’t do it, but yeah, this is a bit, if I just want to communicate like the strategy, they’re like, you’re not going to be using this liquidity right away.

You’re not even going to tap it in 2020. So you got to do something with it. AHP is an option, but the nice thing about the light, the infinite banking is super awesome in the once you have it set up three to six years in the future, but it really sucks cause there’s, it’s really fee heavy in the beginning. If you put in a hundred grand, you might have to pay 30 grand in fees. I see, but for like lower net worth guys who have to look under their couch for coins to pick up that first rental at $25,000 down payment, that obviously doesn’t make any sense for them, but you’re inefficient here.

And so you might buy players that take the inefficiencies and the extra five grand, actually 20 grand or whatever, into licensed. Pronounced to build it up. I see, don’t go bonkers with it. But, it is, I always say, start with a smaller one and you understand how it works. And yeah, because in theory is always different than in practical use and seeing the statements coming in oh, I get this now. And I can tell now I can take a loan for myself. Oh, this is why they call it infinite banking. I get it. Finally get it like a year later. Yeah. Okay. All right. But yeah, I think that’s from a high level, that’s kind of the one, two year strategy right there. Okay. So now I’m just gonna work on getting two, two houses this year.

That’s the immediate goal, but that’s your kind of your, one to your. Okay, fair enough. But yeah. Any other questions you had off the top of your head or? The questions I have pointed on. Interesting. On the podcast, those are one-on-one coaching stuff. Yeah. It’s more, I think, after this more granular, but you have, there’s a path there’s definitely a path for, I think after the two years, I see you getting maybe like three, four houses and then also maybe the middle of 2020.

Maybe play around with a deal, to a syndication and just seeing how that is. And then now you can like, be like, whoa, I like this a lot better. I’m pretty sure you’re gonna think this indication is better. It’s just better than direct operating. I don’t know the returns a little less, but it’s just not worth the time for an exchange.

Okay. So you’ll just go into more and more deals. I would say probably like three, four years from now. Because you’re especially saving 50 grand a year. I’m sure that’s going to go up. You’re like, you’re going to get into this rhythm of going into a deal every, maybe two or three deals a year and obviously that’s going to take a while, to build up like a war chest of a dozen two dozen deals, a $50,000 position in each deal. That’s, it’s a sustainable model and not all the deals are going to go well, not all of them. But I think on the average, you’re, what’s your goal here?

And I guess we didn’t talk about, you mean, why what’s my goal as far as passive income, or as far as why I’m here trying to learn this stuff, passive income, I guess it would be something around 10 K so that my living expenses are covered basically. So I could live the life I have right now and not have to worry about it going to work.

I can go to work. I probably will, but I don’t want to. Yeah, so if I press the Fed, like the infinity time still on, and I could just fast forward right now with the liquidity you have in hand and the equity you haven’t had, you could probably be, if I just take your assets and times 10%, you could probably be 500.

You could probably be halfway there today. So there’s a little bit of work to do. I took $500,000 of deployable equity. It’s what I figure times 0.1. So you’re halfway there. So it’s just a matter of deploying into another half, an half, a million dollars. And that’s just going to take you, if you keep saving $50,000 a year, that’s going to take another 10 year, but it’s not going to take you that.

Yeah. It’s going to take you like less than half. So I will probably see it in five years. Okay. That’d be great. I’d be completely happy with that. In the next couple of years you, it’s not going to be like, you just quit cold Turkey. It would probably be like a transition of maybe you start working last or spouse stop or the last or whatever. She likes her job. Good for her. We’re all happy for her. Okay we can get you out of your job. Any kind of last parting thoughts or questions? No, I just really just want to say thank you, man. I’ve been listening to podcasts for probably about two years and I’ve been busy cause I have a three-year-old now he’s in school, so I have more time. So I appreciate being able to join the mastermind and doing this call.

Yeah, just ex yeah. Yeah. I would give you props there. Like most people in the, Matt, a mastermind, but the investor club in general, they’re either younger than 30 or older than 40. It’s those, like when you guys have those young kids, I don’t have kids. So I don’t know. I’m just speculating to see how you get these data points. But when you guys have kids there’s you guys just disappear off the face of the earth. You guys don’t do anything other than focus on that, which makes sense. But it is. I think that if you were to take that perspective, you’re doing it the hardest time nobody does what you’re doing now.

That’s where I’ll take that. But the whole thing is if you do the right things, it’s very simple. It’s like swimming. I don’t swim very well. So I look like I’m drowning. I can get from point a to pretty quickly, but I’m going to get tired. But if you look at the most effective swimmers, it doesn’t even look like they’re working. They’re so efficient. So it’s the idea to get you to like that, like a graceful dolphin, but investing it’s nice. Yeah. All right, man. Yeah, if you guys like this shoot me an email. Let me know if we haven’t had a chat book, a call and join HUI pipeline club and check out the mastermind club at simplepassivecashflow.com/journey. I will talk to you guys next t

 

“Buy This, Not That” With Sam Dogen, the Financial Samurai

What’s up simple passive cashflow listeners. Today, we have Sam Dogen from the Financial Samurai. He’s got a book coming out and we wanted to discuss that and his story and what I really wanted to tease out. A lot of you guys have financial freedom, but there’s not really anybody you guys have to interact with who tells you what’s on the other side, after you’ve gone zero gravity or hit that escape velocity and your passive income is greater than your expenses.

But Sam, I didn’t realize we’d be talking ever, cuz we’ve been reading your financial blog since the beginning of my financial blog journey. Just to give people some insight. I graduated high school in 2003, and then somewhere in like freshman, sophomore year, when I didn’t have any money, I started to read all these financial blogs and yours was one of those that would keep coming up.

It perplexes me that I would read such stuff when I was broke, and didn’t have any money. And that’s what I tell a lot of, the listeners are a lot of the kids. If they don’t have money, most kids don’t care. Less weird ones like me but yeah, it’s nice to finally meet you financial samurai.

And for those of you guys, he still does his blog, which you guys can go and visit financial samurai.com. And I gave you a lot of credit Sam, like most of the guys who were doing it, when you did and got traction, they sold out, right? Like Mr. Money Mustache. I can’t even remember all of them, but they all sold out to larger companies.

And now it’s all you. Quite labeled and put out like that. But yours is still raw and it provides good insight for folks. Let’s get into the interview here. Maybe Sam, maybe just go over your quick background. Cause I think it’s very similar to a lot of the listeners today.

Thanks for having me. I started financial samurai in July, 2009, right at the bottom of the financial crisis. And it was just a way to make sense of all the destruction and the chaos because I have been working in finance since 1999. And, I’ve been saving and investing aggressively cuz I wanted to get out.

I didn’t really enjoy the work after the 10th year. And so when I started losing all my money, I mean I lost 35% of my net worth in six months that took 10 years to build. I am really pretty much afraid for my future. And so that’s when financial samurai was born, and by 2012 it was making, livable income stream.

But I was able to negotiate a severance that paid for many years of living expenses. So I decided, what, if I can get the severance I’m outta here, even though I’m only 34 years old, I just didn’t want to do the same thing over and over again. Life just felt too short. So I escaped. Yeah. So any type of instance when you were working that kind of was like, no, you know what, I’m gonna write this blog or did it all just slowly over time happen for you?

So I started going to Berkeley for business school part-time in 2003. Also because I thought I might get laid off the.com bubble was crashing in 2000, 2001, 2002. It was just, it was bad times. And I thought I had just left Goldman Sachs for two years from 1999 to 2001. And then I joined Credit Suisse in San Francisco.

And so there’s this last in first out type of thought process when you’re letting people go. And I was one of the last people in. So anyway, I started going to business school. Part-time just in case I got let go so that I could go to school. Full-time if I were to let go. And then I decided, oh, maybe I should start a personal finance site because I’m reading a lot of personal finance sites as well.

But nobody has a finance background writing about personal finance. So I said, oh, maybe I should start. So when I graduated in 2006, I was gonna start being a financial samurai. But I ended up not doing so because I was just too busy. And I said it’s time to work. And it’s time to give back to the company that paid for my tuition.

But finally, when I lost so much money in 2009, I had no more excuses not to start. So I said, you know what, let’s do it. Let’s see what happens. I paid some guy $500 on Craigslist to start the site, to do some design and just to get started. And I think that’s the hardest part for a lot of people trying new things to get started because once you start, you’ll learn and you’ll build that momentum.

Yeah, but there’s not many people that can get traction, like how you did, and it does take a little bit of luck, but in a way, it got you that gap to be able to make a little bit more money and kind of accelerate yourself down the financial path. So maybe talk a little bit about how that passive income got built up.

And then when did you finally cut the cord on the day job, the w. Yeah. So I worked in equities and that means my compensation and my career were tied to the stock market. And so the stock market does well. I do well. The stock market does poorly. I don’t do well. And so my instant thought after the first month of working was, oh man, getting in at 5:30 AM and leaving after 7:00 PM is unsustainable.

I didn’t want to last that long in my career. I knew I couldn’t last that long. And so from then on, I decided to save 50% of my income and reinvested. So I started reinvesting in dividend stocks, CDs, bonds, just whatever. But then what I did was, I was able to get lucky on a dot bomb stock that went from $3,000 to $150,000.

And so I sold out and I said, you know what? I should probably diversify my wealth into real estate. because I saw so many stocks go up huge and then just crash during the 2000- 2001 bubble. So I felt it was just like funny money. So I had better used my luck and I totally believe most of anything is luck.

Anything outside the average is luck. So I was able to convert that funny money stock gains into my first property in 2003, because I knew no matter what, I wouldn’t wake up one day and see my value of my rental property or my property go down 40%. It was a sticky investment, sticky rental income.

And so I started building my real estate portfolio in 2003, saved as much as I could and tried to diversify as much of my funny money or equity income into real assets. Going back to, like when you graduated college to year 10, we have a lot of these guys that will save they’ll max out their 401k.

I don’t know if it’s 25 grand these days, but were you one of these kids or putting away like 50, 70 grand a year from your paycheck to savings? Yeah, that was the easiest step. Back in, I think it was 1999- 2000. I maxed out my 401k at the time was 10,500, but after a while I realized, you can’t take from your 401k until you’re 59 and a half.

And I couldn’t last beyond age 40 in finance. I just knew I couldn’t. So I needed to figure out a way to generate passive income from my taxable portfolios. My taxable online brokerage count or real estate, which was my bread and butter. So that’s what I focused on doing and in San Francisco, you can live as a single person off 50,000 a year, 60,000 a year, but it’s very expensive here.

It’s more expensive than Honolulu. But by the time I left my day job in 2012, my investments were generating about $80,000 a year in passive income, which was a total livable income stream. I’m not bawling out buying fancy stuff and doing all that, but it was enough to leave and to take the leap of faith.

And because I had a severance package that paid for five years of living expenses, I said at the age of 34, that’s like leaving at age 39 or 40, which was my original target.
I did the same thing. I set away an X amount of money. I think it was like 50 or a hundred grand. And I figured that would be enough personal expenses to get me down the road a couple of years. And surely I would find out if this real estate syndication business would be successful by then.

But just to get an insight, cuz I think a lot of people are using folks like yourself as the test pilot in a way, in different terms, right? Fat fire, lean fire.

I’ll define the first two. Maybe you could define the other two that you coined, like barista fire and the others. But I would say I personally like fat fire. I don’t buy stupid things, but I buy things that are, hold its value over time. I do like nicer cars. I would buy an iPad.

If I’m gonna buy an iPad, I’m gonna buy the best freaking one. Or, but some people are lean fire where they’re just, these are the personal finance bloggers that retire with 800 grand. And they calculate that they can live off 45 grand for the rest of their life. And I’m scratching my head, but what’s the other two?

And where did you personally fit into all of this and maybe has it changed over the years? I think first of all, everybody’s lifestyle is different. So you gotta just accept it the way it is here in San Francisco. You qualify for low income housing. If you make under 115,000 a year and with a family of two children, and I have two kids.

And so my idea was to live off as an individual off $80,000 a year in investment income. When my wife left her day job at age 34 and a half as well. We decided to go for 150,000, just equality, doubling that number. And then we would add about $50,000 for each child because it’s expensive, right?

Preschool is like 2,500 a month. We pay for unsubsidized healthcare, which is now 2200 a month. And this is after taxes. So when I first left in 2012, I would say I was. You can call it wifi, actually wife, financial retirement, financial independence, because my wife who’s three years younger than me kept on working.

So I got her health insurance benefits and I told her if everything works out after three years, you two can join me by retiring early, cuz we believe in equality. And so WIFI is one way. Barista fire is interesting because. What if you take a job? I always thought maybe I’d take a job at Coldstone Creamery down in Honolulu somewhere and just get some health insurance, be a bartender or something like that.

So long as I can get some health insurance, like disaster insurance, that would be really helpful. Then you’d make whatever it’s $15 an hour or some spending money. And, you eat a lot of ice cream for free or drinks. So that’s barista fire, where you get a job, get some healthcare benefits and you fill that gap.

So you’re doing like. Just whatever, easy job to fill in that gap. But in terms of like the fat fire, lean fire, all that it’s just a gradation of how much you wanna spend in your daily day lifestyle. For us, I’ve done the calculations and you look at my budget for a family of four to live a middle class lifestyle in San Francisco is over $200,000 a year after taxes.

Yeah. Before taxes. 200 to 300,000 a year. And if you can make sure that you’re living fine, you have a house, you have a car, you go on vacations. So that’s my definition of what I want in terms of my post work life. So a lot of the listeners to hear are guys in that million dollar to few million dollar range.

Obviously you’ve moved past that, but what are some of the insights of early financial independence moving from that particular airspace that you can recall from your journey? In 2012, I left with about 3 million at age 34. And that was through like 13 years of 50 to 80% savings and investing.

And what I discovered was, even though I lost 80% of my income, my active income caused me to lose my job. I was happier because I had all the freedom in the world. I didn’t have anybody telling me what to do. I could wake up whenever I wanted without an alarm clock. I could play tennis at 11:00 AM, go boogie boarding at 3:00 PM after an afternoon siesta.

So what you should realize is that you probably won’t need as much as you think. Because you will gain so much more freedom and you’ll be much happier. So when I was 33, I started to get gray hairs, a lot of gray hairs, and I had like jaw pain. I had back pain, all that stuff. And when I left about six months after I left, cause I felt so much more relaxed.

The gray hair started going away and I stopped losing my hair. And so now at 45, I’m like, Hey, I still got my hair. I don’t have that pain as much anymore. And it was just, it was like that feeling of just freedom and a lightness from your shoulders. It was just priceless. It really was, and is priceless.

I don’t think people realize when you’re in the grind, you’re in a banking consulting industry, law, doctor, whatever, any high income paying job you’ve got. There’s a lot of stress and pain. And I don’t think people realize how much stress and how much pain they’re going through and they’re just sucking it up and keeping it hidden and just withholding it until they finally leave.

Now, what do you say to this kind of person? They get on the path to financial freedom. It’s not gonna be as instantaneous as nothing is, but they start to realize that FI is maybe three to six years down the road. And they somehow find a less stressful job, they stop caring a little bit.

It’s very close but they justify it as keeping a day job. As their kids are, your guys’ kids’ age. You can’t take them outta school. Like really can’t really travel too much because they’re stuck in school and you only can take ’em out four times and maybe a long summer.

These are like the. Gradations of possibilities and they’re good options. Would you still argue for just knocking it in the head and get to FI and quit? Or is that a good option? I think the luckiest people are the ones who find work that they love to do. I didn’t find that, I was miserable after the first year, but I gutted it out after 13 years of switching jobs.

So that was in a new city. So that was pretty fun going from New York city to San Francisco, but in terms of finding that lower paying job that provides more balance, I think that’s great because the ultimate goal is to do something that provides a meaning and purpose where you can still have a balanced and secure lifestyle, going all or nothing is extreme. And I did that because my job stock was like 60, 70 hours a week. Lot of stress, it just didn’t feel worth it, but that’s the irony, if I didn’t have a really stressful job right. Outta school I probably wouldn’t have saved as aggressively. I wouldn’t have learned as much about investing and trying to diversify my wealth. What did you do right outta college?

Same thing. My job absolutely sucked. I was traveling a hundred percent of the time and they treated me like crap funny guy construction, that was just how it is. So suck your job the more you want to get out. So if you can find that job that provides good balance. I would consider yourself blessed. Why bother trying to get to FI. Yeah, to me that ‘s a trifecta you can have, if you have one of these two things, you’re fine, which is you enjoy what you do, which I didn’t.

Number two, you like who you work with and then number three, you like your boss. If you have two of the three of those, consider yourself lucky. Yeah. If you have all three of them, don’t tell anybody. Cuz you’re probably living a dream, but yeah. Sometimes. As you’re trying to pass down this wealth and legacy, sometimes the insight of this struggle going through was what was needed to come to this path and this realization.

But I guess moving on, you’ve transcended to past that, end game mark, right? What are, what were some of the takeaways? Yeah. And some of the epiphanies that happen that you progress through? The first thing is it’s really jolting once you. No longer do your day job for however many years, right?

Because 40, 50, 60 hours a week, you’re spending that’s your identity. So once you stop doing that it’s very disconcerting. Not comfortable. And there’ll be a point maybe six months, maybe a year where you’ll feel lost. You’ll not know what to do because there’s only so many tennis matches you can play.

There are only so many European churches you can see before they all start looking the same. And you need to find something you enjoy doing that provides purpose because without purpose you’ll feel lost, you’ll probably feel sad. You might even get depressed. And so it shows that money is not the answer to all your problems.

Money is money helps with you not worrying so much about money or where your meal is gonna be. If you can get those stresses away and provide for your family, you’re gonna feel less stress, but it still leaves that hole of what to do. So it’s important before you leave your job. To know what you’re gonna do, retire to something, not from something.

And I recently celebrated my 10 year anniversary of being an early retiree and I called myself a fake retiree because these posts don’t write themselves. My book, buy this, not that it took two years to write. It takes a lot of work, but it provides a lot of meaning and purpose. And so that’s why I feel really lucky.

I feel like I have that trifecta that you mentioned. My wife is a really good boss. I like what I do, and I feel like I provide purpose. Yeah. The concept of ikigai, something good for the world. Obviously I’m a reader. Something you can monetize, something you’re halfway decent at and something you enjoy.

Yeah. But, I think it ‘s rare to find somebody, somebody to find something that hits on all four of those checkboxes. It’s rare, but I don’t know how much effort we really put in. Making to try to get those four things or those three out of the four, two out of the four.

You gotta be really intentional. If you wanna achieve financial freedom, you gotta be intentional by making a plan, reverse engineering that plan and figuring out how to get there year by age, whatever it is. And it’s the same thing with finding purpose in your life. How we go through the motions and then we wake up five to 10 years later and wonder.

What are we doing with our lives or where did all our money go? But if you’re intentional with your purpose to figure out what exactly you want to do, have you spent an hour a week figuring that out, talking to someone? I would say most people don’t, they just go to work and then they go watch football and basketball, and then they go back to work again on Monday.

So I’d be more intentional. Yeah. I would say it’s very possible to be, get to financial independence, doing it passively on the side, on. 30 minutes every day after work. But to me, and I like to hear your thoughts on this stem, but as far as finding purpose, something that hits ikigai for you, I feel like you need to really not have a day job.

Number one, and like to go through this I call it like an air bubble, like six months or maybe several years where you just don’t do Jack and you just sit and ponder what you’re gonna do. Have that inkling, what you’re gonna do before you pull the cord? Yeah, I started a financial ceremony in 2009 while I was working.

It was a side hustle. It was just my journal, but I loved it so much. I would wake up at 5:00 AM to go write. I would come back, eat, and I couldn’t wait to get going, writing or connecting with people online after 9:00 PM. And that’s all I really thought about before and after work. And so it was a point where after two and a half years, I was like, you know what?

This is fun. I know it’s, you can make some money off of it to subsidize my severance pay and my passive income. So why not go for it? Because the worst case scenario is. I failed. And then I just go back to work at age 36 or 37. That’s the thing it’s like the worst, your fears in your head are often way worse than reality.

Yeah. I’m curious how your wife went through this search for an ikigai. Cause I think cats like yourself and myself and a lot of the listeners, were pretty intentional. Like even if we didn’t have a job, we’ll figure something out. Yeah, sometimes the spouses are just going along for the journey.

Did you need to help her figure it out or maybe give us a little insight there? We met in college at the college of William and Mary. She worked in finance. The back end, I worked front end, and we have always been together since college and we’ve always been on the same game plan.

So we had goals. Where do you wanna live? I wanted to live in New York city cuz I wanted to try it at least once. Where do you ultimately wanna live? I want to live in San Francisco or California because it’s a great lifestyle. It’d be nice to go to Hawaii as well. And then, so we always were on the same page in terms of our goals and we always reconvene every month, every six months, every year to make sure we were together as a team working towards those goals.

So when she saw me leave at age 34, Guess what she too was like, oh, I would like to leave my job cuz she didn’t like her job either. And after 10 years of doing one thing, it gets boring. It doesn’t matter what you do. Even if you’re an NBA baller, I have a friend who was on the Warriors and he won three championships after a while.

He’s yeah, I’m good. I’m good. I don’t, traveling, all that time for six months a year is too tough. I think I’m good right now. And it wasn’t hard for her to convince her to join me in fake retirement at the age of 34 as well. So we had a plan, I said three years, I’m gonna try to boost our passive income to 150,000.

And if that happens and if the financial samurai is still around and still growing or still doing okay, you two can leave, but before you leave, please take the advice. And negotiated a severance. So we had a perfect plan where she negotiated a severance. It was like a six figure severance and it was worth about six figures in the sense that she decided to work two to three days a week with the same pay and do that for three to three, it was like at least three to six months.

And that was like a great transition. And so we were always on the same page. So I guess to answer your question, just make sure you have regular dialogues with your teammate, because at the end of the day, you’re a team and that was another, not to openly promote another book that you have in confuse everybody, but you’ve wrote another, book on that whole severance pay, right?

Yeah. Negotiating that. Yeah. How to engineer your layoff, how to negotiate a severance, basically, because if you’re gonna leave your job early, You might as well, try to negotiate a severance, especially if you’ve been there for longer than a couple years, the longer you’ve been there, the more important it is to try to negotiate a severance, because if you quit and you say peace out, you’re leaving your boss and your colleagues in lurch.

It’s hard to find a replacement. It might take three months to find someone and then it might take another three months to train them up to speed. So if you can negotiate a severance, why not? Don’t break up with someone over text message or ghost. Have a dialogue and say, Hey, how can I help find my replacement?

Train my replacement to ensure that there is seamless transition and as a reward, how about a severance package? And if you get laid off, you might get a severance package, but you also are eligible for unemployment benefits for up to 26 weeks usually. And we, you hit the honey hole with our podcast listeners. A lot of ’em are just on the edge there.

The best advice I had was just like, maybe just say you’re crazy or something, and then you can go on medical disability or something like that. That was the best advice I had. So I recommend everybody check out that book, but let’s talk about the new one.

Buy this not that which is available on Amazon. Yeah. It’s available everywhere. Buy this, not that. How to spend your way to wealth and freedom. I started writing it in early 2020. Finished it in 2022. It’s with a portfolio penguin, random house. And it’s a book about helping you achieve financial independence sooner rather than later, but more importantly, it’s a book about using a proper decision making framework to tackle some of life’s biggest dilemmas.

And these dilemmas can include, should I live in a low cost area of the country to save money or move to New York city where it’s super expensive, but the career opportunity is greater. Should I join a startup or should I join an established firm? Should I. Have children early or later, should I invest in stocks for real estate?

So I really tackle a lot of these big dilemmas because at the end of the day, money is just a means to an end, to have a better life, to have a greater life, more purposeful life. And I don’t want people looking back on their lives with regret that they didn’t try or that they didn’t make the right decision because they didn’t know what to do.

The great saying. If I knew then. What I know now things would be better. Things would be different. So the easiest way to never say that again, is to learn from people who’ve been through what you might go through and that’s the purpose of buying. That’s not that right. Never take advice from those who are not financially free.

As I say for those of you guys, who’ve checked out my book, I do this in a very paradigm manner. I think. The section where I say like the mistakes of what, how people do investing in 401ks and stuff like that, and buying a house to live in early, that’s basically what Sam’s book is, but all of it, and he goes into many more of these binary decisions, this is This, for a lot of analytical people, like this is what my marriage counselor or my tool book tells me is like people who are analytical and there’s a lot of you guys out there, you probably get really pissed off when your spouse tells you to explain why you’re doing something or why you guys should do something because you did like fifth, like five hours of like analysis in your head.

And you don’t like to explain it. And that’s how I am. But. I think the nice thing about this book is there’s a lot of things in there, like where I would just say, just don’t start a startup, right? If you’re not looking for cash. But Sam goes through each of these little aspects and takes the time.

And I personally don’t really listen to podcasts these days cuz you can’t get much in books 40 minutes, 50 minutes, it’s all like just a tip kind of information. I’ve fallen back to the basics of reading books, because to put a book together it’s long form contact, you actually need to think about what you’re writing.

It has to be concise, cuz it’s gonna live out there forever. Where to meet podcasts are like TikTok to books in a way short form content. And it’s just the surface. Took out the book, buy this, not that But I don’t know anything else. You think that our avatar out there you’d like to kinda.

Do you have many more insights or anything you think we missed there, Sam? I think just from this, not that one of the core principles is to encourage you to think in probabilities, not absolutes. So don’t think you need a hundred percent certainty before making a decision. Otherwise you’re gonna miss out on so many opportunities.

I didn’t know, with a hundred percent certainty, that if I left my day job in banking, that was paying really well. That I’d be okay. I didn’t know that, but I had a good feeling, at least a 70% chance that I would turn out. Okay. So I have a 70, 30 decision making framework that says, if you believe there’s a 70% probability or greater that you’re gonna make the right choice, I say, go for it while having the humility and understanding, knowing that about 30% of the time, hopefully less you’ll get it wrong, but unless it’s a catastrophic.

You’re gonna be fine because you’re gonna learn from your mistakes and learn how to be a better decision maker going forward. So think of probabilities, because life is, there’s no certainty in life, you always have to be calculating. Is this the right decision or not? But you start thinking about probabilities regularly.

If things become more and more like a matrix where you can see, oh, so you can figure it out. And it becomes a huge competitive advantage. When you’re going into battle with anybody or any kind of competitive situation. Did you make up that 70, 30 thing? Because I’ve heard it before from a CPA to being named nameless that if there’s a 70% chance he’s gonna win an audit, he just does it.

He takes the risk and does it. I have never heard of it, but that’s my internal mantra, cuz I’ve been working on the trading floor for 13 years. We make bets all the time. We make prop bets. Can you eat $35 worth of taco bell in one hour without puking? For example, that’s like what we do. We take tiger woods or the field with five to one odds.

We’re always making bets. And I think this decision making framer has been honed in me since working on the trading floors at Goldman Sachs and Credit Suisse for 13 years. And so it’s helped me think about things because a lot of people, they don’t have the right risk parameters in place. They don’t have any probabilities in place, you can really pick people off if you want to, by throwing out these different lines of risk. And that’s what, like the professional oddsmakers do in Vegas or in the UK, they create these odds that are, try to be as 50, 50 as possible. So they’ll never lose and they’ll just earn a spread.

And so that’s how you have to think, but I don’t think most people think that way, they just think, ah, I’m gonna wing it, or I gotta believe a hundred percent. That I’m gonna get the job before I apply, because there’s a lot of uncertainty and there’s a lot of fear. And when you start thinking about probabilities, you start gaining more courage.

And I think half the battle is being the courage, having the courage to go for what you want and being true with yourself. Yeah. And it, yeah, distills down to uncertainty, right? Like people who aren’t very successful, they just don’t. They just cling onto what’s certain. But I think another part of that is having enough net worth in a very secure thing, like infinite banking or something where you can hang your hat on, allowing you to hold onto the side of the pool as you go and make bigger shots.

I know, as you’ve expanded from your writings, you expanded into more venture capital stuff. And I tell PE other people look just because these higher net worth guys are doing something doesn’t mean you should. That’s why we people will start with the basics, just go after cash flow first because you cannot sustain a fall or a bad deal like Lane and Sam can.

But yeah, I think the biggest thing is just, read the book and just fill your mind with good stuff. So you have, can actually hold a conversation and expand your network with other people doing this. It’s so funny. So this is my first traditionally published book and it took so long.

So now that I’ve written a book, I appreciate every single book that has been published that comes to my doorstep. Or I see it on a bestseller list because I know how hard it was to write a book. Mine took two years, 15 plus revisions over and over again, polished. And golf is boring when you watch on TV, but if you play golf, If you actually get on the field, then suddenly it will be amazing.

And so definitely reading books. I agreed to read more books, people. The wealthiest people, the smartest people in the world, are reading books all the time, because it is written by an expert in that field. And it’s really hard to get a literary agent and it’s even harder to get a book published by a big publisher, like the gaunt.

It’s impossible. I tried to get a literary agent 10 years ago, and I got rejected by everyone. And so I spend more time reading books. It’s the best return on your investment ever. Let’s say you spend $27 or $25 buying a book. If it’s a good book, which most are the best, the best sellers are. It’ll provide a hundred times more value than the cost of the book immediately.

And that value will compound over time. It reminds me of the concept from Cal Newport deep work. I think that was his book. He’s a fellow portfolio penguin author. So like basically the concept folks have is look, everybody’s lazy and they just go after they just read the headlines.

Nobody reads the article. Everybody just listens to the podcast. That’s easy and they don’t read the dent book. And they don’t do things that are hard or more deeper work stuff. And that’s really where the gold is. Yeah, buy the book folks and listen to a simple passive cashflow podcast, despite what I’m saying, I do think everything is rational long term rational.

And so what I mean by that is if we want something bad enough, we’re gonna figure out a way to get there. And if we don’t figure out a way to get there Chances are high that it’s probably because we didn’t want it bad enough. So I want six pack abs. But I don’t want it bad enough to have a huge caloric deficit diet and do sit ups and pushups and all that every day for the rest of my life.

So forget it. I don’t care, but I do want to have my freedom. And it’s interesting once you have children that time becomes even more valuable because you juxtapose your one timeline against your child’s timeline and your child looks like they grow up way quicker than you, because they’re always changing and they’re always learning and developing.

And so personally I’m afraid to lose that freedom by having to go back to work, because I know my kids will be 13 years old one day and never want to hang out with dad anymore. They wanna hang out with their friends and then they’re gonna go to college and I’m sure 90% of their lifetime will be already spent.

And that’s it. Time is done. So I hope people can also feel the urgency of time to calculate what their time is worth. Because if you lose 35% of your investment portfolio or net worth in the next bear market, you have to calculate how much time based on your savings rate and your income, you will need.

To gain back those paper losses. And if it is more than 12 months for me, forget it, I don’t wanna do it. So that’s why my risk tolerance is relatively low. But if you’re young and you say I’m willing to work for three years at my saving rate to gain back my losses, then you have a high risk tolerance, then go for it. Take that bet. Swing for the fence. Great insights Sam. Again, folks Buy This, Not That on Amazon, and we’ll see you guys next time. Aloha. All right. Good chatting.

U.S. Economy: Foundation of Today’s Crisis | Podcast With Richard Duncan Part 1

Hey, simple passive cash listeners today is going to be a foundational podcast for a lot of you folks. We’ve with a repeat guest, Richard Duncan who wrote four books, analyzing the causes and the effects of the economic crisis. Now we’ve had him on the podcast in the back, but I brought Richard back and the way we’re gonna run this today is we’re gonna split this up into a couple of podcasts.

So this first podcast you guys are gonna be hearing is a little bit more evergreen. It’s a lot of his understanding and a lot of the stuff I’ve adopted in my understanding of the economy. And I think it’s gonna be very important for a lot of you guys, maybe replay this podcast again and.

There’s just a very different thought process and like how sophisticated people see different news articles in the media talking about the economy and how things really work today stay tuned and the second half or the next podcast, we’re gonna be talking a little bit more timely, current events.

What I say is learn the foundations that we’re gonna be talking about here today, because whatever happens in the world last time we talked to Richard, it was 2019, and I’m sure we were talking about the Koreans bombing Hawaii at that time or something.

I think that was the black Swan event at the time today in Ukraine, but whatever it is in the future by knowing these fundamental ideas, I think it gives you a better way to take everything in and not just be paralyzed and take into the fear mongering of the news media.

Thanks for jumping on Richard. I appreciate it. Lane, thanks for having me back. It’s a pleasure to be here. Yeah. So for people who are not familiar with Richard he runs a paid newsletter called market watch, which I subscribe to along with a lot of the other founding office members in our community.

And, he’ll come up with a, it is about a video a week, or no, every yeah, every month, I think you come up with a new one and a lot of it’s very timely, but a lot of it is more foundational. So we’re gonna be just, hitting the tip of the iceberg today. Let’s get started Richard.

For a lot of the investors, they’re new to how the economy works, how the fed works. Where should we start out first. The most important thing I think for everyone to begin with to understand is that the economy no longer works the way it did in the past.

The big break came when the United States stopped backing dollars with gold. That happened between 1968 and 1971. And afterwards our economic system evolved in a very different way. So the economic theory that everyone is still taught in university, all of the classical economic theory that was developed in the 19th century and before that was all based on the initial foundation stone, the initial premise that gold was money.

And it was all built on that foundation stone gold was money and therefore the economy had to work in a certain way because the gold was money, but after gold stopped being money in 1968, then things started to evolve. And now our economic system works in a very different way than it did before. And so it requires a different kind of economic theory to understand the way it works.

Because after all, I think everyone’s pretty convinced now that the old theory just can’t explain the way things work in the modern world. That’s why there’s been so much confusion about what’s going on in the economy for the last several decades. So let me explain in a little bit more detail. Up until 1968 the US central bank was required to own gold.

To issue to back up all the dollars it issued. That’s the way it had been since the Fed was created in 1913, but by 1968, the Fed didn’t have enough gold left to allow it to issue any more dollars. So this was a huge problem because if the money supply couldn’t grow, the economy would have a crisis.

So Congress changed the law and they removed that requirement for the Fed to hold any gold backing for the dollar whatsoever. That happened in 1968. And then just a few years later, Richard Nixon destroyed the Brett and woods system because that was based on allowing other countries to convert their dollars into US gold.

But by 1971, the US just didn’t have enough gold left to allow other countries to convert all of their dollars into US gold. We would’ve completely had no gold left whatsoever had that occurred. So Nixon renewed that promise for the US to allow other countries to convert his dollars into gold.

And so afterwards there was no longer a link in Melink whatsoever between dollars or money and gold. And afterwards the economic system started to evolve in ways that no one had anticipated or planned on. It just evolved naturally once these gold golden feathers were removed, things started to change most obviously.

The one thing that changed was the Fed was suddenly free to create as much money as it wanted, as long as it didn’t create high rates of inflation. So the next thing that changed was because the fed was free to create a lot of money. This enabled the US government to run larger budget deficits than it could be before without pushing up interest rates.

In the olden days, since there was only a limited amount of money, if the government had very large budget deficits, then it would’ve had to borrow a lot of money. And there was only a fixed amount of money. So the government borrowing would push up interest rates and that would, they say, crowd out the private sector because the higher interest rates made a lot of investments unprofitable, and that was bad for the economy.

But once the Fed was freed to create a bunch of money, as it pleased, it enabled the government to have larger budget deficits because the Fed created money and bought a lot of this government debt and financed the government budget deficits at low interest rates. So more that allowed more fiscal stimulus and that allowed the government to direct the economy more by having larger budget deficits and spending more.

Now the next, very important thing that changed after dollars ceased to be backed by. Was the trade between countries no longer balanced? It seems odd to think that before 1971 trade between countries was balanced, we had such enormous US governments and such enormous US trade deficits. Now, for instance, this year, the US trade deficit is going to be something like 1 trillion.

And we’ve all grown up in this world over the last three or four decades where the US has run these extraordinarily large trade deficits. But before 1971, that just didn’t happen. Trade was in balance. And the reason it was in balance was because, for example, if the US had a big trade deficit, let’s say with China, as it does today, it would’ve had to send its gold over to China to pay for the trade deficit.

And so US gold, which was money. The money supply would’ve contracted, and that would’ve caused a very severe recession in the United States. So unemployment would’ve gone up and there would’ve been deflation. And pretty soon, the Americans wouldn’t have enough gold left to allow it to continue buying things from China or any other country.

So trade had to come back into balance. There was an automatic adjustment mechanism under the bread and wood system. And before that, under the gold standard that made sure that trade between countries had to balance, because if it didn’t balance, you had to pay for your deficit with gold and gold was money.

You’d run out of money. And so you’d stop having a trade deficit was very simple, but once gold was no longer money, it didn’t take the United States very long to discover that it could start running very large trade deficits with other countries and it no longer had to pay with gold. It could just pay with paper dollars or treasury bonds denominated in paper dollars.

And there was no limit as to how many of these the US government could create. So starting in the early 1980s, the US started having a very big trade deficit for the first time ever. And by the middle of the 1980s, it was equal to 3.5% of GDP. That was just something entirely unprecedented, unimaginable.

But that was just the beginning in 1990, around 1990, China entered the global economy. And so the US started having larger and larger trade deficits with China. And by 2006, the US trade deficit was 800 billion in that one year alone. That was 6% of US GDP. Now, of course, this was fantastic for global economic growth.

Because with the US having an $800 billion trade deficit in that one year, that meant the rest of the world could have an $800 billion trade surplus. In other words, it could, the rest of the world could produce $800 billion worth of goods, more than it would’ve otherwise been able to do and sell it all to the United States.

And so this was a thing that, you could say, was globalization as the US trade deficit exploded between 1980 in 2006. This globalization, this huge US trade deficit created a global economic boom that allowed one country after another, around the world to grow through export led growth.

This had really started a bit earlier after world war II with Japan and being able to industrialize by selling a lot of goods to the United States and then Korea and then Taiwan. Then later Thailand and Indonesia, Malaysia, and more recently Vietnam and China. So in particular, all of Asia has been able to industrialize largely because it’s been able to make manufactured goods and sell them to the United States.

So this was great for the developing countries in Asia. It, in fact, pooled hundreds of millions of people around the world out of poverty. But from the US perspective, why this was so important is because when the US started buying more and more goods from low wage countries like Thailand and Indonesia and later China and Vietnam.

This by buying goods from low wage countries, this pushed down the cost of manufactured goods in the United States. It was disinflationary. It drove down the inflation rate and it also drove down wages in the US or held wages down. And so this is the reason that the inflation rate came down so sharply from the early 1980s up until very recently, globalization was extremely deflationary and it kept the inflation rate very low and that allowed interest rates in the US to go to very low levels.

So for example, because the inflation was so low, that meant that the interest rates could be very low. Between the year 2000 and the time when COVID started roughly a 20 year period, the average rate of inflation in the United States was 1.7% in that 20 year period. So that was below the Fed’s 2% inflation target for two decades.

So the Fed’s biggest worry was preventing deflation during those decades, rather than worrying about inflation. So the reason this is so important is because back say in the 1960s and 1970s before, while trade was still in balance, if the us government ran very large budget deficits and over stimulated the economy, and if the fed created a lot of money to help finance those trade deficits, then that always led the very high rates of inflation.

And the reason that led to very high rates of inflation is because all of that government spending and stimulus and money creation, would’ve created such a strong economic growth in the United States that everyone would have a job. And also all of the factories would be working at full industrial capacity.

The car factories would be working flat out. The steel factories would be manufacturing all the steel that it could possibly manufacture. And so we hit domestic bottlenecks, and these domestic bottlenecks resulted in prices moving up, both wages and the cost of manufactured goods. And this led to a wage push inflation spiral that we experienced throughout the 1970s.

So then everything changed though in the 1980s, because we started running these very big trade deficits with the rest of the world and they were very deflationary. So the deflationary forces from globalization completely offset all of the inflationary forces that were being caused by the very large government budget deficits and all of the paper money that was being created by the fed.

And we still ended up in a situation where. The inflation rate was lower than the fed wanted. And interest rates were very low and the very low interest rates, then there were two results from low interest rates. One credit expanded very rapidly, and the credit growth started to drive economic growth.

And also the low interest rates meant that asset prices inflated when interest rates moved down, asset prices like property and also stocks and all the asset classes tend to move up. So our economic system started, it evolved over these past many decades after dollars ceased to be backed by gold. And we moved into an economic system where credit growth became the most important driver of economic growth.

This was something quite so Richard, let me, before we move to creditism, yeah, so check my understanding here of Globalization like globalization is like a disruptor in a way. The way I see it, to use it in a modern day analogy, it’s like the apple M one ship.

It’s like a disruptor technology. It runs cooler. It’s a lot quicker. This apple, silicone, I don’t know all the things, but like for the time being it’s a total game changer and that’s what globalization was. It was the ability to get cheaper labor elsewhere. And that helped both sides of the equation, which is why India and China the, they came up in terms of network or worth, and America was able to outsource a lot of these jobs.

But in a way, is it like the apple, one ship getting old, five years, 10 years in the future? Is that kind of what’s going on with globalization? It’s been around for a while. You’re right. So globalization really produced a paradigm shift. And I’ve written about this in my new book, which is called the money revolution.

So what I’ve been describing so far since we’ve been talking is this money revolution that has occurred since dollars used to be backed by gold. The catalyst for the revolution was when the US stopped backing dollars with gold. And now what we’re experiencing is a partial reversal of globalization.

And this has occurred over the last couple of years first because COVID resulted in global supply chain bottlenecks. And more recently Russia’s invasion of Ukraine has worsened the global supply chain bottleneck. And this has caused inflation to spike. So for all of this time, from the early 1980s, inflation moved lower and lower until COVID hit.

And then once COVID hit well at first prices actually fell for a while when everyone was locked down. But soon after that, because of the government stimulus and the supply chain bottlenecks. Now we’re experiencing very high rates of inflation and this is a, so this has been a double blow to globalization that has represented a partial reversal of this paradigm shift that we’ve lived through as a result of globalization and the higher inflation rate poses, a very dire threat to not only economic growth, but wealth as we’ve already seen.

A great deal of wealth has been destroyed. This year stock prices have fallen and cryptos have crumbled and other risky asset prices have crashed. That’s because the reversal of globalization has driven up the inflation rate and that’s forced the Fed to tighten monetary policy very aggressively or begin to tighten it policy very aggressively with much more tightening to come.

Yeah, so that it’s not so much, globalization is getting old. It’s just that globalization has dealt various severe blows and it’s reeling. It is on its back feet. And it’s not certain how long we’re going to suffer this reversal to globalization. We’d like to think that COVID is going to come to an end sometime soon, but we can’t be certain about that.

In fact, the headlines just today are that, COVID, once again, is spreading around China. China has a zero COVID policy. So they’re shutting down their factories again and imposing new lockdowns. And so this winter, we may have an even worse variant of COVID than we’ve had thus far.

We just don’t know how long COVID is going to last and how long it’s going to continue disrupting its supply chains and how long it’s going to continue to hammer globalization. And likewise, we don’t know how long the war in Ukraine is going to go on. Hopefully it will end tomorrow. But on the other hand, in a worst case scenario, it could spread to other countries in Europe or even become a world war.

So we just don’t know how this is going to play out. And that’s what makes it so frightening today for investors and for economists and analysts trying to forecast what’s going to happen with stock prices and other asset prices. And the outlook for the economy is very uncertain. Yeah. Those two headwinds, you just mentioned one would assume that it would go away in the next decade, let’s just to have there’s some point where it, the impact ends, but globalization, to me, I feel still feel like there’s that’s still gonna keep ticking for a lot, much longer than that. Maybe even several more decades, like how, we said at one time the United States has no more oil fossil fuel, but apparently there’s a boatload of it, right?

That’s right. If COVID goes away, I believe it will. Not that I’m qualified to discuss that, but I hope that war will end sometime soon and not become World War II. Those, it probably will. COVID probably will go away. The war probably will end and things probably will go back the way they were in 2019.

For example, the last time we spoke. And if that occurs, then we’ll be back in this world where globalization is exerting very strong, downward pressure on us prices. And we’ll, it probably won’t take very long to get back to the point where inflation in the US is once again, below the Fed’s 2% inflation target.

And if we move back in that position, that is ideal because it allows the government to manage the economy pretty effectively through large budget deficits when necessary and through quantitative easing with the Fed, creating money and buying government bonds to help finance the government spending at low interest rates.

And of course the low interest rate, environment’s very positive for asset prices. So hopefully we will return there before too many more years have passed. Let’s back up cuz I, some people, so we don’t leave anybody behind here. Some people slow down to absorb a lot of this, which is makes a lot of sense to me as you go over this and this is what a lot, a lot of this content is actually taught through, a large module in Richard’s market watch content on his website, but maybe probably go to creditism and quantitative, easing, quantitative, I think people hear about it, but maybe not all together.

They hear it spoken about in the news here or there, Okay. So again, once dollars cease to be backed by gold, our economic system evolved and it evolved into a system that requires credit growth. Our economic system, our economy became dependent on credit growth. For example, going back to 1952, every time total credit in the US grew by less than 2% adjusted for inflation.

The US went into recession and the recession didn’t end until there was another very big surge of credit expansion. So that tells us that the US economy requires at least 2% credit growth adjusted for inflation to stay out of recession. That happened nine times between 1952 and 2009. And every time that credit grew by less than 2%, there was a recession.

Now let me add this total credit has accelerated so radically during my lifetime, what I mean by total credit? Total credit is the same thing as total debt. Because one person’s debt is another person’s asset. A credit that they’ve extended is debt to someone else. So you can look at this as all the debt in the country, not just the government debt, but the household’s debt, the corporation’s debt, the financial sector’s debt, all the debt in the country.

First went through 1 trillion in 1964, by 2007, just on the Eve of the financial crisis. It has expanded to more than 50 trillion. So that was a 50 fold expansion of credit in just 43 years. And now total credit is 90 trillion. So 90 trillion of credit expansion in just 52 years and credit growth became the main driver of economic growth.

As I’ve said, anytime credit grew by less than 2%, the US went into recession. Then, the crisis of 2008 occurred because the private sector had taken on so much debt. The households in particular had taken on so much debt that they couldn’t repay it. They couldn’t continue paying interest on their mortgages.

And so they started defaulting and the private sector started defaulting and the banks started to fail, but the government intervened very aggressively with multi-trillion dollar budget deficits, and the Fed helped finance those budget deficits with money creation. So between 2008 and 2014, the US government dead increased by 7 trillion.

And the Fed created three and a half trillion dollars through quantitative easing. To finance that government debt at low interest rates and the combination of government fiscal stimulus and money creation by the Fed prevented a new, great depression. It reflected the global bubble that started to pop in 2008 and it carried on, it carried us on up until 2020 when COVID started.

So I described this news, the way the economy works now is driven by credit growth. So rather than calling this capitalism. I call it creditism. Capitalism was an economic system that was driven this way. Businessmen would invest. Some of them would make a profit. They would save their profits. Or in other words, accumulate capital, hence capitalism and repeat.

So it was driven by investment and saving and then more investment and more in saving. And that’s what drove economic growth under capitalism, but in recent decades, that’s not the way our economic system works at all anymore. The growth driver for our economic system for decades now has been credit growth and consumption and more credit growth and more consumption.

So our economy has become dependent on credit growth. And as long as credit keeps expanding, everything’s fine. But when credit slows down and grows by less than 2% adjusted for inflation, we have a recession. And if credit starts to contract, as it almost did in 2008, then we would go into a great depression.

The government understands this and it now manages the economy as best it can to make sure that credit keeps expanding one way or the other. So after 2008, the private sector really couldn’t take on a great deal of additional credit. So the government had to drive the economy by borrowing and spending, and even with the government borrowing and spending on a multi trillion dollar scale.

For the first four years after 2008, that still wasn’t enough to make credit grow a lot more. It wasn’t enough to get credit growing by 3%. In other words, adjusted for inflation. It was even with all the government stimulus and the government debt credit growth was still weak. It was just barely above the 2% recession threshold as I call it.

So the Fed stepped in and through very low interest rates and round after round of quantitative easing, the Fed drove up asset prices and this created a wealth effect. The wealth increased and that allowed the Americans to consume more. And this, so this wealth effect engineered by the Fed supplemented the weak credit growth and allowed the economy to keep expanding.

So from between 2009, the end of last year, total wealth in the United States expanded by 150%. Total wealth grew by 90 trillion in those 13 years from 60 trillion in 2009 to 150 trillion at the end of last year, 150% increase in household sector wealth in the us. And of course the creation of 90 trillion of wealth was very helpful in making the economy continue to grow.

It allowed people to spend more money, more consumption, and consumption’s 70% of GDPs. So that helped fuel the US economy and that made the economy grow. But the problem was that the wealth, the asset prices were moving up much more rapidly than income. So the asset prices became extremely inflated.

There’s a very good measure, a good index that I look at called. I call it the wealth to income ratio. And when the wealth to income ratio goes very high, that tells you that asset prices are too expensive and they’re likely to correct. So what this wealth income ratio actually is the household sector net worth, which I was just talking about.

Household sector, net worth, hit 150 trillion at the end of last year. This household sector net worth is divided by personal disposable income. So it’s wealth to income. Now, the average for this ratio, going back to 1950, this wealth income ratio has averaged. 550% since 1950. But during the NASDAQ bubble, it hit a record high of 620% because the NASDAQ stocks were so expensive and that bubble popped, and it went back to its average of 550%.

Then during the property bubble, the wealth income ratio shot up to a new record, high of six hundred and six hundred 70%. And then the property bubble popped in 2008. And this wealth income ratio went back to its average 550%. But by the end of last year, because of this extraordinary frenzy, in all of the asset markets, the wealth income ratio went up to 820%.

That was 23% and above its previous all time high at the peak of the property bubble. This was telling us that asset prices were extremely stretched. And very vulnerable to anything that could go wrong. And the thing that went wrong is inflation went up and the Fed had to start tightening barriers aggressively.

And so now we’ve had the first half of this year has been the worst year for stocks going back to what the 1960s and in the second quarter in particular was particularly harsh. So we’ve seen NASDAQ down more than 30%. The S and P’s have been down more than 20%, two thirds of all the value of crypto has been destroyed and other expensive asset prices are crashing as well.

But even after this, the wealth to income ratio based on my calculations is still 730%. So it’s still. 10% above its previous, all time peak in, at the peak of the property bubble. So this is telling us that asset prices are still very expensive and potentially have a lot more downside to go. For instance, if the wealth income ratio were to fall back to its 50 year average of 550%, a total of 50 trillion of wealth would have to be destroyed between the end of last year.

And by the time we hit the average at the end of last year, total wealth in the US was $150 trillion. It’s now down because the sell off in the stock market is now probably about 135 trillion. But to return to its average, it would have to fall to 100 and $100 trillion. And that suggests that up to another $35 trillion of wealth could be destroyed.

Before we return to the average. Now it’s not certain that we are going to return to the average, but much of that is going to depend on how high the Fed increases interest rates and how much money the Fed destroys through quantitative tightening, which just started last month. Yeah. I think that’s a kind of a fascinating ratio right there.

How, but I’m thinking that there’s a wealth gap, right? Part of that is taking in the average consumer out there, which is getting worse and worse than the top 1% or 0.1%. How does that factor in wouldn’t there be even wouldn’t their percentage getting less and less over time if that’s the case, that’s the overall trend?

You’re right. The income inequality has become very much worse and over the last few years, but over the last couple of decades as well, if a lot of wealth is destroyed, a lot of that wealth will be wealth belonging to people who have more than a billion dollars, but at the same time, if we see, so if that’s the case, then you know, it might not be so terrible because someone who has $15 billion, it’s probably not going to spend a lot less money than when he had 20 billion.

He’s still going to keep spending a lot of money, but whereas someone who’s at the bottom of the income distribution spectrum, if they lose a little wealth, they would have to probably spend much less money. But now of course, a lot of Americans own stocks and a lot of Americans own crypto as well recently.

And with stock prices down so far already, these people are probably going to feel less wealthy. They’re probably going to cut back on their spending. Of course, all of the government stimulus over the last few years has helped boost savings and has enabled the American public broadly to spend more money.

But of course, those stimulus programs are over. Now. The first one was in March, 2020, the second one was December, 2020. And the third one was in March, 2021. That was 15 months ago, so that there aren’t going to be any more big stimulus packages. So that source of consumer spending is going to dry it very quickly as well, that, combined with the big losses in their 401k plans.

And once they realize how much money they’ve lost in the stock market this year, that’s likely to deter them from spending as much. So it’s going to be a real drag on the economy and soon property prices are also likely to begin to fall. As interest rates keep moving higher. Of course the property markets enjoyed a wonderful run.

I think it’s up to something like a third. Property prices on average home prices are up something like a third over the last two years, and they’re still going higher on a year on year basis, but that’s likely to reverse before long. The Fed has just now started tightening interest rates and they’re going to keep tightening rates.

They increased the federal funds rate by 75 basis points last month. And they’re expected to increase another 75 basis points at the end of this month. And they’re likely to keep increasing the federal funds rate every time they meet through the middle of next year. So it’s not the federal funds rate now; it’s roughly in a range between 1.5% and 1.75%.

But by the middle of next year, it could move up to four and a half percent. And if it does, then the 10 year government bond yield is going to be at least four and a half percent and mortgage rates are going to be significantly higher than that. And so property prices are likely to begin falling and a lot.

And of course, most Americans are nearly most of all the Americans own their own homes or the majority at least. And so if they start feeling that their home prices are following, this is also going to curb their consumption, right? And with the fed increasing, the fed inflation rate now has shot up to 8.6%.

These are CPI headline numbers. The core numbers are lower, but they’re still well above the Fed’s 2% inflation target. So the Fed’s going to have to keep hiking the federal funds rate and pushing interest rates higher. The Fed’s mandate is stable prices and maximum employment. While employment’s extremely low, 3.6%, the Fed’s going to have to concentrate on bringing down the inflation rate.

Now, inflation is driven by supply and demand. If there’s too much demand and too little supply, then you get rising in prices. And the fed can’t do anything on the supply side, the fed can’t go out and drill more oil Wells or plant more wheat. They only can operate on the demand side. And so, what that means is they have to make demand go lower.

If they’re going to bring the inflation rate down. And the only way they can bring the demand side lower is by increasing interest rates so far that they throw millions of Americans out of work, and also destroy a lot of wealth by making the stock market and the property market fall. And by that makes demand lower by making demand lower, that makes inflation lower and so that’s what they’re intending to do now. They’re intending to drive up the unemployment rate, they’re intending to destroy wealth so that the inflation rate comes back down.

July 2022 Monthly Market Update

Hello everybody. This is the July, 2022 monthly market update, where I’m gonna be going over some collection of news articles that I thought were relevant for investors out there. And if you guys are interested in getting to know us and our community a little bit better, join our group at simplepassivecashflow.com/club.

There we’ll be sending out invites. We’ve got a mixer in Los Angeles, second week of July and then third week of July Arizona. So if you guys want to be invited to those events and not have FOMO, because they’re at home wondering if you’re the only accredited investor out there investing in real estate all by yourself, you guys can join up with those groups.

So check out my book the journey in simple passive cash flow, which you guys can access. That’s the little hint by listening to these videos. You guys get the little hints here, there, which is to get the free audio version at simplepassivecashflow.com/book. And you guys also can check out these recordings.

We keep ’em at simplepassivecashflow.com/investorletter. So if you wanna go back to all the past months reports and see what I’m saying and catch me if I’m lying or saying that it’s a good market or bad market, or not, you guys can go back to those archives. But first thing, I think everybody’s talking about interest rates creeping up, but this kind of was a nice chart that I found where it showed the points in the timeline when the Fed increased the rates quite a bit.

And how long of an increase was it before they backtracked and where they realize, oh shoot, we manipulated the interest rates too high, and the economy’s getting crappy. We better stop doing that. So again, a lot of this, if you guys are listening in the podcast form, which that’s our main channel, but we also put this up on the YouTube channel and to make it confusing, there’s actually two YouTube channels there’s the simple passive cash flow channel and then there’s the rich uncle channel, which is more geared towards non-accredited investors out there where the accredited investors should check out more simple, passive cash flow stuff. But what we’re looking at here is, there’s been 1, 2, 3, 4 times in history, not including now from 1990 to 2022.

So the last 30 years where there’s been periods where the Fed has increased rates gradually. Right now we’re in a bit of an incline right now. Nobody knows how long it’s going to go. But what I’m personally looking at is is unemployment gonna start creeping up? Because right now, every lot of the metrics are looking really good.

And, I follow ITR economics, they’re an unbiased type of data source I look at and a lot of things are looking good. I don’t know where a lot of people are getting this, all this doom and gloom type of stuff. And when you’ll get the doom and gloom people, a lot of ’em are broke, which is why, they’re always just looking for excuses not to do anything.

This time it’s unique. The reason why they’re increasing interest rates is because inflation is so high, which means if you don’t do anything and just play, oh, there’s doom and gloom. I’m just gonna sit on my butt and not do anything and just sit on cash. You will lose nine, 10% of your money every single year.

But yeah, if you, this is sort, we wanna keep this interactive folks. So if you guys have any questions or comments, please type it into the chat below. But yeah. Article here from Wallet hub best and worst places to raise a family. Now, I always look at these there’s so many of these types of like top 10 places and sometimes they don’t mean very much just on, if you’re looking to move the top 10 places, Fremont, California, Overland park, Kansas Irvine, California, Plano, Texas, Columbia, Maryland, San Diego, California. Seattle Washington, Santa Jose Manon, Scottsdale Arizona. So may or may not be the most, may not be the best places to invest, but supposedly there’s the best places to have a family. Honolulu is out there at 34, but if you’re like me, you wanna know where the worst places are, cuz you like to tease those places. Some of those are like Detroit, Cleveland, Memphis, Birmingham center, Bernardino, California, Newark umlet billPort Jackson, Mississippi, and Augusta, Georgia.

Billionaire Sam Zel, who is a real estate guru out there. He says I’ve stayed away from Bitcoin at all costs Sam whose net worth has estimated 5.8 billion reiterated that his anti Bitcoin stands Thursday, inter interview with CNBC. And I quote, he says I basically stayed away from Bitcoin at all costs. I think that’s when it’s all said and done. Any kind of currency without the backing of a government is in some fashion, unlikely to work.

I think Warren buffet or his other buddy Munger said they would never invest in companies like Apple and tech companies, but they eventually took up a big holding. I’m not a big fan of actually I do like how these cryptocurrencies Bitcoin, Etherium, in, for the most part, because they’re more of the blue chip type of cryptos are here to stay.

But I don’t invest with, especially now with all the turmoil, with all these big companies, which are like the brokerages are going under. And I think I actually have a long video on this, like crypto, winter. It’ll probably be released next week. YouTube got angry at us cuz we didn’t use free music.

So we have to rework that. We’ll probably get it out later on this week for you guys on the rich channel. Wall Street journal reports that bidding wars overheated the home buyer market. Now they’re coming for renters. So bidding wars have been long stable house housing markets where buyers compete with offers above the seller listings price.

Now with the home buyer pricing, going back in the favor, the buyers. Now that they’re also saying that an increased number of white collar professionals, some who recently sold houses are reluctant to buy because of record high home prices. Rising mortgage rates which ultimately is affordability.

They’re renting instead, and this is driving up the demands. It’s good if you’re a landlord on the right side of this, the median US asking rent price has to $2,000 for the first time in may. If there’s one thing I’m going to do if I would like to gamble on something is like rents don’t really go down for long periods of time. Now, once a long period of time, I don’t know, like one to three years or greater, a big range, but it’s just true. In my opinion, it’s just not something that really goes down. John Burns real estate consulting. They’re talking about the man shifting from owning to renting.

I still rent folks. It’s cool. I’m not a loser because I don’t own my own house. I invest it instead and they make a lot more at the end of the day, paying rent. Yes, it is technically like throwing money down the tube. But if you have your money sitting in your home equity, doing nothing that is even worse.

So you gotta look holistically. So if they break down the difference, the cost of owning versus renting, single family homes, and a little over a year ago, the monthly cost of owning and renting were virtually identical. And it’s, that’s what we call in the engineering world. The crossover play. We love the crossover.

Hey Lloyd. Yeah, let me know when you wanna speak to the LA group. To do it, especially if it’s virtual, I like that visual stuff, so I can not travel and be away and let me sleep on my own bed. That was the thing I was traveling a lot for when I did work. And this sucks, some people get off on getting all these freaking fire points and having high status and like, all right, that’s cool.

But each their own, I just don’t think that’s all. Oh, I think that’s a little overrated. Again, each their own. I don’t wanna offend anybody out there, but that’s just not my thing. I prefer to stay at home. So they’re also saying Raleigh Durham, Nashville, Denver, Tampa and Phoenix have all witnessed the biggest disparity in increasing home ownership versus rental costs.

Again, you guys can take a look at all these charts on the YouTube channel. If you really wanna geek out on the numbers. Matthew says it’s a long term game. Don’t worry about the short term GDP numbers. I guess while we are talking about GDP numbers, last quarter, like a recession, is defined as two quarters in a role where you have negative GDP growth.

Last quarter was negative 1.5, which sounds not the greatest. And typically we’re tracking upon two to 3% is what the Fed would like. But the year prior in 2021 like we hit 20 something percent. So yeah yeah, relative speaking, that was a horrible quarter. But to me, it’s just like a lot of pent up demand flushing through the system.

And I would actually expect, the 20% is ridiculous. It’s also ridiculous to shut down a country for about a quarter two. But I just think overall, you can look at it from like a one year trend line. You’re still doing pretty dang good. I don’t know where this Dodo is going.

I’m cautious. Don’t get me wrong and then buying off good debt, service, risk coverage ratios. But, I don’t know. I just think people really like doom, gloom, and fear point. I heard that friend means that one fear point, I like that. Sorry, junior. Sorry, you’re offended. I try not to offend people.

The joint center for housing studies at Harvard says that record breaking home prices and rents like to cool as interest rates climb. Thank you, Harvard for pointing out something super obvious, but if this is new to you guys, so what’s happening is the interest rates climb because again, the fed is using interest rates to cool off inflation, which is pretty high right now.

The interest rates are important because that impacts how much people can borrow or in other words, affordability. So people can’t afford that mortgage that they couldn’t afford in the first place they sure can’t afford now with the interest rates going up, which is why we don’t know if there’s less, more supply, less demand.

We don’t know what the prices are a composite of that and we do know it is like the prices aren’t going up at the same rate that once was in the past year or two. And nor would I say that those two increases from the last few years were sustainable again. And this is where a lot of people are like, oh my God, it’s slowing growth.

The world is over. And it’s saying oh, it’s still growing guys. Just because it’s not going up 20% or rent isn’t going up 20%, like in 2021 doesn’t mean the world’s coming to end. So with interest rates rising on top of the double digit home prices, the income and savings needed to qualify for a home loan have skyrocketed, which is, really wordy way of saying that affordability is taking a hit.

Potential home buyers saw monthly mortgage payments on the median price, US home rise by more than $600 over the past year. That’s on the monthly payments. $600 for most people is a big chunk for sure. Last takeaway from this article, these joint centers for housing studies. If you guys are always looking for good stuff to read, that’s not just like your Yahoo, finance and CNBC stuff. These are actually pretty good, insightful articles. Sometimes they don’t tell us anything. And that’s why I try to throw some of this stuff out.

But they’re saying renters were particularly burned in the first year of the pandemic, job and income losses early in the pandemic, increased affordability challenges for millions of households who are already struggling. And this is talking about how the pandemic wasn’t really fair, right? The higher end, the people in the B+, A+ housing live and work from home.

They order Uber eats and they continue to work at their computers where the people who are on the lower end, your class, C class B housing, your renters, your workforce housing, or your workforce that live in workforce housing. Are there the correct workers out there? And sometimes their jobs were cut off because of that pandemic shutdown.

John Burns reports that in the first three weeks of may 30 year mortgages hovered around. 5.25 and ease just above 5%. By month end, as for sale demand weekend, single family rentals are conform. These are, these would be good for you guys to take a look at again. We post that at simplepassivecashflow.com/investor letter.

John Burns. Yeah. These things are kind of meat to go over in the video and the podcast version. So we’ll skip ahead to a real page. They’re talking about the US apartment market showing no signs of slowing down yet. This is where I’d like to separate like the residential housing world, which is based on comparable sales, which is based on not investor sentiment, but just regular average people who need a house to live in it.

Affordability, interest rates are a big thing to them. Whereas this is more on the commercial side. Not seeing a quite slow down yet. In fact, we’re actually, as of right now in July, 2022, I would say that we are still in a micro bubble where we’re in a buyer’s market. You’re probably wondering what the heck is lane saying it’s a buyer’s market.

Yes. Because a lot of the institutions, the guys who really move the markets that are buying a big. Apartments and commercial assets, they pulled out about a month ago and just did nothing and just waited to see the situation, which greatly takes out a lot of the demand and the supply demand dynamic.

Therefore there’s more, a little more supply than demand out there than there is normally, which creates a buyer’s market. So there’s a little bit of a buying opportunity right now. And. But, that’s typical, right? Like when things are uncertain and people are what do we do here?

That’s the time to be buying. Of course every deal is pretty typical or every deal is individual. And I’m just speaking in generalities. But now that’s why I think if you’re out there looking for more of these commercial larger deals that institutions might be looking after 200 or 500 units.

There might be an opportunity before those bigger players come back and they’ll come back in because they have to buy, and this should make people sick to their stomach. These large institutions and others get most of their money when they deploy capital. So they gotta come back in, pay for their own salaries at some point.

Which I would probably say maybe next year’s kind of, when this little micro bubble will close up or next month and this micro bubble will close up and it gets. To normal. So markets with the steepest replacement rents as of may, Le reading off from the top Miami New York for Ladale Tampa, Orlando, San Diego, west Palm beach, Nashville, Seattle, New York, New Jersey among individual Metro areas, Florida remains home to some of the largest rent increases. Among the 50 size Metro areas, the smallest increases Jerry came in the Midwest and the Northeast.

No surprise cuz who wants to live there. Sorry, junior, if you’re offended by that, just joking. He identified himself as the Canary and the coalmine offended person, but, Midwest and Northeast, nobody wants to live there apparently anymore because they’re all moving away because maybe it’s too cold. Whatever it is, that’s what the numbers show. Most of the people are moving down to the south. The Sunbelt states multi-housing news. Out of state rental applications rose 42% during the pandemic since the TransUnion, which means that people are moving out of state, Texas had the largest increase in new residents between 2020 and 2021 with more than 310,000 residents while New York saw the highest decrease. Losing about the same, more people were leaving California, the rust belt and Northeast, and heading to the Sunbelt and Rocky mountain regions. Wow.

Didn’t I say that last time? The top 10 multifamily markets by sales volume in 2021. Just reading ’em off from the top to the bottom, Dallas Fort Worth, Atlanta, Phoenix, Houston, Denver, Miami, Washington, DC, Orlando, Tampa, Petersburg, Tampa St. Petersburg Raleigh. Now I would, I just wanna point out just because there’s a lot of like sales volume, does it really mean too much?

Because like some of these are much larger markets than others. And just because things are being transacted there doesn’t, to me doesn’t really mean anything. But I think it’s just like for people looking for anomalies in the data, this would be one of those to put on your radar.

But at these 10, none of these really surprise me. These are, you always see these ones up there now, top multi-family markets for construction activities. So these are. Be where you’re gonna see the most units come online. And at first gut reaction, you would think that this might be bad I don’t know.

From one point of view, you could think of this as a bad idea, because if you have an apartment in say Dallas, which is number one, that’s more competition coming online. But on the other hand, why the heck are these super smart development companies building stuff over there in the first place?

If they’re the demand. Take it for what you guys want. But here’s the list. And from the most to the least Dallas, Austin, Phoenix, Washington, DC, Miami, New York, Los Angeles, Atlanta, Seattle, Denver,

And it’s the same, same information, but from the real page, most apartments under construction. Phoenix Austin, New York, Dallas, Washington, DC, New York, Atlanta, Los Angeles, Seattle, Denver. That’s pretty much the same thing. That’s what meta-analysis is: you compare two or more articles, which we just did.

So commercial property executives talking about five states that are corporate relocation, magnet nets. What’s making these people relocate there? Maybe there’s a more influx of headquarters. I know a lot of ’em are going to Texas every day. But yeah. Number one, Texas. Number two, Florida.

Number three, Arizona. No surprise there. Just to name a few. So Texas is Tesla digital Realty, Oracle ACOM with pat K. We have a lot of engineers in our group, so I. Most of ’em have worked for AECOM at some point in their life, Florida companies like blockchain.com, block tower capital, the Walt Disney companies, SkyWater technologies and Arizona companies like send, do so move and align technology.

I don’t know what these companies are, but I know Arizona has a lot of the growth of the semiconductor front. They don’t want those, People out of the east to take our, they took our lunch with the whole semiconductors back in the day, but now we’re gonna try and eat them at their own game or that was once our game with the semiconductors out there with Intel.

If you guys are all interested in that, just like YouTube, TSMC, Intel, and the Mac articles, those videos will come. But other states are Georgia and Tennessee,like 1.2, five battery giga factory set to rise near Phoenix. California. And I put this one in here just to note that tech companies aren’t completely abandoning all their office space folks. It is coming back, who knows it’s gonna be the same as before, but I think companies are starting to realize that the need for a physical presence is real.

CNBC business. There’s an article on is it time to prepare for a recession? So they’re saying the economies are close to entering recession. Perhaps as soon as this year to avoid taking too much of a financial hit, Americans will need to prepare, where do they go, okay. What would they say here?

They’re saying that there’s some economic headwinds with war, Ukraine, COVID lockdowns and China reply resulting in supply shocks that boosted inflation and slow growth. A key part of the inflation problem is linked to the massive 3.9 trillion in fiscal stimulus ejected into the economy in 2020 and 2021.

That’s why everybody’s stock market stuff blew up the last couple years and why you’re starting to give it back now. And you’re saying for the average ER, it’s hard to find a place to hide. Recessions are usually accompanied by outright bear markets with stocks following by well over 20%. And when fed now hiking rates aggressively, the bond market is no safe Haven equities and bond markets are riskier.

Usually, what can Americans do for a CMBC business? One answer may be due to nothing and just try to write out the volatility without trying to time the market. That was probably written by some financial planner who says, oh, it goes up and down. You might as well just stay where you’re at. And I can keep my assets of the management fee with you.

They also say consumers might consider coming back on non-essential spending, especially avoiding Spying on big ticket items. Yeah. A crappy, but here’s my take off the top of my head. I would like, I would, is this the right term monetize? My helos, if you guys, he have helos, I would get that into cash and put it into like life insurance.

That way you can control it. So when, if they ever do pull those home equity lines of credit, you’re not at the bank’s mercy to arbitrarily, just randomly do that stuff. I would also say, this is why you invest in cash flow, right? The people who got hurt back in 2007 and eight were the idiots who were betting on appreciation.

And when things went down they couldn’t pay their debt service. So what that’s, what it comes down to, it’s not a loan to value things. It’s a debt to service, coverage ratio. And especially with things like your guys’ homes that don’t make any money, it’s not how much equity or loan the value has. What’s your debt service coverage ratio?

You’re probably saying you’re being a smartass lane. My house doesn’t have any debt service coverage ratio. It doesn’t make any money. That’s exactly why you shouldn’t have it in the first place, in my opinion, unless your net worth is two to three times greater than what your house.

So you have a $500,000 house. I don’t think you should buy a house until your network is one, 1.5 at least. That’s why they call me a rich uncle. And I’m like a cranky uncle in a way. And that’s, you can hear more of that on that YouTube channel, Fannie MA’s article here, they’re talking about rising rates, persistent inflation and further soft economic outlook.

What the last article was saying. They’re saying expectations that the full year 2022 real GDP world will be at a reduced rate of 1.3%. So positive. But they’re reducing their initial guidance, a little less than 1%. But that’s technically not a recession, right?

Recession is two negative quarters in a row. But here’s the thing, right? Like when nobody knows when this recession is gonna end. No, I actually quite frankly think we’re in a relative recession right now, but the hard thing is you can’t time the market, like when this thing goes, unless you’re in playing in the game and the hard thing with real estate, it’s you can’t just come back in.

You can’t time the market. So as soon as you think it’s coming back, if you’ve already lost it already, Wealth management.com. They’re talking about rising interest rates. Aren’t stopping apartment investors from cutting deals, fed plans to continue to raise interest rates, to help stem inflation. And that’s changing the math for apartment investors, looking to make deals. Other factors, rising rents are still going up.

And are offsetting the interest rates. One thing that I’ll say that’s not in here, that’s hurting cash flow now is because the property values are going up, the property taxes are going up and that’s can take a huge chunk out of, not a huge chunk, but like 10 to 20% of like your cash flow on the property taxes in the end.

That’s good. I, because you’re. Property is going up in value and you don’t get to realize that until the end. But that’s the big thing there. Oh I’m glad you did this, Matt. Cuz I’m gonna troll you right here. So this is probably one of the biggest mistakes I see investors make is that you have maybe $200,000 equity in your house. And you think of it in terms of like how most people think of it, where you’re borrowing it like 2.7%, which is a great interest rate, but that’s not how sophisticated investors stink at things.

They don’t really, yeah. Interest rate is important, but they don’t care about interest rate. They care about your net worth and what’s happened to your net worth. So the important thing is to like what you can do with that $200,000 equity and put it elsewhere. You could probably buy like three other or four other houses with.

I think the biggest thing is if you can get into the value add game, I think there’s a lot of like lower networked investors doing that, buy rent, rehab, birth strategy, but for a lot of in credit investors, that’s just a waste of time, especially if you make, multiple six figures doing that type of stuff.

And you’re working with little pull down contractors who just are like one day from stealing your money. Take a look. What I would say is look at, simple, passive, casual.com/ro OE return on equity, download the spreadsheet and just follow the numbers right after a certain time, when your equity goes up, your return on equity goes down and it, after time, it you’re probably making like less than double digits at that point need to do one or three things, do a Helo.

Buy more assets with that Helo or do a refinance buy more assets with that, that, or sell the asset and give you that up into more and more assets, essentially relenting yourself back up to that, 80% loan to value that you started and just keeping that value high, what do I know?

I know I have 8,000 properties but Fortune magazine says the cooling housing market enters into the great DEC acceleration, inventory levels are rising again. I think the nice thing, the cool thing about here is this kind of cyclical too, which we definitely see inventory coming down.

Cooling housing prices enter the great DEC acceleration. So they always come up with these little marketable terms to sell headlines. The great deceleration or the other one I heard was, I can’t even remember it, it’s that kind of stuff. That’s all, it’s simple folks, right?

Like inflation is high because they pumped a lot of fake money into the economy the last two, three years because of the pandemic, who knows what else they’re hiding. But that’s what happened. And like the stock market is high because of that. And because they pumped a lot, this money in there, inflation is.

So inflation, they need to keep that between two to 3%. And that’s what the Fed is mandated to do so that they can keep the highs relatively moderate. And, but more importantly, keep the lows, not as low and which is why they are increasing the interest rates to get some dry powder there now.

But they don’t wanna do it too much to crater the economy in which, so they have to look at things like unemployment because it is a It’s a it’s a sensitive game, right? It’s complicated. First the federal reserve has moved into inflation. Fighting mode, says fortune uh, second, the overheated 2022 spring market has pushed us over the edge into what housing economists calls, an overvalued housing market. Yeah, I would probably say things are a little bit overheated, here’s my, here’s my crystal ball.

I don’t really care. To me it’s like the NBA finals. I don’t care if the golden state warriors are in. And I don’t know who else, who did they play? I guess they heat. I think they played the heat. I don’t care if the Lakers aren’t playing, but that’s how I look at the residential housing market.

Like I don’t really give a. Where it goes. But if I were to guess, I think that there will be some softening, but, prices might go down 5%, but I don’t think if you’re a person out there, you can time it, unless you like, you’re real. You’re like a realtor. It’s just gonna keep going up and on factor this we’re in a Fiat currency world.

It’s all fake money at this. And as long as the Fed can keep inflation under control, meaning it can keep going like this forever. Zillow says that the most popular markets of early 20, 22 pricey suburbs topless were Woodenville, Washington, Burke, Virginia Highlands ranch, west chase, Florida, which is Tampa, Seattle, Los Angeles, Atlanta. Los Angeles, San Louis, and Denver. I don’t know if that’s useful for people, that’s, I guess those are great places to live.

I don’t know if there are great places to invest, real page reports, neighborhood level, resident retention levels. So retention levels are when. Tenants are turned, not turned over, but they renew their contracts to stay. And it could be for a variety of reasons, but seemingly if they are staying as renters, this may be a sign that they’re not able to step up to home ownership, or they’re not economically mobile.

Obviously the best retention rates, as they’re saying here is class B and C, because those are your less economically mobile people. Like we had. I would say a couple of nicer class, B plus type of assets, and a lot of the people there, they jumped ship because interest rates were really low a couple years ago and they moved up, which kind of sucked for us.

It’s kinda if you have a good employee and then they leave you because they’re good, it makes you sad. It’s the same feeling that class B and the C are the type of residents that do stay, some save all their lives, actually some markets with the best retention. Indianapolis Cleveland Milwaukee, New York, Miami San Diego, Riverside, Boston, and wealth management.com. In this article, I’ll just summarize basically class a. Apartments are going up and price higher where the class C the lower end stuff isn’t as much. And this is obvious why, right? Cuz the higher end stuff, they’re a little bit less price sensitive where the class C stuff people, they are more value driven.

And also I think coming out of the pandemic, as I said earlier in the show, people who are class, a type of tenants, had a much easier time. Time through the pandemic economically, where a lot of the class C workforce housing folks had a tough time. And we had some folks, sometimes we’ll get to work with the church and they’ll come in and they’ll sit down with the people and help ’em, do job applications and stuff like that.

Or, the people from like the mall will come in, put up flyers and it’s just, I don’t know. They. It’s tough. Like I say money doesn’t make, is not everything, but it sure makes life a lot easier. Multi-housing news reports that New York says no to a good cause. Eviction bill.

So this is a landmark type of article and this, I would say, look. Bills like this to set precedence. And so basically what happened was that New York state ended its legislative session without taking action on the proposed good cause eviction bill, a decision that was cheered by multifamily industry representatives.

We say it amounts to another form of rent control and will hinder rather than create affordable housing. And, so basically it’s It’s not rent control happening the opposite of that, and this kind of bounces back and forth. We, I think the last landmark type of article we had that maybe happened several months ago in California, where they had, they started to allow in single family home zoned areas they allow multi-family zone areas, which, It’s essentially a democratic Republican argument where, you know, like the affluent areas don’t want multifamily in their backyard.

But the prices get so expensive, like expensive. What are you gonna do? So these states are like New York and California, and Oregon and Washington are typically more. They deal with the stuff first, right? Like them, they’re on the forefront and they pin away set precedents for the states to come after.

But if you’re somebody who’s against rent control, this was a good one for you guys. I just think that eventually things typically go in the favor of rent control and that type of stuff. New York to transform distressed hotels into affordable housing. This law allows for class B hotels to use certificates of occupancy to operate as residential spaces. Add more flexible rules for converting underutilized hotel space into affordable housing.

Type any questions you guys have into the chat. But if you guys haven’t joined our group, you can go to simplepassivecashflow.com/club. And if you guys are an accredited investor and really tired of just screwing around with all these non-accredited investors out there and you wanna find a close knit, private group, check out our family office ohana mastermind, which is our inner circle at simplepassivecashflow.com/journey. Pretty much everybody’s accredited these days. It’s actually 90 members now. This is outdated, but we just have to come to the events and talk to the other FOOM members. I would say it’s hard for me to go over it.

We’ll hit you guys hopefully I think junior was offended earlier. We made amends. I should probably watch myself in my jokes before we need to meet in person, which I think we will. I think I saw your name on the list for Los Angeles, so we will meet in person and then we can offend each other.

But if not no questions. We will see you guys. Thanks, Andrew. Thanks for your comments and then Matthew, no hard feelings. You get that VA loan. That’s good for you. That’s why you do all that service, but yeah. Matt says I’m offended by people being offended by jokes.

Thanks for leaving those comments. It makes me not quiver, walking around, watching myself behind my back. Someone’s gonna shank me or something, but we’ll see you guys next time and stay calm, cash flow on.